NOTICE TO BIDDERS SPECIAL PROVISIONS BID BOOK
FOR
BRIDGE STREET BRIDGE REHABILITATION FEDERAL PROJECT #BHLO-5199(027)
SPECIFICATION NO. PW 2020-01 APPROVAL DATE: OCTOBER 8, 2019 CALTRANS STANDARD SPECIFCATIONS AND STANDARD PLANS DATED 2018 CITY OF ARROYO GRANDE ENGINEERING STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS DATED: APRIL 2016
PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT 1375 ASH STREET ARROYO GRANDE, CA 93420
This page intentionally blank.
This page intentionally blank. NOTICE TO BIDDERS
BID SUBMISSION
CITY OF ARROYO GRANDE, CALIFORNIA
Sealed bids will be received by the City of Arroyo Grande at the Public Works Administration Office located at 1375 Ash Street, Arroyo Grande California 93420, until
2:00 p.m. on January 30, 2020 at which time they will be publicly opened and read aloud. Submit bid in a sealed envelope plainly marked:
BRIDGE STREET BRIDGE REHABILITATION SPECIFICATION NO. PW 2020-01
Any bid received after the time and date specified will not be considered and will be returned to the bidder unopened. Bids received by Fax or Email will not be considered.
By submission of bid you agree to comply with all instructions and requirements in this notice and the contract documents.
All bids must be submitted on the Bid Item List form(s) provided and submitted with all other Bid Forms included in these Special Provisions.
Each bid must be accompanied by either a: 1. certified check 2. cashier's check 3. bidder's bond made payable to the City of Arroyo Grande for an amount equal to ten percent of the bid amount as a guaranty. Guaranty will be forfeited to the City Arroyo Grande if the bidder, to whom the contract is awarded, fails to enter into the contract.
The City of Arroyo Grande reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids or waive any informality in a bid.
All bids are to be compared on the basis of the Public Works Director's estimate of the quantities of work to be done, as shown on the Bid Item List.
Bids will only be accepted from bidders that are licensed in compliance with the provisions of Chapter 9, Division III of Business and Professions Code.
The award of the contract, if awarded, will be to the lowest responsive bid submitted by a responsible contractor whose bid complies with the requirements prescribed herein. If the contract is awarded, the contract will be awarded within 60 calendar days after the opening of the bids.
i NOTICE TO BIDDERS
Failure to raise defects in the notice to bidders or bid forms prior to bid opening constitute a waiver of those defects.
BID DOCUMENTS A copy of the plans and specifications may be downloaded, free of charge, from the City’s website at: http://www.arroyogrande.org/Bids.aspx . Plans and specifications are available for viewing at the following plan rooms: 1. Central California Builders Exchange 2. Santa Maria Valley Contractors Association 3. Central Coast Builders Association 4. San Luis Obispo County Builders Exchange A printed copy of the plans and specifications may be obtained by contacting: Blueprint Express 618 East Grand Avenue Arroyo Grande, CA 93420 (805) 481-1655 for a non-refundable fee of the cost of duplication.
Standard Specifications and Engineering Standards referenced in the Special Provisions may be downloaded, free of charge, from the City’s website at: http://www.arroyogrande.org/DocumentCenter/Home/View/3151 .
A printed copy of the Standard Specifications and Engineering Standards may be obtained by contacting: Blueprint Express 618 East Grand Avenue Arroyo Grande, CA 93420 (805) 481-1655 for a non-refundable fee of the cost of duplication.
The Caltrans Standard Specifications and Standard Plans may be viewed at the Caltrans' Office of Construction Contract Awards website and may be purchased at the Publication Distribution Unit.
You are responsible to obtain all issued addenda prior to bid opening. Addenda will be available to download at the City’s website listed above or at the office of the Public Works Director. Contact the Capital Improvement Project Manager, Jill McPeek at (805) 473- 5444 or the Public Works Department at (805) 473-5460 prior to bid opening to verify the number of addenda issued.
You are responsible to verify your contact information is correct on the plan holders list located on the City’s website at: http://www.arroyogrande.org/Bids.aspx .
ii NOTICE TO BIDDERS
PROJECT INFORMATION In general, the project consists of rehabilitating a historic truss bridge with a pedestrian walkway. Roadway structural section work including hot mix asphalt, aggregate base and aggregate subbase and waterline and sewerline relocation work.
The project estimated construction cost is $5,834,000
Contract time is established as 140 working days.
There will be a non-mandatory pre-bid meeting on Tuesday January 21, 2020 at 2:00 P.M. , at the City of Arroyo Grande Public Works Administration Building located at 1375 Ash Street, Arroyo Grande, California . Contact the Capital Improvement Project Manager at 805-473-5444 with any questions.
PREVAILING WAGES In accordance with the provisions of California Labor Code Sections 1770,1773, 1773.1, 1773.6 and 1773.7 as amended, the Director of the Department of Industrial Relations has determined the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in accordance with the standards set forth in Section 1773 for the locality in which the work is to be performed. A copy of said wage rates is on file at the office of the Owner. It shall be mandatory upon the contractor to whom the work is awarded and upon any subcontractor under the contractor to pay not less than said specified rates to all workmen employed by them in the execution of the work.
Contractor Registration with Department of Industrial Relations In accordance with California Labor Code Section 1725.5, Contractors and Subcontractors (as defined by California Labor Code Section 1722.1) bidding on Public Works contracts in California shall be registered with the Department of Industrial Relations prior to bidding. Failure to provide proof of Contractor’s registration as part of the Bid shall deem the Bid as non-responsive and will therefore be rejected by Owner.
Compliance Monitoring and Enforcement In accordance with the requirements of Labor Code Section 1771.4(a)(1), Bidders are hereby notified that this project is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the Department of Industrial Relation.
QUALIFICATIONS In accordance with the provisions of California Public Contract Code Section 3300, the City has determined that the contractor shall possess a valid Class A license at the time of bid issuance. Failure to possess the specified license shall render the Bid as non- responsive and shall act as a bar to award of the Contract to any bidder not possessing said license at the time of award. In the event of dispute over classification of the license required, the opinion of the Contractor’s State License Board shall prevail.
iii NOTICE TO BIDDERS
You must have experience constructing projects similar to the work specified for this project. Provide three similar reference projects completed as either the prime or subcontractor. One of the three reference projects must have been completed under contract with a City, County, State or Federal Government agency as the prime contractor. All referenced projects must be completed within the last eight years from this project’s bid opening date.
At least two referenced projects must be for steel bridge replacements or rehabilitating and painting steel bridges and at least one referenced project must be for a steel truss bridge replacement.
Steel fabrication must occur at a manufacturing plant that is certified under the AISC Certification Program for Steel Bridge Fabricators, Advance Bridges (ABR).
Failure to provide reference projects as specified in this section and as required on the qualification form may be cause to reject a bid as being non-responsive.
It is the City of Arroyo Grande’s intent to award the contract to the lowest responsive bid submitted by a responsible bidder. If in the bidder’s opinion the contract has been or may be improperly awarded, the bidder may protest the contract award.
Protests must be filed no later than five working days after either: 1. bid opening date 2. notification of rejected bid. Protest must be in writing and received by the project manager located at: 1375 Ash Street Arroyo Grande, CA 93420.
Valid protests must contain the following information: 1. the reasons for the protest 2. any supporting documentation 3. the ruling expected by the City to remedy the protest. Any protest not containing all required information will be deemed invalid and rejected.
The City will consider additional documentation or other supporting information regarding the protest if submitted in compliance with the specified time limits. Anything submitted after the specified time limit will be rejected and not be considered.
The Director of Public Works or Designee may request additional information to be submitted within three days of the request, unless otherwise specified, and will notify the protester of ruling within ten days of determination.
Pursuant to the Public Records Act (Government Code, §6250, et seq.), the City will make public records available upon request.
iv NOTICE TO BIDDERS
AWARD The lowest bidder will be determined using the BID TOTAL.
The City intends to award a contract to the responsive and responsible bidder with the lowest bid price. All bids submitted shall be in accordance with the provisions of the contract documents. The City specifically reserves the right, in its sole discretion, to reject any or all bids, to re-bid, or to waive inconsequential defects in bidding not involving time, price or quality of the work. City may waive any minor irregularities in the bids. Any bid may be withdrawn prior to bid opening but not afterward.
As a condition to executing a contract with the City, two bonds each equal to one hundred percent of the total contract price are required in compliance with Section 3-1.05 of the Standard Specifications.
Deposit of Securities in Lieu of Retainage. The Contractor may elect to receive 100 percent of payment due under the Contract Documents from time to time, without retention of any portion of the payment by the City, by depositing securities of equivalent value with the City in accordance with the provisions of Section 22300 of the California Public Contract Code. Such securities, if deposited by the Contractor, shall be valued by the City, whose decision on valuation of the securities shall be final. Securities eligible for investment under this provision shall be limited to those listed in Section 16430 of the California Government Code or bank or savings and loan certificates of deposit.
Agreement to Assign. In accordance with Section 4552 of the California Government Code, the bidder shall conform to the following requirements: In submitting a bid to a public purchasing body, the bidder offers and agrees that if the bid is accepted, it will assign to the purchasing body all rights, title, and interest in and to all causes of action it may have under Section 4 of the Clayton Act 15 U.S.C. 15, or under the Cartwright Act, Chapter 2.
ACCOMMODATION If any accommodations are needed to participate in the bid process, please contact the Public Works Department at (805) 473-5460. Requests should be made as soon as possible to allow time for accommodation.
DISADVANTAGE BUSINESS ENTERPRISES (DBE) This project is subject to Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 26 (49 CFR 26) entitled "Participation by Disadvantage Business Enterprises in Department of Transportation Finance Assistance Programs". Contractors shall take necessary and reasonable steps to ensure that Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (DBE) subcontractors have an opportunity to augment their team. The City has established a DBE goal of 16%. Contractors responding to the Notice to Bidders will be required to meet this goal or document that a good faith effort was made to meet the goal prior to award of contract.
v NOTICE TO BIDDERS
This page intentionally blank.
vi BID BOOK
All bid forms must be completed and submitted with your bid. Failure to submit these forms and required bid bond will be cause to reject the bid as nonresponsive. Staple all bid forms together.
THE UNDERSIGNED, agrees that they have carefully examined: 1. the location of the proposed work 2. the plans and specifications 3. read the accompanying instructions to bidders 4. any supplemental project information and propose to furnish all: 5. materials 6. labor to complete all the required work satisfactorily in compliance with 7. plans 8. specifications 9. special provisions for the prices set forth in the bid item list:
BID ITEM LIST FOR BRIDGE STREET BRIDGE REHABILITATION, PW 2020-1 FEDERAL PROJECT #BHLO-5199(027)
Item Item Unit of Estimated Item Price Total Item No. (1) Description Measure Quantity (in figures) (in figures) Code (2) 1 066018 FURNISH FIELD LS LUMP OFFICE SUM 2 066999 CONSTRUCTION LS LUMP STAKING SUM 3 070030 LEAD COMPLIANCE LS LUMP PLAN SUM 4 120090 CONSTRUCTION LS LUMP AREA SIGNS SUM 5 120100 TRAFFIC CONTROL LS LUMP SYSTEM SUM 6 120120 TYPE III EA 11 BARRICADE 7 130100 JOB SITE LS LUMP MANAGEMENT SUM 8 130300 PREPARE STORM LS LUMP WATER POLLUTION SUM PREVENTION PLAN 9 130310 RAIN EVENT EA 5 ACTION PLAN 10 130320 STORM WATER EA 4 SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS DAY
A BID BOOK
Item Item Unit of Estimated Item Price Total Item No. (1) Description Measure Quantity (in figures) (in figures) Code (2) 11 130330 STORM WATER EA 2 ANNUAL REPORT 12 130605 CONTAINMENT LF 290 BERM 13 130640 TEMPORARY FIBER LF 605 ROLL 14 130680 TEMPORARY SILT LF 605 FENCE 15 130710 TEMPORARY EA 1 CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE 16 130900 TEMPORARY LS LUMP CONCRETE SUM WASHOUT 17 131201 TEMPORARY LS LUMP CREEK DIVERSION SUM SYSTEMS 18 146007 INVASIVE SPECIES LS LUMP CONTROL SUM 19 149002 FUGITIVE DUST LS LUMP CONTROL PLAN SUM 20 160110 TEMPORARY HIGH- LF 220 VISIBILITY FENCE 21 170103 CLEARING AND LS LUMP GRUBBING (LS) SUM 22 190101 ROADWAY CY 180 EXCAVATION 23 F 192003 STRUCTURE CY 229 EXCAVATION (BRIDGE) 24 F 193003 STRUCTURE CY 85 BACKFILL (BRIDGE) 25 210430 HYDROSEED SQFT 24700 26 210610 COMPOST (CY) CY 150 27 250201 CLASS 2 CY 84 AGGREGATE SUBBASE 28 260203 CLASS 2 CY 68 AGGREGATE BASE (CY) 29 390132 HOT MIX ASPHALT TON 55 (TYPE A) 30 480200 TEMPORARY LS LUMP BRIDGE SUM 31 480600 TEMPORARY LS LUMP SHORING SUM
B BID BOOK
Item Item Unit of Estimated Item Price Total Item No. (1) Description Measure Quantity (in figures) (in figures) Code (2) 32 490605 36" CAST-IN- LF 312 DRILLED-HOLE CONCRETE PILING 33 490607 48" CAST-IN- LF 325 DRILLED-HOLE CONCRETE PILING 34 490616 84" CAST-IN- LF 85 DRILLED-HOLE CONCRETE PILING 35 F 510053 STRUCTURAL CY 211 CONCRETE, BRIDGE 36 F 510054 STRUCTURAL CY 127 CONCRETE, BRIDGE (POLYMER FIBER) 37 F 510502 MINOR CONCRETE CY 3 (MINOR STRUCTURE) 38 F 511035 ARCHITECTURAL SQFT 2246 TREATMENT 39 519088 JOINT SEAL (MR 1") LF 59 40 519100 JOINT SEAL (MR 2") LF 30 41 F 520102 BAR REINFORCING LB 165156 STEEL (BRIDGE) 42 F 550203 FURNISH LB 245692 STRUCTURAL STEEL (BRIDGE) 43 F 550204 ERECT LB 245692 STRUCTURAL STEEL (BRIDGE) 44 F 575000 TIMBER SIDEWALK MFBM 11 45 590115 CLEAN AND PAINT LS LUMP STRUCTURAL SUM STEEL 46 590116 CLEAN AND PAINT LS LUMP STRUCTURAL SUM STEEL (EXISTING BRIDGE) 47 600097 BRIDGE REMOVAL LS LUMP SUM 48 600100 RESET HISTORIC LS LUMP TRUSS SUM 49 650014 18" REINFORCED LF 19 CONCRETE PIPE
C BID BOOK
Item Item Unit of Estimated Item Price Total Item No. (1) Description Measure Quantity (in figures) (in figures) Code (2) 50 710212 ADJUST MANHOLE EA 3 TO GRADE 51 710214 ADJUST VALVE EA 5 BOX FRAME AND COVER TO GRADE 52 723080 ROCK SLOPE CY 320 PROTECTION (60 lb, Class II, METHOD B) (CY) 53 723110 ROCK SLOPE CY 920 PROTECTION (1/2 T, Class VII, METHOD B) (CY) 54 729011 ROCK SLOPE SQYD 630 PROTECTION FABRIC (CLASS 8) 55 731510 MINOR CONCRETE CY 17 (CURB, GUTTER, SIDEWALK AND DRIVEWAY) 56 731750 REMOVE LF 400 CONCRETE CURB AND SIDEWALK (LF) 57 750001 MISCELLANEOUS LB 270 IRON AND STEEL 58 770100 POTABLE WATER LS LUMP MAIN AND SUM APPURTENANCES 59 770200 IRRIGATION LS LUMP SYSTEM SUM RELOCATION 60 780440 PREPARE AND SQFT 2246 STAIN CONCRETE 61 782150 TEMPORARILY LS LUMP RELOCATE PARK SUM ITEMS 62 782151 RESET CONCRETE EA 5 PLANTER 63 790100 TEMPORARY LS LUMP SEWER MAIN AND SUM APPURTENANCES 64 790200 PERMANENT LS LUMP SEWER MAIN AND SUM APPURTENANCES 65 800103 TEMPORARY LF 670 FENCE (TYPE CL -6)
D BID BOOK
Item Item Unit of Estimated Item Price Total Item No. (1) Description Measure Quantity (in figures) (in figures) Code (2) 66 803015 REMOVE WOOD LF 15 FENCE 67 803105 WOOD FENCE LF 32 68 803170 RELOCATE FENCE LF 25 69 810230 PAVEMENT EA 20 MARKER (RETROREFLECTIV E) 70 820250 REMOVE EA 3 ROADSIDE SIGN 71 820510 RESET ROADSIDE EA 2 SIGN (ONE POST) 72 F 839500 HANDRAIL CABLE LF 292 73 F 839741 BRIDGE VEHICLE LF 278 RAIL 74 840501 THERMOPLASTIC LF 440 TRAFFIC STRIPE 75 999990 MOBILIZATION LS LUMP SUM Bid Total $
(1) Denotes Final Pay Bid Item (2) First Two Digits Refer to the sections in the Caltrans Standard Specifications, Caltrans Revised Standard Specifications, and modifications in the Special Provisions, that describe required work.
E BID BOOK
Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-H Sample Bid
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY CERTIFICATION
The bidder______, proposed subcontractor ______, hereby certifies that he has ___ , has not , participated in a previous contract or subcontract subject to the equal opportunity clauses, as required by Executive Orders 10925, 11114, or 11246, and that, where required, he has filed with the Joint Reporting Committee, the Director of the Office of Federal Contract Compliance, a Federal Government contracting or administering agency, or the former President's Committee on Equal Employment Opportunity, all reports due under the applicable filling requirements.
Note: The above certification is required by the Equal Employment Opportunity Regulations of the Secretary of Labor (41 CFR 60-1.7(b) (1)), and must be submitted by bidders and proposed subcontractors only in connection with contracts and subcontracts which are subject to the equal opportunity clause. Contracts and subcontracts which are exempt from the equal opportunity clause are set forth in 41 CFR 60-1.5. (Generally only contracts or subcontracts of $10,000 or under are exempt.)
Currently, Standard Form 100 (EEO-1) is the only report required by the Executive Orders or their implementing regulations.
Proposed prime contractors and subcontractors who have participated in a previous contract or subcontract subject to the Executive Orders and have not filed the required reports should note that 41 CFR 60-1.7(b) (1) prevents the award of contracts and subcontracts unless such contractor submits a report covering the delinquent period or such other period specified by the Federal Highway Administration or by the Director, Office of Federal Contract Compliance, U.S. Department of Labor.
LPP 18-01 Page 6 of 22 January 2019
F BID BOOK
Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-H Sample Bid
DEBARMENT AND SUSPENSION CERTIFICATION
TITLE 49, CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS, PART 29
The bidder, under penalty of perjury, certifies that, except as noted below, he/she or any other person
associated therewith in the capacity of owner, partner, director, officer, manager:
• is not currently under suspension, debarment, voluntary exclusion, or determination of ineligibility by any Federal agency; • has not been suspended, debarred, voluntarily excluded or determined ineligible by any Federal agency within the past 3 years; • does not have a proposed debarment pending; and • has not been indicted, convicted, or had a civil judgment rendered against it by a court of competent jurisdiction in any matter involving fraud or official misconduct within the past 3 years.
If there are any exceptions to this certification, insert the exceptions in the following space.
Exceptions will not necessarily result in denial of award, but will be considered in determining bidder responsibility. For any exception noted above, indicate below to whom it applies, initiating agency, and dates of action.
Notes: Providing false information may result in criminal prosecution or administrative sanctions. The above certification is part of the Proposal. Signing this Proposal on the signature portion thereof shall also constitute signature of this Certification.
LPP 18-01 Page 10 of 22 January 2019
G BID BOOK
Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-H Sample Bid
NONLOBBYING CERTIFICATION FOR FEDERAL-AID CONTRACTS
The prospective participant certifies, by signing and submitting this bid or proposal, to the best of his or her knowledge and belief, that:
(l) No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid, by or on behalf of the undersigned, to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any Federal agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with the awarding of any Federal contract, the making of any Federal grant, the making of any Federal loan, the entering into of any cooperative agreement, and the extension, continuation, renewal, amendment, or modification of any Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement.
(2) If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any Federal agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with this Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement, the undersigned shall complete and submit Standard Form-LLL, "Disclosure of Lobbying Activities," in conformance with its instructions.
This certification is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was made or entered into. Submission of this certification is a prerequisite for making or entering into this transaction imposed by Section 1352, Title 31, U.S. Code. Any person who fails to file the required certification shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000 and not more than $100,000 for each such failure.
The prospective participant also agrees by submitting his or her bid or proposal that he or she shall require that the language of this certification be included in all lower tier subcontracts, which exceed $100,000 and that all such subrecipients shall certify and disclose accordingly.
LPP 18-01 Page 11 of 22 January 2019
H BID BOOK
Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-H Sample Bid DISCLOSURE OF LOBBYING ACTIVITIES COMPLETE THIS FORM TO DISCLOSE LOBBYING ACTIVITIES PURSUANT TO 31 U.S.C. 1352
1. Type of Federal Action: 2. Status of Federal Action: 3. Report Type: a. contract a. bid/offer/application a. initial b. grant b. initial award b. material change c. cooperative agreement c. post -award d. loan For Material Change Only: e. loan guarantee year ______quarter ______f. loan insurance date of last report ______
4. Name and Address of Reporting Entity 5. If Reporting Entity in No. 4 is Subawardee, Enter Name and Address of Prime: Prime Subawardee Tier ______, if known
Congressional District, if known Congressional District, if known
6. Federal Department/Agency: 7. Federal Program Name/Description:
CFDA Number, if applicable ______
8. Federal Action Number, if known: 9. Award Amount, if known:
10. a. Name and Address of Lobby Entity b. Individuals Performing Services (including (If individual, last name, first name, MI) address if different from No. 10a) (last name, first name, MI)
(attach Continuation Sheet(s) if necessary)
11. Amount of Payment (check all that apply) 13. Type of Payment (check all that apply)
$ ______actual planned a. retainer b. one -time fee 12. Form of Payment (check all that apply): c. commission a. cash d. contingent fee b. in -kind; specify: nature ______e deferred value ______f. other, specify ______
14. Brief Description of Services Performed or to be performed and Date(s) of Service, including officer(s), employee(s), or member(s) contacted, for Payment Indicated in Item 11:
(attach Continuation Sheet(s) if necessary)
15. Continuation Sheet(s) attached: Yes No
16. Information requested through this form is authorized by Title 31 U.S.C. Section 1352. This disclosure of lobbying Signature: ______reliance was placed by the tier above when his transaction was made or entered into. This disclosure is required Print Name: ______pursuant to 31 U.S.C. 1352. This information will be reported to Congress semiannually and will be available for public inspection. Any person who fails to file the required Title: ______disclosure shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000 and not more than $100,000 for each such failure. Telephone No.: ______Date: ______
Authorized for Local Reproduction Federal Use Only : Standard Form - LLL LPP 18-01 Page 12 of 22 January 2019
I BID BOOK
Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-H Sample Bid INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLETION OF SF-LLL, DISCLOSURE OF LOBBYING ACTIVITIES This disclosure form shall be completed by the reporting entity, whether subawardee or prime Federal recipient, at the initiation or receipt of covered Federal action or a material change to previous filing pursuant to title 31 U.S.C. section 1352. The filing of a form is required for such payment or agreement to make payment to lobbying entity for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress an officer or employee of Congress or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with a covered Federal action. Attach a continuation sheet for additional information if the space on the form is inadequate. Complete all items that apply for both the initial filing and material change report. Refer to the implementing guidance published by the Office of Management and Budget for additional information. 1. Identify the type of covered Federal action for which lobbying activity is and/or has been secured to influence, the outcome of a covered Federal action. 2. Identify the status of the covered Federal action. 3. Identify the appropriate classification of this report. If this is a follow-up report caused by a material change to the information previously reported, enter the year and quarter in which the change occurred. Enter the date of the last, previously submitted report by this reporting entity for this covered Federal action. 4. Enter the full name, address, city, state and zip code of the reporting entity. Include Congressional District if known. Check the appropriate classification of the reporting entity that designates if it is or expects to be a prime or subaward recipient. Identify the tier of the subawardee, e.g., the first subawardee of the prime is the first tier. Subawards include but are not limited to subcontracts, subgrants and contract awards under grants. 5. If the organization filing the report in Item 4 checks "Subawardee" then enter the full name, address, city, state and zip code of the prime Federal recipient. Include Congressional District, if known. 6. Enter the name of the Federal agency making the award or loan commitment. Include at least one organization level below agency name, if known. For example, Department of Transportation, United States Coast Guard. 7. Enter the Federal program name or description for the covered Federal action (item 1). If known, enter the full Catalog of Federal Domestic Assistance (CFDA) number for grants, cooperative agreements, loans and loan commitments. 8. Enter the most appropriate Federal identifying number available for the Federal action identification in item 1 (e.g., Request for Proposal (RFP) number, Invitation for Bid (IFB) number, grant announcement number, the contract grant. or loan award number, the application/proposal control number assigned by the Federal agency). Include prefixes, e.g., "RFP-DE-90-001." 9. For a covered Federal action where there has been an award or loan commitment by the Federal agency, enter the Federal amount of the award/loan commitments for the prime entity identified in item 4 or 5. 10. (a) Enter the full name, address, city, state and zip code of the lobbying entity engaged by the reporting entity identified in item 4 to influenced the covered Federal action. (b) Enter the full names of the individual(s) performing services and include full address if different from 10 (a). Enter Last Name, First Name and Middle Initial (Ml). 11. Enter the amount of compensation paid or reasonably expected to be paid by the reporting entity (item 4) to the lobbying entity (item 10). Indicate whether the payment has been made (actual) or will be made (planned). Check all boxes that apply. If this is a material change report, enter the cumulative amount of payment made or planned to be made. 12. Check the appropriate box. Check all boxes that apply. If payment is made through an in-kind contribution, specify the nature and value of the in-kind payment. 13. Check the appropriate box. Check all boxes that apply. If other, specify nature. 14. Provide a specific and detailed description of the services that the lobbyist has performed or will be expected to perform and the date(s) of any services rendered. Include all preparatory and related activity not just time spent in actual contact with Federal officials. Identify the Federal officer(s) or employee(s) contacted or the officer(s) employee(s) or Member(s) of Congress that were contacted. 15. Check whether or not a continuation sheet(s) is attached. 16. The certifying official shall sign and date the form, print his/her name title and telephone number. Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 30 minutes per response, including time for reviewing instruction, searching existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. Send comments regarding the burden estimate or any other aspect of this collection of information, including suggestions for reducing this burden, to the Office of Management and Budget, Paperwork Reduction Project (0348-0046), Washington, D.C. 20503. SF-LLL-Instructions Rev. 06-04-90«ENDIF »
LPP 18-01 Page 13 of 22 January 2019
J BID BOOK
K BID BOOK
L BID BOOK
NONCOLLUSION DECLARATION I, , declare that I am of , the party making the foregoing bid that the bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation; that the bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that the bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham bid, and has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or that anyone refrained from bidding; that the bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or conference with anyone to fix the bid price of the bidder or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the bid price, or of that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the public body awarding the contract of anyone interested in the proposed contract; that all statements contained in the bid are true; and, further, that the bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, or paid, and will not pay, any fee to any corporation, partnership, company association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof to effectuate a collusive or sham bid.
Executed on , 20 , in I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing is true and correct.
(Signature and Title of Declarant) (SEAL) Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20
Notary Public
Company Name:
M BID BOOK
CERTIFICATE OF WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE
PROJECT: BRIDGE STREET BRIDGE REHABILITATION, PW 2020-1 FEDERAL PROJECT #BHLO-5199(027)
I, ______the______of (Name) (Title)
______, declare, state and certify that: (Contractor Name)
1. I am aware that California Labor Code §3700(a) and (b) provides:
“Every employer except the state shall secure the payment of compensation in one or more of the following ways:
(a) By being insured against liability to pay compensation in one or more insurers duly authorized to write compensation insurance in this state.
(b) By securing from the Director of Industrial Relations a certificate of consent to self- insure either as an individual employer, or one employer in a group of employers, which may be given upon furnishing proof satisfactory to the Director of Industrial Relations of ability to self-insure and to pay any compensation that may become due to his or her employees.”
2. I am aware that the provisions of California Labor Code §3700 require every employer to be insured against liability for workers' compensation or to undertake self-insurance in accordance with the provisions of that code, and I will comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of this Contract.
______(Contractor Name)
By: ______(Signature)
______(Typed or Printed Name)
N BID BOOK
Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 15-G Construction Contract DBE Commitment
EXHIBIT 15-G CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT DBE COMMITMENT
1. Local Agency: 2. Contract DBE Goal:
3. Project Description:
4. Project Location: 5. Bidder's Name: 6. Prime Certified DBE: 7. Bid Amount:
8. Total Dollar Amount for ALL Subcontractors: 9. Total Number of ALL Subcontractors: 10. Bid 12. DBE 14. DBE 11. Description of Work, Service, or Materials 13. DBE Contact Information Item Certification Dollar Supplied (Must be certified on the date bids are opened) Number Number Amount
Local Agency to Complete this Section upon Execution of Award $ 21. Local Agency Contract Number:
15. TOTAL CLAIMED DBE PARTICIPATION 22. Federal-Aid Project Number: % 23. Bid Opening Date:
24. Contract Award Date:
25. Award Amount: IMPORTANT: Identify all DBE firms being claimed for credit, ______regardless of tier. Names of the First Tier DBE Subcontractors and their respective item(s) of work listed above must be consistent, where applicable with the names and items of the work in the Local Agency certifies that all DBE certifications are valid and information on "Subcontractor List" submitted with your bid. Written confirmation of this form is complete and accurate. each listed DBE is re quired.
26. Local Agency Representative's Signature 27. Date 16. Preparer's Signature 17. Date
28. Local Agency Representative's Name 29. Phone 18. Preparer's Name 19. Phone
30. Local Agency Representative's Title 20. Preparer's Title DISTRIBUTION: 1. Original – Local Agency 2. Copy – Caltrans District Local Assistance Engineer (DLAE). Failure to submit to DLAE within 30 days of contract execution may result in de-obligation of federal funds on contract. 3. Include additional copy with award package.
ADA Notice: For individuals with sensory disabilities, this document is available in alternate formats. For information call (916) 654-6410 or TDD (916) 654-3880 or write Records and Forms Management, 1120 N Street, MS-89, Sacramento, CA 95814.
LPP 18-01 Page 1 of 2 January 2019
O BID BOOK
Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 15-G Construction Contract DBE Commitment
INSTRUCTIONS – CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT DBE COMMITMENT
CONTRACTOR SECTION 1. Local Agency - Enter the name of the local agency that is administering the contract. 2. Contract DBE Goal - Enter the contract DBE goal percentage as it appears on the project advertisement. 3. Project Location - Enter the project location(s) as it appears on the project advertisement. 4. Project Description - Enter the project description as it appears on the project advertisement (Bridge Rehab, Seismic Rehab, Overlay, Widening, etc). 5. Bidder’s Name - Enter the contractor’s firm name. 6. Prime Certified DBE - Check box if prime contractor is a certified DBE. 7. Bid Amount - Enter the total contract bid dollar amount for the prime contractor. 8. Total Dollar Amount for ALL Subcontractors – Enter the total dollar amount for all subcontracted contractors. SUM = (DBEs + all Non-DBEs). Do not include the prime contractor information in this count. 9. Total number of ALL subcontractors – Enter the total number of all subcontracted contractors. SUM = (DBEs + all Non-DBEs). Do not include the prime contractor information in this count. 10. Bid Item Number - Enter bid item number for work, services, or materials supplied to be provided. 11. Description of Work, Services, or Materials Supplied - Enter description of work, services, or materials to be provided. Indicate all work to be performed by DBEs including work performed by the prime contractor’s own forces, if the prime is a DBE. If 100% of the item is not to be performed or furnished by the DBE, describe the exact portion to be performed or furnished by the DBE. See LAPM Chapter 9 to determine how to count the participation of DBE firms. 12. DBE Certification Number - Enter the DBE’s Certification Identification Number. All DBEs must be certified on the date bids are opened. 13. DBE Contact Information - Enter the name, address, and phone number of all DBE subcontracted contractors. Also, enter the prime contractor’s name and phone number, if the prime is a DBE. 14. DBE Dollar Amount - Enter the subcontracted dollar amount of the work to be performed or service to be provided. Include the prime contractor if the prime is a DBE. See LAPM Chapter 9 for how to count full/partial participation. 15. Total Claimed DBE Participation - $: Enter the total dollar amounts entered in the “DBE Dollar Amount” column. %: Enter the total DBE participation claimed (“Total Claimed DBE Participation Dollars” divided by item “Bid Amount”). If the total % claimed is less than item “Contract DBE Goal,” an adequately documented Good Faith Effort (GFE) is required (see Exhibit 15-H DBE Information - Good Faith Efforts of the LAPM). 16. Preparer’s Signature - The person completing the DBE commitment form on behalf of the contractor’s firm must sign their name. 17. Date - Enter the date the DBE commitment form is signed by the contractor’s preparer. 18. Preparer’s Name - Enter the name of the person preparing and signing the contractor’s DBE commitment form. 19. Phone - Enter the area code and phone number of the person signing the contractor’s DBE commitment form. 20. Preparer’s Title - Enter the position/title of the person signing the contractor’s DBE commitment form.
LOCAL AGENCY SECTION 21. Local Agency Contract Number - Enter the Local Agency contract number or identifier. 22. Federal-Aid Project Number - Enter the Federal-Aid Project Number(s). 23. Bid Opening Date - Enter the date contract bids were opened. 24. Contract Award Date - Enter the date the contract was executed. 25. Award Amount – Enter the contract award amount as stated in the executed contract. 26. Local Agency Representative’s Signature - The person completing this section of the form for the Local Agency must sign their name to certify that the information in this and the Contractor Section of this form is complete and accurate. 27. Date - Enter the date the DBE commitment form is signed by the Local Agency Representative. 28. Local Agency Representative’s Name - Enter the name of the Local Agency Representative certifying the contractor’s DBE commitment form. 29. Phone - Enter the area code and phone number of the person signing the contractor’s DBE commitment form. 30. Local Agency Representative Title - Enter the position/title of the Local Agency Representative certifying the contractor’s DBE commitment form.
LPP 18-01 Page 2 of 2 January 2019
P BID BOOK
Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 15-H DBE Information - Good Faith Effort EXHIBIT 15-H: DBE INFORMATION -GOOD FAITH EFFORTS
Federal -aid Project No(s). _ BHLO -5199(027) _ Bid Opening Date January 30, 2020
The City of Arroyo Grande established a Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) goal of 16 % for this contract. The information provided herein shows the required good faith efforts to meet or exceed the DBE contract goal.
Proposers or bidders submit the following information to document their good faith efforts within five (5) business days from bid opening. Proposers and bidders are recommended to submit the following information even if the Exhibit 10-O1: Consultant Proposal DBE Commitments or Exhibit 15-G: Construction Contract DBE Commitment indicate that the proposer or bidder has met the DBE goal. This form protects the proposer’s or bidder’s eligibility for award of the contract if the administering agency determines that the bidder failed to meet the goal for various reasons, e.g., a DBE firm was not certified at bid opening, or the bidder made a mathematical error.
The following items are listed in the Section entitled “Submission of DBE Commitment” of the Special Provisions, please attach additional sheets as needed :
A. The names and dates of each publication in which a request for DBE participation for this project was placed by the bidder (please attach copies of advertisements or proofs of publication):
Publications Dates of Advertisement ______
B. The names and dates of written notices sent to certified DBEs soliciting bids for this project and the dates and methods used for following up initial solicitations to determine with certainty whether the DBEs were interested (please attach copies of solicitations, telephone records, fax confirmations, etc.):
Names of DBEs Solicited Date of Initial Follow Up Methods and Dates Solicitation ______
LPP 18-01 Page 15-1 January 2019
Q BID BOOK
Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 15-H DBE Information - Good Faith Effort
C. The items of work made available to DBE firms including those unbundled contract work items into economically feasible units to facilitate DBE participation. It is the bidder's responsibility to demonstrate that sufficient work to facilitate DBE participation in order to met or exceed the DBE contract goal.
Items of Work Bidder Normally Breakdown of Amount Percentage Performs Item Items ($) Of (Y/N) Contract
______D. The names, addresses and phone numbers of rejected DBE firms, the reasons for the bidder's rejection of the DBEs, the firms selected for that work (please attach copies of quotes from the firms involved), and the price difference for each DBE if the selected firm is not a DBE:
Names, addresses and phone numbers of rejected DBEs and the reasons for the bidder's rejection of the DBEs: ______Names, addresses and phone numbers of firms selected for the work above: ______
E. Efforts (e.g. in advertisements and solicitations) made to assist interested DBEs in obtaining information related to the plans, specifications and requirements for the work which was provided to DBEs: ______
Page 15-2 LPP 18-01 January 2019
R BID BOOK
Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 15-H DBE Information - Good Faith Effort
F. Efforts (e.g. in advertisements and solicitations) made to assist interested DBEs in obtaining bonding, lines of credit or insurance, necessary equipment, supplies, materials, or related assistance or services, excluding supplies and equipment the DBE subcontractor purchases or leases from the prime contractor or its affiliate: ______
G. The names of agencies, organizations or groups contacted to provide assistance in contacting, recruiting and using DBE firms (please attach copies of requests to agencies and any responses received, i.e., lists, Internet page download, etc.):
Name of Agency/Organization Method/Date of Contact Results
______
H. Any additional data to support a demonstration of good faith efforts: ______
LPP 18-01 Page 15-3 January 2019
S BID BOOK
Bidder Acknowledgements By signing below, the bidder acknowledges and confirms that this bid is based on the information contained in the contract documents, including the notice to bidders, plans, specifications, special provisions, and addendum number(s) . (Note: You are responsible to verify the number of addenda prior to the bid opening.)
The undersigned further agrees that in case of default in executing the required contract, with necessary bonds, within eight days, (not including Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays), after having received a mailed notice that the contract is ready for signature, the proceeds of the check or bond accompanying his bid will become the property of the City of Arroyo Grande.
Licensed in accordance with an act providing for the registration of contractors, License No. , Expiration Date .
The above statement is made under penalty of perjury, and any bid not containing this information "will be considered non-responsive and will be rejected” by the City.
Signature of Bidder
(Print Name and Title of Bidder)
Business Name (DBA):
Owner/Legal Name:
Indicate One: Sole -proprietor Partnership Corporation
List Partners/Corporate Officers: Name Title
Name Title
Name Title
Name Title
T BID BOOK
Business Address
City, State, Zip Code
Mailing Address
City, State, Zip Code
Phone Number
Fax Number
Email Address
DIR Number
Date
U BID BOOK
Qualifications Failure to furnish complete reference information, as specified in this project’s Notice to Bidders, is cause to reject the bid.
Reference Number 1 Customer Name & Contact Individual
Telephone & Fax Number
Street Address, City, State, Zip Code
Is this similar to the project Describe the services provided and how this project being bid? is similar to that which is being bid: Yes □ No □
Was this contract for a public agency? Yes □ No □ Date project completed:
V BID BOOK
Reference Number 2 Customer Name & Contact Individual
Telephone & Fax Number
Street Address, City, State, Zip Code
Is this similar to the project Describe the services provided and how this project being bid? is similar to that which is being bid: Yes □ No □
Was this contract for a public agency? Yes □ No □ Date project completed:
W BID BOOK
Reference Number 3 Customer Name & Contact Individual
Telephone & Fax Number
Street Address, City, State, Zip Code
Is this similar to the project Describe the services provided and how this project being bid? is similar to that which is being bid: Yes □ No □
Was this contract for a public agency? Yes □ No □ Date project completed:
X BID BOOK
ATTACH BIDDER'S BOND TO ACCOMPANY BID
Know all men by these presents:
That we , AS PRINCIPAL, and , AS SURETY, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Arroyo Grande in the sum of:
Dollars
( ) to be paid to said City or its certain attorney, its successors and assigns; for which payment, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators, successors or assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents:
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the certain bid of the above bounden to construct (insert name of street and limits to be improved or project) dated is accepted by the City of Arroyo Grande, and if the above bounden , his heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns shall duly enter into and execute a contract for such construction and shall execute and deliver the two bonds described within ten (10) days (not including Saturdays, Sundays, or legal holidays) after the above bounden, , has received notice by and from the said City of Arroyo Grande that said contract is ready for execution, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise, it shall be and remain in full force and virtue.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, we hereunto set our hands and seals this day of , 20 .
Y BID BOOK
Bidder Principal:
Signature Date
Printed Name: Title:
Surety:
By:
Bidder's signature is not required to be notarized. Surety's signature must be notarized. Equivalent form may be substituted
Z SPECIAL PROVISIONS
ORGANIZATION Special provisions are under headings that correspond with the main section heading of the Standard Specifications. Each special provision begins with a revision clause that describes or introduces a revision to the Standard Specifications. Any paragraph added or deleted by a revision clause does not change the paragraph number of the Standard Specifications for any other reference to a paragraph of the Standard Specifications.
DIVISION I GENERAL PROVISIONS
1 GENERAL
Add to section 1-1.01: Bid Items and Applicab le Sections Item Item description Applicable code section 066018 FURNISH FIELD OFFICE 10 066999 CONSTRUCTION STAKING 5
The work must be done in compliance with the City of Arroyo Grande, Department of Public Works: 1. BRIDGE STREET BRIDGE REHABILITATION, PW 2020-1 Special Provisions 2. City of Arroyo Grande Engineering Standards and Standard Specifications – 2016 edition (except references to Caltrans 2015 standards are hereby modified to Caltrans 2018 standards) 3. 2018 State of California, Department of Transportation (Caltrans) Standard Specifications , Revised Standard Specifications, Standard Plans, and Revised Standard Plans
Replace "Department" in Section 1-1.07B Glossary with:
Department: City of Arroyo Grande Department of Public Works
Replace "holiday" in Section 1-1.07B Glossary with: holiday: Holiday shown in the following table for 2020:
1 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2020 Holidays Holiday Date Observed New Year's Day January 1 st Martin Luther King Day January 20 th Lincoln’s Birthday February 12 th President’s Day February 1 7th Memorial Day May 2 5th Independence Day July 4 th Labor Day September 7th Veterans Day November 1 1th Thanksgiving Day November 2 6th Day Following Thanksgiving November 2 7th Day Before Christmas December 24 th Christmas December 25 th New Year’s Eve December 31 st
Replace Section 1-1.12 with:
1-1.12 MISCELLANY Make checks and bonds payable to the City of Arroyo Grande.
2 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2 BIDDING
Add between the 1st and 2nd paragraphs of section 2-1.06B: The Department makes the following supplemental project information available: Supplemental Project Information Means Description Included in the Information • Bridge As-builts (Original 1908 Truss, and 1991 Handout Supplemental Truss) • Initial Site Assessment Bridge • Foundation Report • Tree Removal and Trimming Plan • Environmental Commitment Record • RWQCB 401 Permit • CDFW 1602 Permit • Army Corps 404 Permit • NMFS Biological Opinion • USFW Biological Opinion • Southern California Gas Relocation Plan (By Others) • Pacific Gas and Electric Relocation Plan (By Others) • Future Revegetation Plan (By Others) • Arroyo Grande Creek Historic Flow Data • Creekside III Irrigation Plans • Creekside III Lighting Plans
Included with the project Log of Test Borings plans
4 SCOPE OF WORK
Add to Section 4-1.03 Work Description The work should be in compliance with the City Standards , Caltrans standard specifications and standard plans dated 2018, and the special provision for general, material, construction, and payment specifics. The reference to specific sections does not relieve the Contractor from compliance with State and local statutes, City Standards and the Contract Documents.
Add to Section 4-1.07B: A Value Engineering Change Proposal (VECP) will not be considered for structure type or appearance.
3 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
5 CONTROL OF WORK
Replace section 5-1.02 with: A component in one contract part applies as if appearing in each. The parts are complementary and describe and provide for complete work. Where materials and methods are specified, details in plans and standards are to be consulted to provide full information needed to complete installation.
If a discrepancy exists, the governing ranking of Contract parts in descending order are: 3. Project Special provisions 4. Project plans 5. City Engineering Standards (Utility items only) 6. City Standard Specifications (Utility items only) 7. Caltrans Revised standard specifications 8. Caltrans Standard specifications 9. Caltrans Revised standard plans 10. Caltrans Standard plans 11. Supplemental project information
Written numbers and notes on a drawing govern over graphics. Detail drawing governs over a general drawing. Specific specification governs over a general specification. Specification in a section governs over a specification referenced by that section.
If a discrepancy is found or confusion arises, submit an RFI.
Failure to comply with the provisions of these sections is a material breach of contract: 1. Sections 6 through 8 of the Standard Specifications 2. Section 12 through 15 of the Standard Specifications 3. Section 77-1 of the Standard Specifications 4. Section 81 of the Standard Specifications 5. authorized working hours 6. OSHA compliance
Add to the end of section 5-1.20A: During the progress of the work under this Contract, revegetation work under a separate contract (FPN 5199(032)) may be in progress at this job site.
Replace section 5-1.26 with: 5-1.26 CONSTRUCTION SURVEYS 5-1.26A General 5-1.26A(1) Summary Section 5-1.26 includes specifications for furnishing and setting construction stakes and markers to establish the lines and grades required for the completion of the work and as necessary for the Engineer to check lines, grades, alignment and elevations. You must perform construction staking as necessary to control the work. Furnish and set
4 SPECIAL PROVISIONS construction stakes and marks with accuracy adequate to assure that the completed work conforms to the lines, grades, and section. 5-1.26A(2) Definitions You must follow all procedures, methods, and typical stake markings under Chapter 12, Construction Surveys, of the Caltrans publication “Surveys Manual.” Copies of the “Survey Manual” may be purchased from Caltrans Publications Unit 1900 Royal Oaks Drive, Sacramento, California 95815, (916) 445-3520. 5-1.26A(3) Submittals You must submit all computations necessary to establish the exact position of the work from control points. All computations, survey notes, and other records necessary to accomplish the work must be neat, legible, and accurate. Copies of such computation, notes and other records must be furnished to the Engineer before beginning work that requires their use. Upon completion of construction staking and before acceptance of the contract, all computations, survey notes, and other data used to accomplish the work must be submitted to the Engineer and will become the property of the County. 5-1.26A(4) Quality Control and Assurance Not used. 5-1.26B MATERIALS Not used. 5-1.26C CONSTRUCTION Construction stakes and marks (including paint marks) must be removed from the site of work when no longer needed. 5-1.26D PAYMENT The Department pays you for construction staking as follows: 1. A total of 90 percent of the item total over the life of the contract. 2. A total of 100 percent of the item total upon submission of final computations, notes and other data.
Add to section 5-1.33: All equipment must have sound-control devices that are no less effective than those provided on the original equipment. Unmuffled exhausts on equipment is not allowed. Maintain all Construction equipment in proper tune under manufacturer's recommendations. Fuel all off-road and potable diesel powered equipment with California Air Resources Board-certified motor vehicle diesel fuel. Use diesel construction equipment meeting the California Air Resources Board's Tier 2 certified engines or cleaner off-road heavy-duty diesel engines, and comply with State off-Road Regulations. Use on-road heavy-duty trucks that meet the California Air Resources Board's 2007 or cleaner certification standard or on-road heavy-duty diesel engines, and comply with State on-Road Regulations. Construction or trucking
5 SPECIAL PROVISIONS equipment that do not meet these standards may be eligible by proving alternative compliance. Equipment must not idle for more than 5 minutes. Signs must be posted in the designated queuing areas or job sites to remind drivers and operators of the 5 minute idling limit. Electrify equipment when feasible, substitute gasoline-powered in place of diesel- powered equipment when feasible, and use alternatively fueled construction equipment on-site where feasible, such as compressed natural gas(CNG), liquefied natural gas (LNG), propane, or biodiesel. Vehicle speed for all construction equipment must not exceed 15 miles per hour on any unpaved surface at the construction site.
Add to Section 5-1.36 C(1) Nonhighway Facilities General Existing third party (non City-owned) utilities are shown on project plans for information purposes only. It is your responsibility to contact “Underground Service Alert USA” and have site marked prior to start of excavation or sawcutting. The City of Arroyo Grande is not responsible for any: 7. damages 8. costs 9. delay 10. expenses resulting from a third party underground facility operator’s failure to comply with stipulations as set forth in 4216.7.(c) of California Government Code.
Add between the 2nd and 3rd paragraphs of section 5-1.36C(3): The utility owner will relocate a utility shown in the following table before the corresponding date shown: Utility Relocation and Date of the Relocation Utility Location Date Southern California Gas Road approach and East side Before construction of the bridge Pacific Gas and Electric Street Lighting - off Bridge Before construction
Installation of the utilities shown in the following table requires coordination with your activities. Gas line will be installed after the deck pour (Bridge contactor to install concrete inserts and abutment PVC sleeves) and before roadway paving. Notify the Engineer at least 30 calendar days before the site is ready for utility work. Make the necessary arrangements with the utility company through the Engineer and submit a schedule: 1. Verified by a representative of the utility company 2. Allowing at least the time shown for the utility owner to complete its work
6 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Utility Relocation and Contractor -Arranged Time for the Relocation Utility Contact Location Working days Southern California Claudia Turner Road approach and 10 Gas (805) 781 -2429 West side of bridge PG&E Tim Pearson Set Utility boxes in 10 (805) 546-3887 or sidewalk Rob Gibbons (805) 546 -1230
Add to Section 5-1.43A Potential Claims and Dispute Resolution General Potential claim forms are located on the Caltrans’ website: http://www.dot.ca.gov/hq/construc/forms.htm
Effective January 1, 2017, the provisions of Public Contract Code Section 9204 govern claims by the Contractor to the City.
6 CONTROL OF MATERIALS
Add to section 6-1.03 of the RSS: 6-1.03B Submittals 6-1.03B(1) Work Plan For local material, such as rock, gravel, earth, structure backfill, pervious backfill, imported borrow, and culvert bedding, obtained from a (1) noncommercial source, or (2) source not regulated under California jurisdiction, submit a local material plan for each material at least 60 days before placing the material. The local material plan must include: 1. Certification signed by you and an engineer who is registered as a civil engineer in the State or a professional geologist licensed as a professional geologist by the State stating:
I am aware local material from a noncommercial source or a source not regulated under CA jurisdiction must be sampled and analyzed for pH and lead and may require sampling and analysis under section 6-1.03B(3) for other constituents of concern based on the land use history. I am aware that local material sources must not contain ADL at concentrations greater than 80 mg/kg total lead or equal to or greater than 5 mg/L soluble lead as determined by the Waste Extraction Test (WET) Procedures, 22 CA Code of Regs § 66261.24(a)(2) App II. I am aware that a maximum quantity of material may be excavated at the site based on the minimum number of samples taken before excavating at the site under section 6-1.03B(3).
2. Land use history of the local material location and surrounding property 3. Sampling protocol 4. Number of samples per volume of local material 5. QA and QC requirements and procedures
7 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
6. Qualifications of sampling personnel 7. Stockpile history 8. Name and address of the analytical laboratory that will perform the chemical analyses 9. Analyses that will be performed for lead and pH 10. Other analyses that will be performed for possible hazardous constituents based on: 10.1. Source property history 10.2. Land use adjacent to source property 10.3. Constituents of concern in the ground water basin where the job site is located
The plan must be sealed and signed by an engineer who is registered as a civil engineer in the State or a professional geologist licensed as a professional geologist by the State. If the plan requires revisions, the Engineer provides comments. Submit a revised plan within 7 days of receiving comments. Allow 7 days for the review.
6-1.03B(2) Analytical Test Results At least 15 days before placing local material, submit analytical test results for each local material obtained from a noncommercial source or a source not regulated under CA jurisdiction. The analytical test results must include: 1. Certification signed by an engineer who is registered as a civil engineer in the State or a professional geologist licensed as a professional geologist by the State stating:
The analytical testing described in the local material plan has been performed. I performed a statistical analysis of the test results using the US EPA's ProUCL software with the applicable 95 percent upper confidence limit. I certify that the material from the local material source is suitable for unrestricted use at the job site, it has a pH above 5.0, does not contain soluble lead in concentrations equal to or greater than 5mg/l as determined by the Waste Extraction Test (WET) Procedures, 22 CA Code of Regs § 66261.24(a)(2) App II, does not contain lead in concentrations above 80 mg/kg total lead, is free from all other contaminants identified in the local material plan, and will comply with the job site's basin plan and water quality objectives of the RWQCB.
2. Chain of custody of samples 3. Analytical results no older than 1 year 4. Statistical analysis of the data using US EPA’s ProUCL software with a 95 percent upper confidence limit 5. Comparison of sample results to hazardous waste concentration thresholds and the RWQCB's basin plan requirements and water quality objectives for the job site location
6-1.03B(3) Sample and Analysis Sample and analyze local material from a (1) noncommercial source or (2) source not regulated under CA jurisdiction: 1. Before bringing the local material to the job site 2. As described in the local material plan
8 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3. Under US EPA Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, Physical/Chemical Methods (SW-846)
The sample collection must be designed to generate a data set representative of the entire volume of proposed local material. Before excavating at the (1) noncommercial material source or (2) a source not regulated under CA jurisdiction, collect the minimum number of samples and perform the minimum number of analytical tests for the corresponding maximum volume of local material as shown in the following table:
Minimum Number of Samples and Analytical Tests for Local Material Maximum volume of imported Minimum number of samples and analytical tests borrow (cu yd) < 5,000 8 12 for the first 5,000 cu yd plus 1 for each additional 5,000–10,000 1,000 cu yd or portion thereof 17 for the first 10,000 cu yd plus 1 for each additional 10,000–20,000 2,500 cu yd or portion thereof 21 for the first 20,000 cu yd plus 1 for each additional 20,000-40,000 5,000 cu yd or portion thereof 25 for the first 40,000 cu yd plus 1 for each additional 40,000–80,000 10,000 cu yd or portion thereof 29 for the first 80,000 cu yd plus 1 for each additional > 80,000 20,000 cu yd or portion thereof
Do not collect composite samples or mix individual samples to form a composite sample. Analyze the samples using the US EPA's ProUCL software with a 95 percent upper confidence limit. All chemical analysis must be performed by a laboratory certified by the SWRCB's Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program (ELAP). The analytical test results must demonstrate that the local material: 1. Is not a hazardous waste 2. Has a pH above 5.0 3. Has an average total lead concentration, based upon the 95 percent upper confidence limit, at or below 80 mg/kg 4. Is free of possible contaminants identified in the local material plan 5. Complies with the RWQCB's basin plan for the job site location 6 Complies with the RWQCB's water quality objectives for the job site location
6-1.03C Local Material Management Do not place local material until authorized. If the Engineer determines the appearance, odor, or texture of any delivered local material suggests possible contamination, sample and analyze the material. The sampling and analysis is change order work unless (1) hazardous waste is discovered or (2) the analytical test results indicate the material does not comply with section 6-1.03B(3). Dispose of noncompliant local material at an appropriately permitted CA Class I, CA Class II or CA Class III facility. You are the generator of noncompliant local material.
9 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
7 LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY TO THE PUBLIC
Delete from 6 th paragraph of Section 7-1.03 Public Convenience Delete “in Arroyo Grande” from the phrase, “Of two individuals in Arroyo Grande,”.
Add to Section 7-1.03B Traffic Control Plan
Work hours are restricted to 7:00 a.m. to 10:00 p.m. Monday through Friday and 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. on Saturday or Sunday .
Provide traffic control plan at or before the preconstruction meeting. Traffic control plan must be drawn to scale. Upon approval of the traffic control plan, the City will issue a no- fee Encroachment Permit. Permittee (Contractor) is responsible to comply with all conditions of the traffic control plan. Complete work using due diligence in order to restore free flowing of traffic in a safe manner.
8 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS
Replace Reserved in section 8-1.04C with: Section 8-1.04B does not apply. Start job site activities on the date specified in the Notice to Proceed (it is anticipated job site activities will be authorized to start May 26, 2020) . Do not start job site activities until the Department authorizes or accepts your submittal for: 1. CPM baseline schedule 2. WPCP or SWPPP, whichever applies 3. Notification of DRA or DRB nominee and disclosure statement 4. Contingency plan for opening closures to traffic 5. SSPC QP certifications 6. Temporary sewer relocation submittal 7. Temporary bridge shop plans 8. Bridge removal plan 9. Structural Steel shop drawings 10. Schedule of values for lump sum items
You may enter the job site only to measure controlling field dimensions and locate utilities. Do not start other job site activities until all the submittals from the above list are authorized or accepted and the following information is received by the Engineer: 1. Notice of Materials To Be Used form. 2. Written statement from the vendor that the order for structural steel has been received and accepted by the vendor. The statement must show the dates that the materials will be shipped.
10 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Submit a notice 72 hours before starting job site activities. If the project has more than 1 location of work, submit a separate notice for each location.
DIVISION II GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
10 GENERAL
Add to the end of section 10-1.02C(2): Protect any irrigation component to be relocated before performing any other construction activity in the area.
Replace Reserved in section 10-1.03 with: No work allowed during the last weekend of May for the Strawberry Festival. You may work below the top of creek banks or within Arroyo Creek only from June 1st to October 30th of any year. No construction activities below the top of creek banks or within Arroyo Creek during rain events or predicted rain events.
Construction activities are limited to the daytime hours of 7:00 a.m. to 10:00 p.m. Monday through Friday, and 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. on Saturday or Sunday.
A roosting bat survey must be conducted at dawn and dusk to identify potential roosting bats. Notify Engineer 7 days before needing survey. This survey must be conducted between two to four weeks before bridge and/or tree removal. No pets allowed on the construction site.
A qualified biologist must be on-site during ground disturbing activities and vegetation removal. Notify Engineering at least 7 days before needing biologist.
Replace “Reserved” in section 10-3 with: 10-3 FURNISH FIELD OFFICE 10-3.01 GENERAL 10-3.01A Summary Section 10-3 includes specifications for furnishing a field office and associated services for the exclusive use of the Engineer. The field office may be a portable office trailer located within the project limits or a commercial rented office space within a 5 minute drive from the jobsite. You must provide the office beginning 14 days before project work begins and ending 21 days after final acceptance. Facilities remain your property upon completion of the contract. You must perform all site work to set up and remove the office. Provide weatherproof buildings or trailers in good condition and meet all applicable ordinances, safety codes, and regulations. Facilities and their location are subject to approval. You are responsible for providing a separate, private, professional working area for the Resident Engineer’s Office. The field office must be safe, sanitary and include the appropriate electrical service, potable water supply, toilet accommodations and waste
11 SPECIAL PROVISIONS disposal services. You must pay 1. sanitary and utility bills (electricity, phone and water) promptly 2. the cost for all connection and disconnection fees for electricity, phone, water service, sanitary service, fax and high speed internet 3. rental of all of the office and furnishings 4. all costs associated with days of delay in closing the office including, but not limited to, weather and/or contractor schedule completions delays 5. and maintain insurance for such facility to cover any losses of equipment or material within this space
The field office shall be reasonably secure, and if determined necessary by the Engineer, shall be enclosed by a 6 foot high chain link fence with a gate around the building and parking area. 10-3.01B Definitions Not Used 10-3.01C Submittals Not Used 10-3.01D Quality Control and Assurance Not Used 10-3.02 MATERIALS You must supply a field office with the minimum requirements: 1. 400 square feet floor space, with separate room for Resident Engineer’s office 2. Locking outside doors, deadbolt with keys (minimum 2 doors) 3. Alarm system with 24 hour monitoring service, optional 4. Slip proof tread and handrails on steps as required 5. Windows with locks, provide adequate cross ventilation in all rooms 6. 7 foot (min) ceiling height 7. Electrical lighting 8. Heat and air conditioning able to maintain 72 degrees Fahrenheit 9. Adequate electrical outlets and surge protectors 10. Adequate electricity (120 volt, 60 cycle) 11. Adequate potable water supply 12. Adequate indoor sanitary facilities, including sink 13. Parking for 4 vehicles (min) 14. Janitorial services – twice per week
You must furnish the office at a minimum with: 1. 3 Table 30” wide 8’ long x 30” high 2. 1 File cabinet, 4-drawer, fire resistant metal with lock and keys 3. 2 Desk, 30" x 60" 4. 2 Desk lamps 5. 3 Office chairs and 6 folding chairs
12 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
6. 1 5 shelf Bookcase, 3’ wide x 1’ deep x 6’ high minimum 7. 3 3 shelf Bookcase, 3’ wide x 1’ deep x 4’ high minimum 8. 1 48”x72” dry erase board 9. 1 Fire extinguisher 10. 1 Refrigerator, 10 cubic feet 11. 1 Microwave Oven 12. 1 Water cooler with hot/cold taps and water delivery service 13. 1 Phone Line 14. 1 Fax Line 15. 1 wireless, color, 11 x 17 scanning printer 16. 1 fully serviced commercial Copy Machine (with color, 11x17, and scanning capabilities), with necessary paper and cartridges 17. 1 commercial grade First Aid Kit (Contractor maintained) 18. High speed internet (DSL equivalent or better), with secured “wifi” connectivity
10-3.03 CONSTRUCTION Not Used 10-3.04 PAYMENT The Department pays you for furnish field office as follows: 1. A total of 25 percent of the item total upon the Engineer determining the field office is complete and acceptable. 2. A total of 90 percent of the item total over the life of the contract 3. A total of 100 percent of the item total upon contract acceptance
12 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
Add to section 12-4.04A(1): Maintain pedestrian and park access at all times.
Replace the 3rd paragraph of section 12-4.04C with: Constructing a temporary pedestrian access route, including temporary hot mix asphalt path shown, is included in the payment for temporary bridge.
13 WATER POLLUTION CONTROL
Add to the end of section 13-1.01A: The specifications in section 13 for water quality monitoring apply to the following work activities whenever they occur in water: 1. installation and removal of diversion system 2. cofferdams 3. installation of RSP 4. installation of CIDH
13 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
5. all other in water work
The receiving water for this project is Arroyo Grande Creek .
Add the following definition to 4th paragraph of section 13-1.01B: predicted rain event: Storm that the National weather service has predicted a 25% or more chance of at least 0.1 inch rain in 24 hours.
Replace the 1st sentence in the 1st paragraph of section 13-1.01C(4)(c) with: Whenever work activities occur in water, submit a report of water quality monitoring two weeks before work in-water begins and every two weeks after that until no more in-water work occurs.
Replace item 2.3 in the list in the 1st paragraph of section 13-1.01C(4)(c) with: 2.3 Estimate of water flow and volume of discharge
Add items 3.4 and 3.5 to the list in the 1st paragraph of section 13-1.01C(4)(c): 3. 4. Representative photographs of in-water work, dewatering, or diversions 3. 5. If applicable, representative photographs of the restored site following complete in-water work, dewatering, or diversions.
Add item 6 to the list in the 1st paragraph of section 13-1.01C(4)(c): A description of in-water work, dewatering, or diversions implemented, including date, duration and location.
Replace the items in the list in the 6th paragraph of section 13-1.01D(5)(a) with: 1. Receiving waters: 1.1. 24 hours before starting work in water, including the installation of any clear- water diversion 1.2. Continuously whenever work occurs in water, including the installation, operation, and removal of any clear water diversion 1.3. For the presence of floating and suspended materials, sheen on the surface, discoloration, turbidity, and odors. 2. Job site for the presence of authorized and unauthorized nonstormwater discharges and their sources. Unauthorized discharges to surface waters include: 2.1. Soil, silt, and sand 2.2. Bark, sawdust, and slash 2.3. Rubbish and debris 2.4. Cement, concrete, and concrete washings 2.5. Oil and petroleum products 2.6. Welding slag 2.7. Other organic or earthen materials
14 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Replace the items in the list in the 4th paragraph of section 13-1.01D(5)(b) with: 1. Every 4 hours for each water quality objective 2. At upstream, effluent, and downstream locations
Add between the 4th and 5th paragraphs of section 13-1.01D(5)(b): Test the receiving water under the test methods for the WQOs shown in the following table: Water Quality Objectives Quality Detection Test method Requirement characteristic limit (min) 1. Where natural turbidity is from 0 to 5 0 NTUs, increases must not Field test with a exceed 20 NTU. calibrated portable 2. Where natural turbidity Turbidity during instrument is from 50 to 100 NTUs, activities excluding 1 (Measured at increases must not in-water work (NTU) downstream exceed 10 NTUs. sampling location) 3. Where natural turbidity is greater than 100 NTUs, increases must not exceed 10 percent. Field test with a calibrated portable Lower WQO = 6.5 instrument pH -- Upper WQO = 8.3 (Measured at
downstream sampling location) No alteration of Field test with a temperature that Temperature (°F) calibrated portable -- adversely affects instrument beneficial uses. No visible film on the Oil and grease Observed -- surface of water or on objects in the water.
Add to the end of section 13-3.01A: This project's risk level is 2.
Add between the 4th and 5th paragraphs of section 13-3.01C(2)(a): The Central Coast RWQCB will review the authorized SWPPP.
15 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Add to section 13-6.03E: Straw for fiber roll must be certified weed free under the Department of Food and Agriculture.
Add to section 13-6.03: 13-6.03G Containment Berm Construct and maintain a staging area containment berm as shown, to prevent potential spills and leaks from leaving the staging area and entering the waterway.
Before constructing, remove obstructions, including rocks, clods, and debris greater than 1 inch in diameter, from the ground.
Report discharges to receiving waters immediately upon discovery.
Repair or adjust the berm if evidence of breach occurs.
Remove sediment deposits, trash, and other debris as needed or ordered.
If you place the removed sediment deposits within the job site, stabilize the sediment deposits to prevent erosion.
Remove the staging area containment berm when no longer required and restore ground to existing conditions or as shown.
Add to section 13-7.02C: Sweep streets at the end of each day Water sweeper with reclaimed water should be used when feasible. Roads must be pre-wetted before sweeping.
Replace the last paragraph of section 13-10.03A with: You may p lace gravel-filled bags without the railing.
Replace section 13-12 with: 13-12 TEMPORARY CREEK DIVERSION SYSTEMS 13-12.01 GENERAL 13-12.01A Summary Section 13-12 includes specifications for constructing, maintaining, reconstructing, and removing temporary creek diversion system (TCDS), and restoring creek bed to original condition. The temporary diversion system is used to divert upstream water flows to allow construction in a dry or dewatered location. The diversion must consist of two 36" diameter culverts with a design capacity of at least 80 cfs. 13-12.01B Definitions Not Used 13-12.01C Submittals Submit a certificate of compliance for:
16 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1. Impermeable plastic sheeting 2. Gravel bags 3. Pipe material
13-12.01C(1) Temporary Creek Diversion System Plan Within 20 days of Contract approval, submit 3 copies of the Temporary Creek Diversion System Plan (TCDSP). The TCDSP must include: 1. Installation and removal process, including equipment, platforms for equipment, and access locations. 2. Anticipated flow rates. 3. Calculations supporting the sizing of piping, channels, pumps, or other conveyance by using FHWA HY-8 or other equivalent method. Calculate the discharge water flow rate and velocity anticipated where it discharges on any erodible surface, so its conveyance does not cause erosion within the project or at the discharge to the water body. Temporary culverts attached to banks, walls, or other locations must be designed to hold the full weight of the culvert at capacity and restrain the culvert for any expected hydraulic forces. 4. Plans showing locations of diversion, including layouts, cross sections, and elevations. 5. Materials proposed for use, including MSDS if applicable. 6. Operation and maintenance procedures for the TCDS. 7. Restoration plans showing before and after conditions, including photos of existing conditions for areas disturbed during the installation, operation, and removal of the TCDS. 8. Monitoring and reporting plan to ensure applicable water quality objectives are met. This includes schedule of work including Temporary BMP implementation as part of the Construction Site BMP strategy, and SWPPP or WPCP as applicable. Use with section 13-3.01A. 9. Details of the pumping system, if used, including power source, debris handling, fish screens, and monitoring requirements. 10. Fish passage plan, following the Caltrans Fish Passage Design for Road Crossings, CA Department of Fish and Wildlife (CDFW), CA Salmonid Stream Habitat Restoration Manual, and National Marine Fisheries Service (NMFS), Guidelines for Salmonid Passage at Stream Crossings, as required by the applicable PLACs. 11 The TCDS design must demonstrate how it will comply with section 13-12.03A, water tightness, and prevent seepage. 12. Contingency plan to remove workers, equipment, materials, fuels, and any other work items that will cause pollution or violation of PLACs during a rain event out of the flow area. Develop the contingency plan for when a 12-inch freeboard cannot be maintained and overtopping of the coffer dams may occur.
If revisions are required, the Engineer notifies you of the date when the review stopped and provides comments. Submit a revised TCDSP within 15 days of receiving the comments. The Department's review resumes when a complete TCDSP has been resubmitted.
17 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Submit an electronic copy on a read-only CD, DVD, or other Engineer-authorized data storage device and 4 printed copies of the authorized TCDSP.
Central Coast RWQCB requires review of the authorized TCDSP, the Engineer submits it to the RWQCB for review and comment. If the Engineer orders changes to the TCDSP based on the RWQCB's comments, submit a revised TCDSP within 10 days.
All submittals which include plans, specifications, and calculations must be sealed and signed by a civil engineer registered in the State. 13-12.01D Quality Assurance Not Used 13-12.02 MATERIALS 13-12.02A Gravel Gravel must: 1. Be river run gravel obtained from a river or creek bed with gradation of 100 percent passing a 3/4 inch sieve and 0% passing a 3/8 inch sieve 2. Be clean, hard, sound, durable, uniform in quality, and free of any detrimental quantity of soft, thin, elongated or laminated pieces, disintegrated material, organic matter, or other deleterious substances 3. Be composed entirely of particles that have no more than 1 fractured face 4. Have a cleanliness value of at least 85, as determined by California Test 227
13-12.02B Impermeable Plastic Membrane Impermeable plastic membrane must be: 1. Single ply, commercial quality, polyethylene with a minimum thickness of 10 mils complying with ASTM D2103. You must use stronger plastic membrane if required as part of design to resist hydraulic forces. 2. Free of holes, punctures, tears or other defects that compromise the impermeability of the material. 3. Suitable for use as an impermeable membrane. 4. Resistant to UV light, retaining a minimum grab breaking load of 70 percent after 500 hours under ASTM D4355.
13-12.02C Gravel-Filled Bags Gravel-filled bags must comply with section 13-5.02G.
The 2nd paragraph of section 13-5.02G does not apply. 13-12.02D Plastic Pipes Plastic pipe must comply with section 61-3.01 and must: 1. Be clean, uncoated, in good condition free of rust, paint oil dirt or other residues that could potentially contribute to water pollution 2. Be adequately supported for planned loads 3. Use watertight joints under section 61-2.01. 4 Be made of a material or combination of materials that are suitable for clean water and which do not contain banned, hazardous or unlawful substances
18 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
5. For temporary pipes not reused on the project you may use the following materials: 5.1. PVC closed-profile wall pipe must comply with ASTM F1803 5.2. PVC solid wall pipe must comply with ASTM D3034, ASTM F679, AWWA C900, AWWA C905, or ASTM D2241 and cell class 12454 defined by ASTM D1784 5.3. HDPE solid wall pipe must comply with AASHTO M 326 and ASTM F714 5.4. Polyethylene large-diameter-profile wall sewer and drain pipe must comply with ASTM F894
13-12.02E Rock Not Used 13-12.02F Pumping System Pumping system must: 1. Comply with section 74-2.02B 2. Be equipped with secondary containment 3. Be free of fuel and oil leaks 4. Meet intake screen regulatory requirements of 0.2 inch
13-12.02G Seepage Pumping System If seepage occurs in the dewatered work area, the water must be removed by sump pumps as part of the TCDS. Seepage pumping system must: 1. Comply with section 74-2.02B 2. Ensure discharge water conform with PLACs or is treated on site 3. Be free of fuel and oil leaks
13-12.02H Discharge Water Energy Dissipation and Erosion Control Discharge water from pumps, pipes, ditches, or other conveyances must have BMPs to dissipate the flows and velocity of water discharged from the temporary diversion system if erosion would otherwise occur.
Energy dissipation measures: 1. May be plastic sheeting, flared end sections, rubber matting, or other materials appropriate for the design hydraulics 2. Must be anchored to prevent movement by expected flows 3. Must be removed when the TCDS is removed
13-12.03 CONSTRUCTION 13-12.03A General Construction, use and removal of the TCDS is restricted to the time period from June 1st to October 31st . If the work cannot be completed during the initial restricted time period, remove TCDS, restore the creek to original flow condition, and reconstruct the TCDS after June 1st of the following year. No work is allowed within the stream except during the restricted time period.
19 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Do not use motorized equipment or vehicles in areas of flowing or standing water for the construction or removal of the TCDS in compliance with section 13-4.03.
Remove vegetation to ground level and clear away debris.
Do not construct or reconstruct TCDS if the 72-hour forecasts predict a 50 percent or greater chance of rain in the project area.
Stop allwork and remove all material and equipment from the creek between upstream and downstream cofferdams if the 72-hour forecasts predict a 50 percent or greater chance of rain in the project area and the predicted rainfall is estimated to produce a flow rate exceeding the design capacity of the TCDS.
If the required freeboard cannot be maintained and overtopping may occur, implement contingency plan to remove all workers, equipment, and potential sources of pollution from the dry working area of the creek bed.
The TCDS must be constructed within the temporary impact footprint as described in the environmental commitments.
Lap and join joints between the edges of impermeable plastic membrane with commercial-quality waterproof tape with minimum 4-inch lapping at the edges.
Seal openings or penetrations through the impermeable plastic membrane with commercial quality waterproof tape.
The TCDS must be water tight to keep the work area dry for construction and prevent the creation of pollutants. Maintain all portions of the TCDS and fix leaks as soon as they are discovered.
Contact Jill Ogren, (805) 781-5263 or Ray Dienzo, (805) 788-2110 at San Luis Obispo County Public Works for anticipated Lopez dam releases to ensure that unexpected water is not discharged during construction which could compromise the TCDS. 13-12.03B Maintenance Maintain the TCDS to provide a minimum freeboard of 12 inches between the water surface and the impermeable top of the cofferdams.
Do not discharge runoff from existing or proposed drainage systems into the dry work area between the cofferdams. Runoff from these systems may be connected to the diversion pipe or conveyed by pipes downstream of the cofferdam.
Prevent leaks in the TCDS. Provide seepage pumps as necessary and keep the work area dry to prevent the creation of sediment-laden water.
20 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Repair holes, rips and voids in the impermeable plastic membrane with commercial- quality waterproof tape. Replace impermeable plastic membrane when patches or repairs compromise the impermeability of the material.
Repair TCDS within 24 hours after the damage occurs.
Prevent debris from entering the TCDS and receiving water.
Remove and immediately replace gravel, gravel-filled bags, impermeable plastic membrane, or plastic pipes contaminated by construction activities.
Remove sediment deposits and debris from the TCDS as needed. If removed sediment is deposited within project limits, it must be stabilized and not subject to erosion by wind or water, under sections 19-1.01 and 19-2.03 B. 13-12.03C Removal When no longer required, remove all components of TCDS. Return the creek bed and banks to the original condition.
Diversion must be removed if project has a winter suspension and re-installed after winter suspension if needed for work.
Do not excavate the native creek material. Backfill ground disturbance, including holes and depressions caused by the installation and removal of the TCDS with gravel. Maintain the original line and grade of the creek bed. 13-12.04 PAYMENT Not Used
14 ENVIRONMENTAL STEWARDSHIP
Add to the end of section 14-1.02: An ESA exists on this project.
Before starting job site activities, install temporary high-visibility fence to avoid inadvertent impacts to the Arroyo Grande Creek .
Access to an ESA other than that described is prohibited.
Add to the 1st paragraph of section 14-6.03A: This project is within or near habitat for the regulated species shown in the following table:
21 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Regulated Species South-Central California Coast Steelhead California Red -Legged Frog Western Pond Turtle Least Bell's Vireo Southwestern Willow Flycatcher Migratory Birds Townsend's Big -Eared Bat Roosting Bats
The fieldwork code of practice developed by the Declining Amphibian Task Force must be followed at all times.
Replace item 1 in the 2nd paragraph of section 14-6.03A with: 1. Stop all work within a 100 -foot radius of the discovery except as shown in the following table:
Regulated Protective radius species (feet) Nesting Raptors 500 Passerine 250 Nests
Add to section 14-6.03C: Regulated fish are anticipated adjacent to bridge no. 49C0196 . Implement the following protection measures: 1. Install exclusionary material, a cofferdam, or a combination of both
Exclusion material must be 0.2 -inch stretched mesh.
Exclude fish from the work area in the following sequence: 1. Install exclusion materials and remove as many fish as possible 2. Install a cofferdam or water bypass 3. Gradually dewater the work area 4. Owners biologist will r emove the remaining fish using one or a combination of seining, baited minnow traps, and dip net and hand removal
Maintain exclusion material and cofferdams such that regulated fish are prevented from entering the work area.
The pump screen's approach velocity must not exceed 0.33 feet per second.
22 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Replace Reserved in section 14-6.03D(3) with: The Owner will p repare and present a biological resource information program to familiarize personnel with regulated species and habitats, related laws and regulations, and species protection measures and protocols.
The biological resource information program will include: 1. Identification of the job site, ESAs, and species protection areas 2. Description of the regulated species and its general ecology 3. Description of habitats used by the regulated species and their locations 4. Requirements for protecting regulated species 5. Definition and consequences of take of regulated species 6. Response plan for encounters with the regulated species or a species that looks like one 7. Permit requirements for touching or moving a regulated species 8. Requirements for species protection 9. Description of avoidance and minimization measures 10. Handout materials about the regulated species, its habitats, and species protection measures 11. Handout on the Declining Amphibian Task Force Fieldwork Code of Practices
An Owner -supplied biologist will develop a program and present the biological resource training.
Notify the Engineer at least 7 days before training session is necessary . All attendee must sign an attendance list.
Personnel who must complete biological resource training include laborers, tradesmen, material suppliers, equipment maintenance staff, supervisors, foremen, office staff, food vendors, and other workers who stay at the job site longer than 30 minutes.
Replace RESERVED in section 14-6.05 with: 14-6.05 INVASIVE SPECIES CONTROL Section 14-6.05 includes specifications for preventing the introduction and spread of invasive species to and from the job site.
Comply with section 13-4.03E(3).
At least 2 business days before using vehicles and equipment on the job site, submit a signed statement that the vehicles and equipment have been cleaned of soil, seeds, vegetative matter, and other such debris that may introduce or spread invasive species.
The statement must include: 1. List of the vehicles and equipment with identifying numbers 2. Date of cleaning for each vehicle and piece of equipment 3. Description of the cleaning process
23 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4. Measures to be taken to ensure the vehicles and equipment remain clean until operation at the job site 5. Verification that the equipment has not been operated in waters known to be infested by aquatic invasive species
Update the list of vehicles and equipment as needed.
Clean the following vehicles and equipment before operation at the job site: 1. Excavators 2. Loaders 3. Graders 4. Haul trucks 5. Water trucks 6. Cranes 7. Tractors 8. Trailers 9. Dump trucks 10. Waders
Do not clean vehicles, equipment, or tools at locations near sensitive habitat or waterways at the job site. Clean vehicles and equipment every time before it enters or leaves a sensitive habitat. Implement the following protection measures: 1. Before entering or exiting the job site and staging areas , pressure wash your vehicles and equipment: 1.1. At a temperature of 140 degrees F 1.2. With a minimum nozzle pressure of 2,500 psi 1.3. With a minimum fan tip angle of 45 degrees 2. Thoroughly scrub personal work equipment and tools, such as boots, waders, hand tools, and any other equipment used in water at the job site, using a stiff-bristled brush to remove any organisms. Decontaminate the equipment by one of the following methods: 2.1. Immerse the equipment in water at a temperature of 140 degrees F for at least 5 minutes. If necessary, weigh down the equipment to keep it immersed in the water. 2.2 Freeze the equipment to a temperature of 32 degrees F or colder for at least 8 hours. 2.3 Thoroughly dry the equipment in a weed-free area for at least 48 hours. 3. Clean personal work equipment, and tools over drip pans or containment mats at the job site. Collect and contain the wastewater. Dispose of the wastewater at a waste management facility.
Add to the end of section 14-9.02: The US EPA has established the National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP). Under the Health & Safety Code § 39658(b)(1), your demolition
24 SPECIAL PROVISIONS and rehabilitation activities must comply with 40 CFR 61, Subpart M (National Emission Standard for Asbestos).
The Initial Site Assessment report for this project is included in the Information Handout .
You must notify the San Luis Obispo County Air Pollution Control District (APCD) of your demolition activities even if the activities will not disturb asbestos-containing material.
You may obtain the notification form, submittal instructions, and other information from: San Luis Obispo County APCD 3433 Roberto Court San Luis Obispo, CA 93401 Phone (805) 781-5912 [email protected]
Instead of the 10 working days specified at the website, submit a notification form to the San Luis Obispo County (APCD) at least 15 days before starting demolition or rehabilitation activities.
Submit a copy of the notification form and the necessary attachments as informational submittals before starting demolition or rehabilitation activities.
If you discover unanticipated asbestos-containing material during the demolition or rehabilitation activities, immediately stop work in that area and notify the Engineer. The Department will use other forces to remove and dispose of the material. Do not resume work in the area until authorized.
Notify the San Luis Obispo County APCD of a change to your demolition or rehabilitation activities, including a revised work plan or the discovery of unanticipated asbestos- containing materials, within 2 days of the change or discovery.
Add to section 14-11.04: Submit a site specific Fugitive Dust Control Plan / Fugitive Dust Plan (FDP) for all proposed work, meeting the requirements of Dust Rules and approved by San Luis Obispo County Air Pollution Control District (APCD), to the San Luis Obispo County APCD before start of any work. Provide the Engineer with four (4) copies of the San Luis Obispo County APCD approved FDP before starting any work that may generate dust. Prepare an amendment to the FDP when there is a change in construction activities not included in the FDP, when the Contractor's activities violate a condition of San Luis Obispo County APCD , or when ordered. Amendments must identify additional dust control practices or revised operations, including those areas or activities not identified in the initially approved FDP. Amendments to the FDP must be prepared and submitted for review and approval within a time ordered by the Engineer. At a minimum, the FDP must be amended annually.
25 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Keep one (1) copy of the approved FDP and approved amendments at the project site. Make the FDP available upon request by a representative of the San Luis Obispo County APCD , California Air Resource Board, or United States Environmental Protection Agency. Requests by the public must be directed to the Engineer.
Provide all notices to San Luis Obispo County APCD and create and maintain all records as required by Dust Rules. Copies of all related records must be submitted to the Engineer within thirty (30) calendar days of completion of the work.
Implement the measures contained in the FDP to control dust.
Control dust using measures that include the following: 1. Stabilize unpaved areas subject to vehicular traffic by keeping adequately wetted, or covered with material that contains less than 0.25 percent asbestos. 2. The speed of vehicles and equipment traveling across unpaved areas must not be more than 15 mph unless the road surface and surrounding area is sufficiently stabilized to prevent vehicles and equipment going faster from causing dust that is visible from crossing job site limits. 3. Stockpiles and disturbed areas not subject to vehicular traffic must be located in the plan and stabilized by being kept adequately wetted, or covered with material that contains less than 0.25 percent asbestos. 4. Conduct activities so that no dirt or mud tracking is visible on any paved roadway open to the public. 5. Use rock track out pads and wheel wash stations at all points of egress from unpaved construction areas. 6. Use a dedicated water truck for each piece of earthmoving equipment (e.g., scrapers, dozers, excavators, loaders, haul trucks, backhoes, compactors, graders, etc), 7. Pre-wet excavations to depths of cuts.
Dust control measures that will be required to mitigate dust may impact your productivity during construction activities.
Use of water trucks or sprinkler systems in sufficient quantities to prevent air borne dust from leaving the site and from exceeding the San Luis Obispo County APCD's limit of 20% opacity for greater than 3 minutes in any 60 minute period is required. Increasing watering frequency would be required whenever wind speeds exceed 15 miles per hour. Reclaimed (non-potable) water should be used when possible.
All dirt stock pile areas must be sprayed daily or covered with tarps or other dust barriers.
Add to the 1st paragraph in section 14-11.13A: The existing paint system on bridge no. 49C0196 will be disturbed as part of the work activities. The paint system contains lead and Chromium .
26 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Replace Reserved in section 14-11.13B(3) with: If paint removal is conducted on job site (or members are cut and disturb the existing paint system), a ir monitoring reports, including test results for samples taken after corrective action, must be prepared by the CIH and submitted: 1. Orally within 48 hours after sampling 2. As an informational submittal within 5 days after sampling
Air monitoring reports must include: 1. Date and location of sample collection, sample number, Contract number, bridge number, name of the structure, and District-County-Route-Post Mile 2. Name and address of the certified laboratory that performed the analyses 3. Chain of custody documentation 4. List of emission control measures in place when air samples were taken 5. Air sample results compared to the appropriate permissible exposure limit (PEL) 6. Corrective action recommended by the CIH to ensure exposure to airborne metals outside containment systems and work areas is within specified limits 7. Signature of the CIH who reviewed the data and made recommendations
Replace Reserved in section 14-11.13B(4) with: If paint removal is conducted on job site (or members are cut and disturb the existing paint system), s ubmit test results of soil analyses verifying debris containment, including results for soil samples taken after corrective action: 1. Orally within 48 hours after sampling 2. Within 5 days after sampling
Soil sampling results must include: 1. Date and location of sample collection, sample number, Contract number, bridge number, name of the structure, and District-County-Route-Post Mile 2. Concentrations of heavy metals expressed in mg/kg and mg/L 3. Name and address of the certified laboratory that performed the analyses 4. Chain-of-custody documentation
Replace Reserved in section 14-11.13D with: 14-11.13D(1) General If paint removal is conducted on job site (or members are cut and disturb the existing paint system), m onitor the ambient air and soil in and around the work area to verify the effectiveness of the containment system. Work area monitoring includes: 1. Collecting, analyzing, and reporting air and soil test results 2. Recommending corrective action whenever specified air or soil concentrations are exceeded
Collect air and soil samples at locations designated by the Engineer.
27 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
14-11.13D(2) Air Monitoring Air monitoring must be performed under the direction of a CIH.
Collect and analyze air samples to detect lead under the NIOSH Method 7082 using a detection limit of at least 0.05 µg/m 3. Collect and analyze air samples to detect other metals under NIOSH Method 7300 using a detection limit of at least 1 percent of the appropriate PEL specified by Cal/OSHA. You may use alternative methods of sampling and analysis with equivalent detection limits.
Concentrations of airborne metals outside containment systems and work areas must not exceed any of the following: 1. Average of 1.5 µg/m 3 of air per day and 0.15 µg/m 3 per day on a rolling 90-day basis. Calculate the average daily concentrations based on accumulated monitoring data and projections based on monitoring trends for the next 90 days or to the end of the work subject to the lead compliance plan if less than the specified averaging period. 2. 10 percent of the action level specified for lead by 8 CA Code of Regs §1532.1. 3. 10 percent of the appropriate PELs specified for other metals by Cal/OSHA.
Collect air samples daily during work activities that disturb the existing paint system. Air samples must be analyzed within 48 hours by a facility accredited by the Environmental Lead Laboratory Accreditation Program of the American Industrial Hygiene Association. If concentrations of airborne metals exceed allowable levels, modify the containment system or work activities to prevent further release of metals. If the CIH recommends corrective action, collect and analyze additional samples after implementing the corrective action unless ordered otherwise. 14-11.13D(3) Soil Sampling for Debris Containment Collect 4 soil samples before starting work and collect 4 soil samples within 36 hours after cleaning existing steel. A soil sample consists of 5 plugs, each 3/4 inch in diameter and 1/2 inch deep, taken at each corner and center of a 1 sq yd area. Analyze soil samples for: 1. Total lead by US EPA Method 6010B or US EPA Method 7000 series 2. Soluble lead by California Waste Extraction Test (CA WET)
The laboratory that analyzes the samples must be certified by the SWRCB's ELAP for all analyses to be performed.
Concentrations of heavy metals in the work area's soil must not increase when the existing paint system is disturbed. If soil sampling shows an increase in the concentrations of heavy metals after completing the work: 1. Clean the affected area 2. Resample until soil sampling and testing shows concentrations of heavy metals less than or equal to the concentrations collected before the start of work
28 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Add to the end of the 1st paragraph of section 14-11.13F: This waste characterization testing must include: 1. Total lead by US EPA Method 6010B 2. Soluble lead by California Waste Extraction Test (CA WET) 3. Soluble lead by Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP)
Add to the beginning of section 14-11.13G(2): If paint removal is conducted on job site (or members are cut and disturb the existing paint system) and a fter the Engineer accepts the waste characterization test results, dispose of the debris: 1. Within 30 days after accumulating 220 lb of debris 2. At a DTSC-permitted Class I facility located in California
Make all arrangements with the operator of the disposal facility.
If less than 220 lb of hazardous waste is generated in total, dispose of it within 30 days after the start of the accumulation of the debris.
Add to the 1st paragraph of section 14-11.14A: Wood removed from bridge members and walkway is treated wood waste. In addition, the treated wood contains elevated levels of arsenic.
Add section 14-11.14F: 14-11.14F Payment Payment for handling, storing, transporting, and disposing of treated wood waste is included in the payment for removal of the item with treated wood waste.
15 EXISTING FACILITIES
Delete the 7th paragraph of section 15-1.03B.
DIVISION III EARTHWORK AND LANDSCAPE
17 GENERAL
Add to section 17-2.03A: Tree removal is limited to September 15th through February 15th to avoid potential impacts to nesting birds unless a survey by a qualified biologist determines the absence of nesting birds. Refer to the tree removal plan in the Informational Handout for trees that are allowed to be removed or trimmed.
29 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Replace the 4th paragraph in section 17-2.03A with: Clear and grub vegetation only within the excavation and embankment slope lines and contour grading limits .
19 EARTHWORK
Add to section 19-1.01A: To avoid the spread of invasive species stockpile topsoil and redeposit the stockpiled soil on-site at a sufficient depth to preclude germination or spread of those species.
Replace the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th paragraphs of section 19-2.03B with: Dispose of surplus material. Ensure enough material is available to complete the embankments before disposing of it.
Add to the end of section 19-3.01A: Structure backfill includes constructing the geocomposite drain system. The systems must comply with section 68-7.
20 LANDSCAPE
Add to section 20-5.04A(1): Mulch must be certified weed free under the Department of Food and Agriculture.
21 EROSION CONTROL
Replace section 21-2.02K with: 21-2.02K Compost Compost must be derived from one or a combination of the following types of materials: 1. Green material consisting of chipped, shredded, or ground vegetation or clean, processed, recycled wood products 2. Biosolids 3. Manure 4. Mixed food waste
Compost must not be derived from mixed municipal solid waste and must not contain paint, petroleum products, pesticides, or other chemical residues harmful to plant or animal life. Metal concentrations in compost must not exceed the maximum listed under 14 CA Code of Regs § 17868.2. Process compost materials under 14 CA Code of Regs § 17868.3.
30 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
The quality characteristics of compost must have the values shown in the following table: Compost Requirement Quality characteristic Test method a Fine Medium/Coars e pH TMECC 04.11- 6-8.5 6–8.5 A Soluble salts (dS/m) TMECC 04.10- 0-10 0–10 A Moisture content (% wet weight) TMECC 03.09- 25-60 25–60 A Organic matter content (% dry TMECC 05.07- 30-100 30–70 weight) A Maturity (seed emergence) TMECC 05.05- 80 or above 80 or above (% relative to positive control) A Maturity (seedling vigor) TMECC 05.05- 80 or above 80 or above (% relative to positive control) A Stability (mg CO 2-C/g OM per day) TMECC 05.08- 8 or below 5 or below B Pathogen Salmonella (most probable TMECC 07.01- < 3 < 3 number per 4 grams dry weight B basis) Pathogen Fecal coliform (most probable TMECC 07.01- < 1,000 < 1,000 number per gram dry weight B basis) Physical contaminants (% dry combined combined TMECC 02.02- weight) total: total: C Plastic, glass, and metal < 0.5 < 1.0 Combined Combined TMECC 02.02- Film plastic (% dry weight) total: total: C < 0.1% < 0.1% a TMECC refers to Test Methods for the Examination of Composting and Compost , published by the United States Department of Agriculture and the United States Compost Council (USCC).
The particle size must comply with the requirements shown in the following table:
31 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Compost Gradation Requirement Quality characteristic Test method a Min Max Gradation Fine:(dry weight % passing) TMECC 1-inch sieve 100 -- 02.02-B 3/8 -inch sieve 95 -- Gradation Medium:(dry weight % passing) TMECC 95 -- 2-inch sieve 02.02-B 40 55 3/8 -inch sieve Gradation Coarse:(dry weight % passing) TMECC 95 -- 3-inch sieve 02.02-B 25 35 3/8 -inch sieve a TMECC refers to Test Methods for the Examination of Composting and Compost , published by the United States Department of Agriculture and the United States Compost Council (USCC).
Add to section 21-2.02P: Straw for fiber roll must be certified weed free under the Department of Food and Agriculture.
DIVISION V SURFACING AND PAVEMENTS
39 ASPHALT CONCRETE
Add to section 39-2.02A(1): Spread and compact HMA using method compaction.
Replace Reserved in section 39-2.02B(3) with: The grade of asphalt binder for Type A HMA must be PG 64-10 .
For Type A HMA using RAP substitution of greater than 15 percent of the aggregate blend, the virgin binder grade must comply with the PG binder grade specified above with 6 degrees C reduction in the upper and lower temperature classification.
For Type A HMA using RAP substitution of 15 percent or less of the aggregate blend, the grade of the virgin binder must comply with the PG binder grade specified above.
DIVISION VI STRUCTURES
32 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
48 TEMPORARY STRUCTURES
Add to section 48: 48-7 TEMPORARY STRUCTURE 48-7.01 GENERAL 48-7.01A Summary Section 48-7 includes specifications for constructing a temporary pedestrian bridge and hot mix asphalt path for a detour.
Temporary HMA path must be ADA complaint and hot mix asphalt must comply with section 39.
You must design, construct, and maintain temporary bridge that: 1. Is ADA Compliant, safe and adequate and includes handrails 2. Provides the necessary rigidity 3. Supports the loads imposed 4. Produces a finished structure that conforms to the lines and grades shown
48-7.01B Definitions Not Used. 48-7.01C Submittals 48-7.01C(1) General Submit a certificate of compliance for each delivery of structural component used in the temporary structure.
Submit a letter of certification that certifies all components of the manufactured assemblies are used in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
If requested (1) submit manufacturer's data for manufactured assemblies to verify manufacturer's recommendations or (2) perform tests demonstrating adequacy of the proposed assemblies.
Submit a letter of certification for all temporary structure members with field welded splices. The letter must certify that all welding and NDT, including visual inspection, comply with the Contract and the welding standard shown on the shop drawings. The letter must be signed by an engineer who is registered as a civil engineer in the State. Submit the letter before placing any concrete on the temporary structure being certified.
Submit a welding certification for temporary structure with previously welded splices. The certification must: 1. Itemize the testing and inspection methods used 2. Include tracking and identifying documents for previously welded members 3. Be signed by an engineer who is registered as a civil engineer in the State 4. Be submitted before erecting the members
33 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
48-7.01C(2) Shop Drawings Submit shop drawings with supporting calculations for temporary structure. Shop drawings and calculations must be signed by an engineer who is registered as a civil engineer in the State.
Submit 6 sets of temporary structure drawings and 2 sets of design calculations. Include the following: 1. Details of erection and removal activities. 2. Methods and sequences of erection and removal, including equipment. 3. Details for the stability of temporary structure during all stages of erection and removal activities. 5. Assumed soil bearing values for temporary structure footings. 6. Grade (E-value), species, and type of any structural composite lumber. Include manufacturer's tabulated working stress values for the lumber. 7. Grade and material properties of any structural steel, aluminum, or reinforced concrete used for members in the Temporary Bridge. 8. Design calculations including stresses and deflections in load carrying members. 9. Provisions for complying with temporary bracing requirements. 10. Welding standard used for welded members and welded connection (both shop and field welds).
48-7.01D Quality Control and Assurance 48-7.01D(1) Welding and Nondestructive Testing Welding must comply with AWS D1.1 or other recognized welding standard except (1) for previously welded splices and (2) if fillet welds are used where load demands are 1,000 lb or less per inch for each 1/8 inch of fillet weld.
Perform NDT on splices made by field welding at the job site. You may use UT or RT. Each field weld and any repair made to a previously welded splice must be tested. You must select locations for testing. The length of a splice weld where NDT is to be performed must be a cumulative weld length equal to 25 percent of the original splice weld length. The cover pass must be ground smooth at test locations. Acceptance criteria must comply with the specifications for cyclically loaded nontubular connections subject to tensile stress in clause 6 of AWS D1.1. If repairs are required in a portion of the weld, perform additional NDT on the repaired sections. The NDT method chosen must be used for an entire splice evaluation, including any repairs.
For previously welded splices, you must determine and perform all necessary testing and inspection required to certify the ability of the temporary structure members to sustain the design stresses. 48-7.01D(2) Design Criteria 48-7.01D(2)(a) General The Temporary Bridge must: 1. Provide the pedestrian detour layout alignment and profile shown. 2. Provide a minimum width of 6 feet. 3. Clear span the channel.
34 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4. Provide an ADA compliant pedestrian railings which satisfy AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications and its Caltrans Amendments. If access for vehicles are desired to assist in your construction of the project, provide a minimum bridge barrier 32” tall with a TL-2 crash rating under AASHTO Manual for Assessing Safety Hardware (MASH) or NCHRP Report 350. Secured type K temporary railing or other approved system may be used. 5. Provide a non-slip surface for pedestrians. 6. Not encroach into the channel. 7. Meet all permit requirements. 8. Meet ADA compliance
The Department does not adjust payment for a Temporary Bridge with a greater clear width to assist in your construction of the project. 48-7.01D(2)(b) Loads Design the Temporary Bridge under latest version of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications and its Caltrans Amendments, with the following exceptions and modifications.
The loads for the Temporary Bridge must be combined under the load combinations specified in the code to determine the load combinations creating the highest stresses and deflections.
For vertical loads, all factored dead loads and pedestrian live load combinations must be considered. If access for vehicles are desired to assist in your construction of the project, all factored dead loads and legal vehicles (HL-93 plus lane load) loads combinations must be considered. Impact must be included to all vehicular loads.
The Department does not adjust payment for a Temporary Bridge with a greater vehicle load to assist in your construction of the project. If construction loads beyond the legal vehicle (HL-93 plus lane load) are to be considered, they must be applied as in consideration of the Strength II load combination.
For lateral loads in the longitudinal direction of the Temporary Bridge, the following combinations of lateral loads must be considered and the bridge must be designed to the larger of these: 1. Braking force of the applied vehicle live loads equal to 15 percent of the vehicle live load applied at 6 foot above the deck surface of the Temporary Bridge plus Wind Loads. 2. 25 percent of the Temporary Bridge dead load, factored by 1.0, and applied at the center of gravity of the bridge.
For lateral loads in the transverse direction of the Temporary Bridge, the following combinations of lateral loads must be considered and the bridge must be designed to the larger of these: 1. The lateral load combinations listed the Caltrans’ Falsework Manual. 2. Wind Loads.
35 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3. 25 percent of the Temporary Bridge dead load, factored by 1.0, and applied at the center of gravity of the bridge.
Wind loads must be applied according to the 6th edition of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications and the Caltrans Amendments. 48-6.01D(2)(c) Stresses, Loadings, and Deflections The capacities of all members and connections of the Temporary Bridge must be based on 6th edition of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications and its Amendments with appropriate reduction factors, with the following exceptions and modifications.
Design timber connections under the Caltrans’ Falsework Manual.
Expect for flexural compressive stress, structural steel members and connections may be designed under LRFD criteria from the AISC Steel Manual.
The Temporary Bridge must be mechanically connected to its foundation. The mechanical connections must be capable of resisting the lateral temporary structure design forces. Friction forces developed between the Temporary Bridge and its foundations cannot not be used to resist lateral forces and are not considered as an effective mechanical connection. The mechanical connections must be designed to tolerate adjustments to the Temporary Bridge during its use as a detour.
48-7.01D(2)(c)(i) Manufactured Assemblies Do not exceed the manufacturer's recommendations for loadings and deflections on jacks, brackets, columns, joists, and other manufactured devices. 48-7.02 MATERIALS Not Used 48-7.03 CONSTRUCTION 48-7.03A General Install temporary bracing as necessary to withstand all imposed loads during erection, construction, and removal of the Temporary Bridge.
The materials used in the Temporary Bridge must be of the quality necessary to sustain the stresses required by the Temporary Bridge design. 48-7.03B Foundations Construct the Temporary Bridge on solid footings capable of supporting the Temporary Bridge loads. Protect footings from softening and undermining. The Engineer may order you to verify the design soil bearing values do not exceed the soil capacity using load testing.
You may place the Temporary Bridge foundation pads before shop drawings are authorized.
The use of temporary structure piles is not permitted.
36 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
48-7.03C Removal Remove the Temporary Bridge such that portions of the Temporary Bridge not yet removed remain stable at all times.
Completely remove fills placed for the temporary structure.
Completely remove Temporary Bridge foundations and temporary HMA path.
Dispose of Temporary Bridge materials and work debris. 48-7.04 PAYMENT Not Used
Add to section 48: 48-8 TEMPORARY SHORING 48-8.01 GENERAL Section 48-8 includes specifications for design and construction of temporary shoring, including any temporary embankments and excavation required for the shoring system.
Driven shoring systems are not allowed.
You are responsible for designing, constructing and maintaining safe and adequate temporary shoring to support all loads imposed, including traffic loads.
Submit 5 sets of working drawings and one set of calculations for temporary shoring. The working drawings must be signed by an engineer who is registered as a civil engineer in the State of California. 48-8.02 MATERIALS You must select and provide the material used to construct the temporary shoring. 48-8.03 CONSTRUCTION Not Used 48-8.04 PAYMENT Not Used
49 PILING
Add to section 49-1.03: Expect difficult pile installation at all locations due to the presence of groundwater and soils susceptible to sloughing or caving.
Wet construction methods and a temporary casing will be required.
Pull the casing as the concrete level rises in the drilled shaft.
Casing advanced drilling equipment or oscillating/rotator casing systems should be strongly considered for this project.
37 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Add to section 49-3.02B(6)(c): The synthetic slurry must be one of the materials shown in the following table: Material Manufacturer SlurryPro CDP KB INTERNATIONAL LLC 735 BOARD ST STE 209 CHATTANOOGA TN 37402 (423) 266 -6964 Super Mud PDS CO INC 105 W SHARP ST EL DORADO AR 71731 (870) 863 -5707 Shore Pac GCV CETCO CONSTRUCTION DRILLING PRODUCTS 2870 FORBS AVE HOFFMAN ESTATES IL 60192 (800) 527 -9948 Terragel or GEO-TECH SERVICES LLC Novagel Polymer 220 N. ZAPATA HWY STE 11A-449A LAREDO TX 78043 (210) 259 -6386 BIG FOOT MATRIX CONSTRUCTION PRODUCTS 50 S MAIN ST STE 200 NAPERVILLE IL 60540 (877) 591 -3137 POLY-BORE BAROID INDUSTRIAL DRILLING PRODUCTS 3000 N SAM HOUSTON PKWY EAST HOUSTON TX 77032 (877) 379 -7412
Use synthetic slurries in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. Synthetic slurries shown in the above table may not be appropriate for a given job site.
Synthetic slurries must comply with the Department's requirements for synthetic slurries to be included in the above table. The requirements are available from the Offices of Structure Design, P.O. Box 168041, MS# 9-4/11G, Sacramento, CA 95816-8041.
SlurryPro CDP synthetic slurry must comply with the requirements shown in the following table:
38 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SlurryPro CDP Quality characteristic Test method Requirement Density Mud weight (density), During drilling (pcf) API RP 13B-1, ≤ 67.0 a section 4 Before final cleaning and ≤ 64.0 a immediately before placing concrete (pcf) Viscosity Marsh funnel and cup. During drilling (sec/qt) API RP 13B-1, 50–120 section 6.2 Before final cleaning and ≤ 70 immediately before placing concrete (sec/qt) pH Glass electrode pH 6.0–11.5 meter or pH paper Sand content, percent by volume Sand, Before final cleaning and API RP 13B-1, ≤ 1.0 immediately before placing section 9 concrete (%) NOTE: Slurry temperature must be at least 40 °F when tested. aIf authorized, you may use slurry in a salt water environment. The allowable density of slurry in a salt water environment may be increased by 2 pcf.
39 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Super Mud synthetic slurry must comply with the requirements shown in the following table: Super Mud Quality characteristic Test method Requirement Density Mud weight (density), During drilling (pcf) API RP 13B-1, ≤ 64.0 a section 4 Before final cleaning and ≤ 64.0 a immediately before placing concrete (pcf) Viscosity Marsh funnel and cup. During drilling (sec/qt) API RP 13B-1, 32–60 section 6.2 Before final cleaning and ≤ 60 immediately before placing concrete (sec/qt) pH Glass electrode pH 8.0–10.0 meter or pH paper Sand content, percent by volume Sand, Before final cleaning and API RP 13B-1, ≤ 1.0 immediately before placing section 9 concrete (%) NOTE: Slurry temperature must be at least 40 °F when tested. aIf authorized, you may use slurry in a salt water environment. The allowable density of slurry in a salt water environment may be increased by 2 pcf.
40 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Shore Pac GCV synthetic slurry must comply with the requirements shown in the following table: Shore Pac GCV Quality characteristic Test method Requirement Density Mud weight (density), During drilling (pcf) API RP 13B-1, ≤ 64.0 a section 4 Before final cleaning and ≤ 64.0 a immediately before placing concrete (pcf) Viscosity Marsh funnel and cup. During drilling (sec/qt) API RP 13B-1, 33–74 section 6.2 Before final cleaning and ≤ 57 immediately before placing concrete (sec/qt) pH Glass electrode pH 8.0–11.0 meter or pH paper Sand content, percent by volume Sand, Before final cleaning and API RP 13B-1, ≤ 1.0 immediately before placing section 9 concrete (%) NOTE: Slurry temperature must be at least 40 °F when tested. aIf authorized, you may use slurry in a salt water environment. The allowable density of slurry in a salt water environment may be increased by 2 pcf.
41 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Terragel or Novagel Polymer synthetic slurry must comply with the requirements shown in the following table: Terragel or Novagel Polymer Quality characteristic Test method Requirement Density Mud weight (density), During drilling (pcf) API RP 13B-1, ≤ 67.0 a section 4 Before final cleaning and ≤ 64.0 a immediately before placing concrete (pcf) Viscosity Marsh funnel and cup. During drilling (sec/qt) API RP 13B-1, 45–104 section 6.2 Before final cleaning and ≤ 104 immediately before placing concrete (sec/qt) pH Glass electrode pH 6.0–11.5 meter or pH paper Sand content, percent by volume Sand, Before final cleaning and API RP 13B-1, ≤ 1.0 immediately before placing section 9 concrete (%) NOTE: Slurry temperature must be at least 40 °F when tested. aIf authorized, you may use slurry in a salt water environment. The allowable density of slurry in a salt water environment may be increased by 2 pcf.
42 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
BIG-FOOT synthetic slurry must comply with the requirements shown in the following table: BIG -FOOT Quality characteristic Test method Requirement Density Mud weight (density), During drilling (pcf) API RP 13B-1, ≤ 64.0 a section 4 Before final cleaning and ≤ 64.0 a immediately before placing concrete (pcf) Viscosity Marsh funnel and cup. During drilling (sec/qt) API RP 13B-1, 30–125 section 6.2 Before final cleaning and 55-114 immediately before placing concrete (sec/qt) pH Glass electrode pH 8.5–10.5 meter or pH paper Sand content, percent by volume Sand, Before final cleaning and API RP 13B-1, ≤ 1.0 immediately before placing section 9 concrete (%) NOTE: Slurry temperature must be at least 40 °F when tested. aIf authorized, you may use slurry in a salt water environment. The allowable density of slurry in a salt water environment may be increased by 2 pcf.
43 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
POLY-BORE synthetic slurry must comply with the requirements shown in the following table: POLY -BORE Quality characteristic Test method Requirement Density Mud weight (density), During drilling (pcf) API RP 13B-1, 62.8-65.8 a section 4 Before final cleaning and 62.8-64.0 a immediately before placing concrete (pcf) Viscosity Marsh funnel and cup. During drilling (sec/qt) API RP 13B-1, 50–80 section 6.2 Before final cleaning and 50-80 immediately before placing concrete (sec/qt) pH Glass electrode pH 7.0–10.0 meter or pH paper Sand content, percent by volume Sand, Before final cleaning and API RP 13B-1, ≤ 1.0 immediately before placing section 9 concrete (%) NOTE: Slurry temperature must be at least 40 °F when tested. aIf authorized, you may use slurry in a salt water environment. The allowable density of slurry in a salt water environment may be increased by 2 pcf.
Replace the 1st paragraph of section 49-3.02C(7) with: Section 49-3.02C(7) applies to CIDH concrete piles if an optional construction joint is shown and you choose to construct the optional construction joint.
Replace item 5 in the list in the 2nd paragraph of section 49-3.02C(7) with: 5. Be corrugated metal pipe and placed in a drilled hole. Casings placed in a drilled hole must comply with section 49-3.02C(6).
51 CONCRETE STRUCTURES
Add to section 51-1.01C(1): If the methacrylate crack treatment is applied to a bridge deck within 100 feet of a residence, business, or public space, submit a public safety plan. Include with the submittal: 1. Copy of public notification letter with a list of delivery addresses and posting locations. The letter must describe the work to be performed and state the treatment work locations, dates, and times. Deliver copies of the letter to residences and businesses within 100 feet of the treatment work and to local fire and police officials,
44 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
at least 7 days before starting treatment activities. Post a copy of the letter at the job site. 2. Airborne emissions monitoring plan. Plan must include monitoring point locations. A CIH certified in comprehensive practice by the American Board of Industrial Hygiene must prepare and execute the plan. 3. Action plan for protecting the public if levels of airborne emissions exceed permissible levels. 4. Copy of the CIH's certification.
After completing methacrylate crack treatment activities, submit results from monitoring production airborne emissions as an informational submittal.
Replace the 2nd paragraph of section 51-1.01C(1) with: Submit a deck placement plan for concrete bridge decks. Include in the placement plan your method and equipment for ensuring that the concrete bridge deck is kept damp by misting immediately after finishing the concrete surface.
Replace Reserved in section 51-1.01D(1) with: The job site must have at least 4 airborne emissions monitoring points, including the mixing point, application point, and point of nearest public contact. Monitor airborne emissions during methacrylate crack treatment activities.
Add to section 51-1.02B: Concrete for concrete bridge decks must contain polymer fibers. Each cubic yard of concrete must contain at least 1 pound of microfibers and at least 3 pounds of macrofibers.
Concrete for concrete bridge decks must contain a shrinkage reducing chemical admixture. Each cubic yard of concrete must contain at least 3/4 gallon of a shrinkage reducing admixture. If you use the maximum dosage rate shown on the Authorized Material List for the shrinkage reducing admixture, your submitted shrinkage test data does not need to meet the shrinkage limitation specified.
Add to section 51-1.02E: Bridge deck must be colored concrete must match color no. FS 36492 Gray of Fed-Std- 595. Provide a test panel for approval before ordering the color. The test panel must be: 1. Created using the same personnel, materials, equipment, and methods to be used in the work 2. Accessible for viewing 3. Displayed in an upright position near the work 4. Authorized for coloring before starting the concrete deck work
Construct additional test panels until a satisfactory color is attained. The preparing and coloring of additional test panels is change order work.
45 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
The Engineer uses the authorized colored test panel to determine the acceptability of the colored surface. Dispose of the test panels after the coloring work is complete and authorized. Notify the Engineer before disposing of the test panels.
Replace the 1st paragraph of section 51-1.03F(5)(b)(i) with: Except for bridge widenings, texture the bridge deck surfaces longitudinally by grinding and grooving.
Add to section 51-1.03G(1): The board form concrete surface texture at the vertical abutment, wingwalls and pier cap faces must match the texture and pattern of the referee sample available for inspection by bidders at southern abutment wall face under existing bridge . Test panel must include stain and comply with section 78-4.04A(4)(b).
Replace the 2nd paragraph of section 51-1.03H with: Cure the top surface of bridge decks by (1) misting and (2) the water method using a curing medium under section 90-1.03B(2). After strike off, immediately and continuously mist the deck with an atomizing nozzle that forms a mist and not a spray. Continue misting until the curing medium has been placed and the application of water for the water method has started. At the end of the curing period, remove the curing medium and apply curing compound on the top surface of the bridge deck during the same work shift under section 90-1.03B(3). The curing compound must be curing compound no. 1.
Delete the 4th paragraph of section 51-1.03H.
Add to section 51-1.04: Payment for furnishing and installing concrete inserts and abutment sleeves for utilities is included in payment for Structural Concrete (Bridge).
57 WOOD AND PLASTIC LUMBER STRUCTURES
Add “Simpson Strong-Tie Products” to the “Structural metal” definition in section 57-1.01B
Add “Simpson Strong-Tie Products” to section 57-1.01B Simpson Strong-Tie products: Screws and fasteners.
Replace the 1st paragraph in section 57-1.02C with: Hardware must comply with section 75, except for the following:
46 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1. Heavy hex nuts must be ASTM A563, hot dipped galvanized 2. Washers must be ASTM F436, hot dipped galvanized 3. Bolts for connections must be ASTM A307 or ASTM F3125 Grade A325.
Replace the 6th paragraph in section 57-1.02C: Screws must be stainless steel as shown.
Add to section 57-1.02: 57-1.02D Concrete Support Pad Concrete support pad must comply with section 51.
Add to section 57-2.01A(1): Timber Sidewalk members must be Treated Douglas Fir No. 1.
You may substitute exterior grade treated glulam beams in lieu of dimensional lumber. Glulam beams must conform to the dimensions and geometry shown on the plans. Submit separate stamped calculations along with shop drawings demonstrating substituted glulam beams are adequate to carry loads under design criteria shown.
Add to section 57-2.01B(1): All timber sidewalk members must comply with AWPA U1, Use Category UC3B. Treated lumber and timber must have a clear, natural appearance. If treatment results in a colored appearance, the lumber and timbers must be stained to an even, brown-tone appearance.
Add to section 57-2.01B(3): Deck Planks, Beams, and Blocking for Timber Sidewalk must be preservative-treated timber. Do not paint Timber Sidewalk members.
Add to section 57-1.04: Payment for concrete support pad is included in payment for timber sidewalk.
59 STRUCTURAL STEEL COATINGS
Add to section 59-1.03A: Remove and reset historical markers and Type P markers on the existing truss to perform clean and paint operations.
Add to section 59-1.04: Payment for remove and reset historical markers and Type P markers on the existing truss is included in the payment for Clean and Paint Structural Steel (Existing Bridge).
47 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Add to section 59-2.01A(1): Clean and paint the new steel bridge shown in the following table with the coating system specified: Bridge name and Work description Coating system number Any new Structural Clean, blast clean, and paint new Zinc Steel (Bridge) steel bridge.
Clean and paint the existing steel bridge shown in the following table with the coating system specified: Bridge name and Work description Coating system number Any existing portion of Clean, blast clean to bare metal, State Specification PWB Historic Truss 49C0196 and paint all steel surfaces of the to be reset. existing bridge. Expect difficult clean and paint inside verticals and inside top chord through lattice members. Do not remove any rivets for clean and paint operations. Contact surfaces between members with rivets not designated for removal do not need to be cleaned and painted.
Replace Reserved in section 59-2.01A(3)(b) with: Submit proof of each required SSPC-QP certification as specified in section 8-1.04C. Required certifications are: 1. SSPC-QP 1 2. SSPC-QP 2, Category A 3. AISC-420-10/SSPC-QP 3, enclosed shop
Add to section 59-2.01C(3)(b)(ii): Blast clean all steel surfaces of bridge no. 49C0196 to bare metal under SSPC-SP 6/NACE no. 3. After blast cleaning, surfaces must have a dense, uniform, angular anchor pattern of at least 1.5 mils when measured under ASTM D4417.
Add to section 59-2.01C(4)(b)(i): Coat the inside surfaces of bolt holes cleaned under SSPC-SP 1 with 1 coat of organic zinc primer after applying the undercoat to adjacent steel surfaces. Protect the adjacent undercoated surfaces from the organic zinc primer.
48 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Add to section 59-2.01C(4)(b)(iv): Paint color of new and existing steel bridge members, except the supplemental truss, must match color no. FS 10140 Brown special of Fed-Std-595. The color of the supplemental truss must match color no. FS 14062 Dark Green of Fed-Std-595. Provide a test panel for each color for approval before ordering paint.
Test panel must be: 1. Applied to hardboard or paperboard 2. At least 2 by 2 feet 3. Stepped back to show all layers of paint, with textures to simulate actual conditions. 4. Painted using the personnel, materials, equipment, and methods to be used in the work 5. Authorized before starting work
The Engineer may request that additional test panel be painted until the specified finish and color are attained.
The Engineer uses the authorized test panel to determine acceptability of the work.
For bridge no. 49C0196 , the finish coat s must comply with State Specification PWB 174 .
60 EXISTING STRUCTURES
Add to section 60-2.01A: Remove the following portions of structure: Bridge no./Structure name Description of work 49C0196 Bridge foundations, reinforced concrete deck, supplemental steel truss (under historic truss), historic truss steel floor beams, historic truss steel pedestrian rail portions not to be reset, concrete standpipe (west of abutment 1), existing retaining wall (east of abutment 1), timber sidewalk and abandoned gas line.
Add to the list in the 2nd paragraph in section 60-2.02A(3): 7. A rivet removal plan illustrating a procedure on how rivets from truss to be rehabilitated will be removed without damaging any of the truss.
Add after the 2nd paragraph in section 60-2.02A(3): A rivet removal plan illustrating a procedure on how rivets from truss to be rehabilitated will be removed without damaging any of the truss.
Add to section 60-2.02C(1):
49 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Remove the existing concrete deck such that it does not fall on the existing supplemental truss or provide protective covers to protect the supplemental truss during deck removal.
Add to section 60-6: 60-6 RESET HISTORIC TRUSS 60-6.01 GENERAL 60-6.01A General Section 60-6 includes specifications for resetting existing historic truss. 60-6.01B Materials Not Used 60-6.01C Construction Not Used 60-6.01D Payment Not Used
DIVISION VII DRAINAGE FACILITIES
72 SLOPE PROTECTION
Replace the 1st paragraph of section 72-2.03A with: Excavate the slope and the footing trench for the rock slope protection. Install willow tubes as shown. Existing concrete in the creek is to remain in place, if it conflicts with the limits of the rock slope protection place the rock slope protection around it.
Add to section 72-2.04: Payment for furnishing and installing willow tubes is included in the payment for of the type rock slope protection involved.
73 CONCRETE CURBS AND SIDEWALKS
Add to section 73-1.03A: Concrete for sidewalks must be Class 3 concrete complying with section 90 of the City of Arroyo Grande Engineering Standards and Specifications with an exposed aggregate finish. Match adjacent sidewalk finish. Do not place tiles in the sidewalk.
Add to section 73-3.01C: Within 2 business days of completing the surveys, submit preconstruction and post- construction surveys sealed and signed by one of the following: 1. Land surveyor licensed in the State 2. Engineer who is registered as a civil engineer in the State
50 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Replace Reserved in section 73-3.01D(3) with: Perform a preconstruction survey to ensure forms and job site constraints will allow for compliance with required design dimensions and slopes shown. Upon completing the work, perform a post-construction survey to verify design dimensions and slopes requirements are met. The post-construction survey must include a minimum of 3 measurements for each dimension and slope requirement shown. Individual measurements must be equally distributed across the specified slope or dimensional surface. Document and submit these measurements on the Americans with Disabilities Act Compliance Inspection Report form for the facility type shown. Include the equipment and control used to conduct the survey.
Add to the beginning of section 73-3.03: Before placing concrete, verify that forms and job site constraints allow the required dimensioning and slopes shown. Immediately notify the Engineer if you encounter job site conditions that will not accommodate the design details. Ordered modifications are change order work.
Replace Section 77 with the following: 77 POTABLE WATER PIPELINE 77-1 GENERAL 77-1.01 GENERAL 77-1.01A Summary Section 77-1 includes general specifications for removing existing potable water pipeline from the bridge during construction, placement of the new water pipeline on the new bridge, and reconnecting the new pipeline into the existing looped system, and relocating irrigation system during bridge construction. Determine required to complete work. Submit the quantities as part of the schedule of values. The schedule of values must include type, size, and installation method for: 1. Furnishing Pipe 2. Excavation/Lay/Backfill 3. Pipe Supports/Restraint 4. Fittings 5. Connections to the Existing System 6. Temporary Thrust Restraint on Dead-End Pipes 7. Pressure Testing and Disinfection 8. Relocate and Reset Irrigation System
51 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
77-1.01B Quality Assurance 77-1.01B(1) Regulatory Requirements: Comply with Standard Specifications & Engineering Standards of the City of Arroyo Grande, having jurisdiction for both potable and irrigation water piping and appurtenances including materials, installation, and testing. Piping materials must bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. 77-1.01C Submittals 77-1.01C(1) General Submittals covered by these requirements include manufacturers’ information, shop drawings, test procedures, test results, samples, requests for substitutions, trench safety plan and miscellaneous work-related submittals. Submittals must also include, but not be limited to, all mechanical equipment and systems, materials, and detailed piping layout drawings and details. Furnish all drawings, specifications, descriptive data, certificates, samples, tests, methods, schedules, and manufacturer’s installation and other instructions as specifically required in the contract documents to demonstrate fully that the materials and equipment to be furnished and the methods of work comply with the provisions and intent of the Contract Documents. Prepare and submit to the Engineer, within two weeks after the date of the Preconstruction Conference, a complete list of shop drawings and material submittals intended to be delivered. No payment will be made to the Contractor until this list is reviewed and found acceptable to the Engineer. Allow the Engineer at least 30 days for review of all submittals, submit five (5) copies of each shop drawing, five (5) copies of all operation and maintenance manuals, and three (3) specimens of each sample requested. Two (2) copies of each submittal will be returned to the Contractor, except all sample specimens will be retained by the Engineer. Identify all submittals including schedules and operation and maintenance manuals on the transmittal form. Obtain an electronic or original copy of the transmittal form from the Engineer. Submittals must include submittal number, specification section, plan page reference number (where applicable), the supplier, etc. Indicate under “Remarks”, if the submittal is on the critical path and requires an expedited review. Submittals that are related to or affect each other must be forwarded simultaneously as a package to facilitate coordinated review. Uncoordinated submittals will be rejected. Do not combine unrelated materials in the same submittal. The Engineer reserves the right to require submittals in addition to those called for in individual sections. Schedule submittals to avoid concentration of submittals in a short time period. Scheduling of submittals must be included in the Contractor's Progress Schedule.
52 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
A copy of the specification section, and all referenced and applicable sections, with any addendum updates included, must be submitted with each paragraph check-marked to indicated specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks ( ) denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and requested by the Contractor, each deviation must be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance with the contract documents. The submittal must be accompanied by a detailed, written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy for the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal is sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration. For each resubmittal, provide a copy of submittal comments and a separate letter, on company letterhead, identifying how each submittal comment has been addressed in the resubmittal. 77-1.01C(2) Engineer’s Approval The Engineer will indicate his acceptance or disapproval of each submittal, and his reasons for disapproval. 1. If no corrections are required, the copies will be returned marked "NO EXCEPTION NOTED (Confirm)" and work may begin immediately on incorporating the material and equipment covered by the submittal into the project. 2. If limited corrections are required, the copies will be returned marked "NOTE MARKINGS (Confirm)". Work may begin immediately on incorporating the material and equipment covered by the corrected submittal into the project. 3. If insufficient or incorrect data has been submitted, the copies will be returned marked "NOTE MARKINGS (Resubmit)". No work incorporating the material and equipment covered by this submittal into the project may begin until the submittal has been revised, resubmitted, and returned marked either "NO EXCEPTION NOTED (Confirm)" or "NOTE MARKINGS (Confirm)". 4. If the submittal is unacceptable, the copies will be returned marked "REJECTED (Resubmit)". No work incorporating the material and equipment covered by this submittal into the project may begin until a new submittal has been made and returned marked either "NO EXCEPTION NOTED (Confirm)" or "NOTE MARKINGS (Confirm)". 5. If the submittal was not reviewed by the Engineer, the copies will be returned marked "NOT REVIEWED".
53 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Do not change any drawing after it has been marked "NO EXCEPTION NOTED (Confirm)" or "NOTE MARKINGS (Confirm)", or change any approved equipment or material without written permission of the Engineer. Comply with all submittals as marked by the Engineer. If more than TWO (2) submittals for a single item are required because of incorrect or insufficient data, or the submittal is unacceptable, or because the Contractor wishes to change previously approved material, then all costs incurred by the Engineer for the additional review will be deducted from monies due the Contractor.
77-1.01C(3) Certificates For those items called for in individual sections, furnish certificates from manufacturers, suppliers, or others certifying that materials or equipment being furnished under the Contract comply with the requirements of these specifications. 77-1.02 MATERIALS Material and hot dip galvanizing for pipe hangers must comply with Caltrans Standard Specifications section 75. 77-1.03 CONSTRUCTION Not Used 77-1.04 PAYMENT Not Used
77-2 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 77-2.01 GENERAL 77-2.01A Summary Section 77-2 includes specifications for trenching and backfilling during the construction and installation of pipelines. All trenching will be open cut, unless otherwise approved in writing. It includes all clearing and grubbing, trenching or tunneling, dewatering, incidental work, and providing specified backfill. Perform all earthwork and trenching operations indicated and required for construction of the work, complete and in place, in compliance with latest City of Arroyo Grande Standard Specifications & Engineering Standards. 77-2.01B Submittals Submittals must comply with Section 77-1.01C- Submittals. Submit five (5) copies of a report from a testing laboratory verifying that material conforms to the specified gradations of characteristics for granular material, imported
54 SPECIAL PROVISIONS sand, rock refill for foundation stabilization, and water. Submit method of compaction in pipe zone. 77-2.01C Project Conditions Obtain all required permits and licenses before installing utilities. Install utilities in compliance with requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. Arrange construction sequences to provide the shortest practical time that the trenches will be open, to avoid hazard to other contractors and public and to minimize the possibility of trench collapse. 77-2.01D Testing for Compaction The Engineer will test for compaction at locations determined by the Engineer. Where compaction tests indicate a failure to meet the specified compaction, the Engineer will take additional tests every 50 feet in each direction until the extent of the failing area is identified. Rework the entire failed area until the specified compaction is achieved. 77-2.01E Definitions Relative Compaction - The ratio, in percent, of the as-compacted dry density determined under ASTM D3017 or D2922 to the laboratory maximum dry density determined under ASTM D1557. Street Zone - The street zone includes the asphalt concrete and aggregate base pavement section placed over the trench backfill. Trench Zone - The trench zone includes the portion of the trench from the top of the pipe zone to the bottom of the street zone in paved areas or to the existing surface in unpaved areas. Pipe Zone – The pipe zone includes the full width of trench from the bottom of the pipe or conduit to a horizontal level above the top of the pipe, as shown on the contract plans. Pipe Bedding or Pipe Base - The pipe bedding or base is defined as a minimum 6- inches thick layer of material immediately below the bottom of the pipe or conduit and extending over the full trench width in which the pipe is bedded. 77-2.02 MATERIALS 77-2.02A Engineered Fill (Type 1) Engineered fill must consist of excavated native or imported material free of debris and organic materials and free of any rocks over 3-inches in diameter. 77-2.02B Imported Sand (Type 2) Imported washed sand used for the pipe bedding and pipe zones must be free of clay or organic material and gradation have the following gradation:
55 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Percent Passing by Sieve Size Weight 3/8-inch 100 No. 4 95 – 100 No. 30 30-50 No. 100 2-10 No. 200 0-5
Imported sand must have a sand equivalent not less than 28 per ASTM D 2419. 77-2.02C Class 2 Aggregate Base (Type 3) Backfill material consisting of Class 2 Aggregate Base must comply with Caltrans Standard Specifications Section 26-1.02. Recycled material such as recycled concrete or recycled asphaltic concrete is not allowed, unless approved by the Engineer. 77-2.02D ¾-Inch Crushed Rock (Type 4) Crushed rock base and gravel are defined as natural or crushed rock, free from organic matter, and meeting the gradation: Percent Passing by Sieve Size Weight 3/8-inch 90-100 No. 50 0- 100 No. 100 0-8 No. 200 0-4
Crushed rock used within the pipe base zone, or in the pipe zone must be enveloped in geotextile fabric. Durability Index must be at least 40 under California Test Method No. 229 or ASTM D3744. Filter fabric must be Mirafi 140 N, Mirafi 700X, or equal. 77-2.02E Cement Slurry (Type 5) Cement slurry backfill materials must comply with Caltrans Standard Specification Section 19-3.02E. Slurry must be placed within one hour after initial mixing. 77-2.02F Topsoil (Type 6) Stockpiled topsoil material which has been obtained at the site by removing soil to a depth not exceeding 1 foot. Removal of the topsoil must be done after the area has been stripped of vegetation and debris.
56 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
77-2.02G Backfill Material Schedule (For Placement) Backfill materials must be provided according to the following unless otherwise shown: Pipe zone and bedding for PVC pipe must be Type 2 backfill (pipe bedding) material. Trench zone and final backfill for pipelines under paved areas must be Type 3 or 5 backfill material unless otherwise described. 77-2.02H Materials Testing All soils testing of samples submitted must be from a testing laboratory of the Engineer’s choosing and at the Owner’s expense. The Engineer may request that you supply samples for testing of any material used in the work. Particle size analysis of soils and aggregates will be performed using ASTM D422. Determination of sand equivalent value will be performed using ASTM D2419. Unified Soil Classification System: References in this Section to soil classification types and standards have the meanings and definitions indicated in ASTM D2487. The Contractor is bound by all applicable provisions of ASTM D2487 in the interpretation of soil classifications. The testing for chloride, sulfate, resistivity, and pH will comply with California Test Methods 532 and 643. 77-2.02I Refill for Foundation Stabilization Remove loose materials at trench bottoms resulting from excavation disturbances until firm soil. If soft, loose or unstable areas are encountered, these areas should be over- excavated to a firm base or a minimum depth of 2 feet. Refill consists of materials for filling the over excavation as approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. Refill must meet the material requirements specified for pipe zone. As an alternative, crushed rock, enveloped in geotextile fabric may be utilized with authorization from the Geotechnical Engineer. 77-2.02J Concrete Thrust Blocks Cement for concrete for thrust blocks must comply with Caltrans Standard Specifications Section 90-1.02B(2). 77-2.02K Water for Compaction Water for compaction must be clean and free of oil, acids, salts, and other deleterious substances. Water must be supplied by you at no additional expense to the Owner. Water must be drawn from a hydrant meter. Make arrangements with the Engineer to obtain hydrant meter. Coordinate with the Engineer for the use of the water and provide all necessary labor and equipment to extract, transport and apply the water for compaction. You are responsible for the repair of any damage to the existing facilities which can be attributed to this operation.
57 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
77-2.03 CONSTRUCTION 77-2.03A Compaction Requirements Unless otherwise described, relative compaction in pipe trenches must be as follows: 1. Pipe Base: 90% relative compaction. 2. Pipe Zone: 95% relative compaction. 3. Backfill in Trench Zone: Must be compacted under the latest City Standards. 4. Backfill in Street Zone in Paved Areas or within Limits of Aggregate Base Roadways: Must be compacted under the latest City Standards 5. Refill for Foundation Stabilization: 95% relative compaction. 6. Refill for Overexcavation: 95% relative compaction.
Where compaction tests indicate a failure to meet the specified compaction, the Engineer will take additional test every 50 feet in each direction until the extent of the failing area is identified. Rework the entire failed area until the specified compaction has been achieved at no expense to the Owner. 77-2.03B Material Replacement Remove and replace any trenching and backfilling material which does not meet the specifications, at your own expense. 77-2.03C Sloping, Sheeting, Shoring and Bracing of Trenches Trenches must have sloping, sheeting, shoring, and bracing under 29 CFR 1926, Subpart P. 77-2.03D Sidewalk Pavement and Curb Removal Cut bituminous and concrete pavements regardless of the thickness of curbs and sidewalks with a pavement saw or pavement cutter before excavating trenches. Width of the pavement cut shall be at least equal to the required width of the trench at ground surface plus 6-inches past each side of the trench. Haul pavement and concrete materials from the site. Do not use excavated material for trench backfill. 77-2.03E Trench Widths Trench widths in the pipe zone must be as shown. If not shown, the maximum width must be 12 inches greater than the pipe outside diameter. Comply with 29 CFR 1926 Subpart P. Trench width at the top of the trench will not be limited except where width of excavation would undercut adjacent structures and footings. If undercutting occurs, then the width of trench must be at least two feet between the top edge of the trench and the structure or footing. 77-2.03F Trench Excavation Excavate the trench to the lines and grades shown, with allowance for pipe thickness, sheeting and shoring if used, and for pipe base or special bedding. If the trench is excavated below the required grade, refill any part of the trench excavated below the grade with foundation stabilization material, at no additional cost to the Owner. Place the refilling material over the full width of trench in compacted layers not exceeding 6-
58 SPECIAL PROVISIONS inches deep to the established grade with allowance for the pipe base or special bedding. 77-2.03G Location of Excavated Material During trench excavation, place the excavated material only within the working area. Do not obstruct any roadways or streets. Conform to the federal, state, and local codes governing the safe loading of trenches with excavated material. All trenches must be backfilled at the end of each day’s operation. Until permanent asphalt paving can be replaced, backfill the trench to grade and maintain the subgrade and surface in a condition that is suitable to support and safely carry traffic. New asphalt paving must be placed within one (1) week after backfilling and trench, unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. 77-2.03H Exploratory Excavation Excavate and expose buried points of connection to existing utilities where shown. Preform excavation before preparation of Shop Drawings for connections, and use the data obtained in preparing the Shop Drawings. Submit data, including dates, locations excavated, and sketches to the Engineer within one week of excavation. Repair damage to utilities from excavation activities. 77-2.03I Length of Open Trench Do not exceed 100 feet of open trench in advance of pipe laying or the amount of pipe installed in one working day, whichever is less, and not more than 100 feet in the rear of pipe laying, unless authorized by the permit. At the end of each working day, the entire trench must be backfilled to match existing surface. The length of open trench which may be left unattended overnight is limited to 20 feet or one pipe length, whichever is shorter. Any section of trench left unattended must meet the following requirements: 1. Isolate the trench from unauthorized access with rigid barricades and/or temporary fencing and clearly mark and delineate it with warning signs, reflective cones, and warning lights. 2. If within the street right-of-way, plate the trench using trench plates and provide sheeting shoring and bracing to support the trench plates sufficient to carry H-20 traffic loads. Applicable state, county, and municipal traffic safety rules will govern installation and maintenance of trench plates.
77-2.03J Foundation Stabilization After the required excavation has been completed, the Engineer will inspect the exposed subgrade to determine the need for any additional excavation. It is the intent
59 SPECIAL PROVISIONS that additional excavation be conducted in all areas within the influence of the pipeline where unacceptable materials exist at the exposed subgrade. Overexcavation includes the removal of all unacceptable materials that exists directly beneath the pipeline to the required trench dimensions. Backfill the trench to subgrade of pipe base with refill material for foundation stabilization. Place the foundation stabilization material over the full width of the trench and compact in layers not exceeding 6-inches deep to the required grade. Foundation stabilization work is change order work. The Owner does not pay for refill placed outside these dimensions. 77-2.03K Installing Buried Piping Backfill as described. Avoid damage to the pipe. Do not drop or dump pipe into trenches. Inspect each pipe or fitting before placing into the trench. Inspect the interior and exterior protective coatings and patch damaged areas in the field with material recommended by the protective coating manufacturer. Clean ends of pipe thoroughly and remove foreign matter and dirt from inside of pipe. Keep pipe clean during and after installation. Grade the bottom of the trench to the line and grade to which the pipe is to be laid, with allowance for pipe thickness and bedding depth. Remove hard spots that would prevent a uniform thickness of bedding. Place the specified thickness pipe base material over the full width of trench. Grade the top of the pipe base ahead of the pipe laying to provide firm, continuous, uniform support along the full length of pipe, and compact to the relative compaction specified. After laying each section of the pipe, check the grade and alignment and correct any irregularities before laying next joint. Verify pipe grade at not more than 50 feet intervals, in the presence of the Engineer. After pipe has been bedded, place pipe zone material simultaneously on both sides of the pipe, in maximum 6-inch lifts, keeping the level of backfill the same on each side. Carefully place the material around the pipe so that the pipe barrel is completely supported and that no voids or compacted areas are left beneath the pipe. Use particular care in placing material on the underside of pipe to prevent lateral movement during subsequent backfilling. Compact each lift to the relative compaction specified. Push the backfill material carefully onto the backfill previously placed in the pipe zone. Do not permit free fall of the material until at least 2 feet of cover is provided over the top of the pipe. Do not drop sharp, heavy pieces of material directly onto the pipe or the tamped material around the pipeline. Do not operate heavy equipment over the pipe until at least 3 feet of backfill has been placed and compacted over the pipe. When pipe laying is not in progress, including the noon hours, close the open ends of pipe. Do not allow trench water, animals, or foreign material to enter the pipe.
60 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Remove and dispose of all water entering the trench during the process of pipe laying. Keep the trench dry until the pipe laying and jointing are completed. 77-2.03L Backfill Compaction Compact backfill as follows: 1. Compact trench backfill to the specified relative compaction. Compact by using mechanical compaction or hand tamping. Do not use high impact hammer-type or heavy equipment except where the pipe manufacturer warrants in writing that such use will not damage the pipe. Ponding or jetting is not allowed. 2. Compact material placed within 12-inches of the outer surface of the pipe by hand tamping and/or small hand held tamping equipment. 3. Do not use any axle-driven or tractor-drawn compaction equipment within 5 feet of building walls, foundations, or other structures.
77-2.04 PAYMENT Not Used
77-3 POTABLE AND IRRIGATION WATER PIPELINE 77-3.01 GENERAL 77-3.01A Summary Section 77-3 includes specifications for furnishing and installing polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe and ductile iron pipe (DIP), fittings and appurtenances for the potable water pipeline. All pipe and fittings must conform to these specifications and the American Water Works Association (AWWA) requirements. Valves must only be operated by authorized City personnel. Notify the Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of the need, and the Engineer will coordinate the work. This section also includes specifications for furnishing and installing PVC pipe and appurtenances for relocating and resetting irrigation system for bridge construction. 77-3.01B Quality Assurance Not Used 77-3.01C Submittals Submittals must comply with Section 77-1.01C - Submittals. 77-3.02 MATERIALS 77-3.02A General Water system main pipeline must be Ductile Iron Pipe for the exposed piping suspended from the bridge. Buried water mains shall be PVC. Water system services may be Copper, Polyethylene or Schedule 80 PVC. Irrigation lines must be PVC.
61 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
77-3.02B Pipe 77-3.02B(1) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe (Buried) (Larger than 2-inch) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pipe for potable water use must comply with AWWA C900, be pressure class 235, DR-18, and be blue in color. Furnish pipe in 20 foot lengths with integral wall belled ends and elastomeric joint and solid wall. Pipe and fittings must be free of imperfections and clearly marked with name of manufacturer. 77-3.02B(2) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe (2-inch and Smaller for Irrigation System) PVC Pipe must comply with ASTM D1784, Schedule 80 . 77-3.02B(3) Ductile Iron Pipe (Above Ground) (Larger than 2-inch) Ductile iron pipe must be centrifugally cast, ductile iron, with restrained mechanical joints. The pressure class must be 150 minimum for potable water systems, coated outside, and lined inside with seal-coated cement lining of 1/16 inch minimum thickness, conforming to all applicable ASA and AWWA Specifications. 77-3.02C Applications Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following: 1. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping. 3. Special earthquake joints must be used where described at bridge crossing instead of joints indicated, 4. Aboveground DIP must have restrained mechanical joints; EBAA Megalug Series 1100. 5. Underground water-service piping must be PVC.
77-3.02D Joints and Fittings 77-3.02D(1) PVC (Larger than 2-inch) PVC pipe must have a rubber ring bell and spigot joints providing a water-tight seal and allowing for contraction and expansion. The bell must consist of an integral wall section stiffened with two PVC retainer rings that securely lock the solid cross section rubber ring into position. 77-3.02D(2) PVC (2-inch and Smaller for Irrigation System) PVC pipe must have socket joints and fittings and comply with ASTM D2466 for Schedule 80 .
62 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping must comply with ASTM D2564 and include primer under ASTM F656. PVC solvent cement must have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less and adhesive primer must have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated under 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 77-3.02D(3) DIP Use restrained mechanical joints for exposed ductile iron pipe on bridge crossings. Restrained fittings must be EBAA Iron Megalug Series 1100, or approved equal which use a factory weld as part of the restraining system. For Permanent Bridge installation, install one earthquake joint as shown. All fittings must be cement lined by the centrifugal process in compliance with USA Standard A21.4, as amended to date. Cement lining must be standard thickness. Joint and fitting types must be flexible couplings and must comply with City Standard Specifications & Engineering Standards. 77-3.02E Valves and Appurtenances 77-3.02E(1) Gate Valves (3 inch to 8 inch) All gate valves must be:Mueller 2360, Mueller 2361, or approved equal complying with AWWA C509 and the following: 1. Mechanical joint 2. Resilient seated with fully encapsulated gate 3. Epoxy coated inside and outside 4. Full-size waterway 5. Open to the left 6. Non-rising stems with o-ring seals 7. Complete with cast iron glands; high strength cast iron tee-head bolts and hex nuts; plain rubber gaskets conforming to ASA specification A21.11. 8. 200-psi working pressure rating; tested to 400 psi
77-3.02E(2) Corporation Stop Must be a ball style Corporation Stop, 2-inch CC inlet thread x 2-inch I.P. outlet thread; no lead, full port ball opening, o-ring sealed, blow-out proof, 360° rotation, manufactured by Jones, AY McDonald, Ford, or approved equal. 77-3.02E(3) Service Saddle Must be outlet tapped with 2-inch AWWA taper (C.C.), bronze with double straps, manufactured by Jones, AY McDonald, Ford, or approved equal.
63 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
77-3.02E(4) Air Release Valves Air release must be a combined air release and vacuum in compliance with AWWA C512. 77-3.02F Water Service Relocation for Construction of Bridge The potable water main to be removed during construction of the bridge, only has one service connection between the isolation valves. The irrigation service on the north side of the bridge must be relocated to the north side of the isolation valve and hot tapped before shutting down the water main on the bridge. All other services to businesses and residents on Bridge Street must not be affected by the removal of the bridge portion of the pipeline. Thrust restraint must be placed at the isolation valves as shown and with the Engineer's authorization before shutdown and removal of the pipeline between the isolation valves. 77-3.02G Locating Wire No. 12 insulated THW copper tracer wire shall be placed continuously over all PVC pipe and shall be brought to the surface in a valve well, meter box, or similar structure. 77-3.02H Irrigation Relocate and reset all existing irrigation system components as described. 77-3.03 CONSTRUCTION 77-3.03A Product Handling Handle and store all pipeline and pipeline related materials as follows: 1. Manufacturer’s Recommendations - Except as otherwise authorized by the Engineer, determine and comply with manufacturer’s recommendations on product handling, storage, and protection. Rotating equipment storage must include recommended manual rotation frequency with a log demonstrating specification compliance. Contact the Engineer before performing the scheduled rotation. An Inspector may accompany the Contractor’s workers during the required rotation. 2. The Engineer may reject as non-complying such material and products that do not bear identification satisfactory to the Engineer as to manufacturer, grade, quality, and other pertinent information. 3. Provide copies of all equipment delivery tags to the Engineer on a daily basis with delivery tag indicating equipment number, item description, model number, and serial number. 4. Protect materials and equipment from the effects of weather, sunlight, extreme temperatures, etc., when exposure of the materials or equipment to the elements would cause degradation of, or damage to, the material, equipment or coating system. Progress payments for materials and equipment stored on-site will only be made when the materials or equipment are suitably stored.
64 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
5. Storage of Equipment: During the interval between the delivery of equipment to the site and installation, safely store all equipment must be safely stored in a way authorized by the Engineer. Equipment must be stored in an enclosed space affording protection from vandalism, weather, dust and mechanical damage and providing favorable temperature, humidity and ventilation conditions to ensure against equipment deterioration. In event of damage, promptly make replacements at no additional cost to the Owner and as authorized by the Engineer 6. Additional time required to secure replacements will not be considered as justification for an extension in the Contract Time of Completion.
77-3.03B Installation of Pipe and Fittings Notify the Engineer 24 hours in advance of the need to shut down the existing waterline. Only authorized City staff is allowed to operate system valves. The Engineer will coordinate the shutdown of the existing water system for removal of the existing pipe across the bridge and new pipeline tie-ins with the authoring Agency. In all cases an effective shut down may not be possible, and you must work in wet conditions. The Department does not pay for additional cost from working in wet conditions. All service interruption or shutdowns are limited to four hours and authorized by the Engineer. The pipe, joints, and fittings must be installed under manufacturer's recommendations, ASTM 2321, and this Section, whichever is more stringent. All new water main pipeline joints must be fully restrained. Thrust blocks must be installed at bends under Standard Specifications & Engineering Standards of the City of Arroyo Grande. Pipe and fittings must be of the sizes described. Clean pipe interior of all foreign matter before installing. Pipe must be square cut with fine tooth saw or other cutter or knife designed for use with plastic pipe. Remove burrs by smoothing edges with a knife, file, or sandpaper. Replace any section of pipe found to be defective or damaged with new acceptable pipe. Handle pipe carefully to prevent gouging or scratching. Any length of pipe having a gouge, scratch, or other permanent indentation more than 10 percent of the wall thickness in depth will be rejected. Install locator wire over all non-metallic waterlines in a continuous strand, taped on top of pipe, and secured with tape at 20 ft intervals under the Standard Specifications & Engineering Standards of the City of Arroyo Grande. 77-3.03B(1) Mechanical Joints Clean length of ends of pipe of all oil, grit, and other foreign material by brushing with a wire brush and then painted with a soap solution made by dissolving 1/2 cup of granular soap in one gallon of water. Install mechanical joint by:
65 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1. Placing the gland on the pipe with lip extension of the gland toward the socket or bell end of the joint. 2. Painting the rubber with the NSF approved pipe joining lubricant and place on the pipe with the thick edge toward the gland. 3. Pushing the pipe into the bell to seat the spigot and gasket into place. 4. Evenly locating the gasket around the entire joint. 5. Placing the gland against the gasket. 6. Inserting the bolts and place the nuts and tightening them with torque wrench. 7. Tightening nuts one hundred eighty degrees (180°) apart alternately, to produce an equal pressure on all parts of the gasket. 8. Torque 90 foot-pounds.
77-3.03B(2) Flexible Couplings As described, in high-risk areas subject to earthquakes, provide a ductile iron system that delivers joint deflection and longitudinal expansion or contraction. This system must be the AMERICAN Earthquake Joint System or a system equal to or exceeding each of these performance criteria: Diameter Pipe Joint Casting Combined Expansion Dead End Deflection Joint Assembly or Thrust Deflection Deflection Contraction Resistance from Mid- Point 6" 5 degrees 3 degrees 8 degrees + 2.4 inches 102,000 lbs 8" 5 degrees 3 degrees 8 degrees + 2.4 inches 136,000 lbs
The ductile iron earthquake resistant pipe must comply with AWWA C150 (design), AWWA C151 (manufacture), AWWA C104 (lining), C111 (joints), AWWA C153 (fittings), AWWA C105 (polyethylene encasement), and AWWA C600 (installation). The mass of the zinc applied must be a minimum of 200 g/m2 of pipe surface area and the coating system must comply with ISO 8179-1. The zinc must have a topcoat of approved materials. Component pieces and field touch up may require the use of a zinc-rich coating 85% zinc under ISO-8179-part 2. The Earthquake System piping will be installed in the fully open, fully closed, or mid- point position in compliance with design criteria. 77-3.03C Testing Pressure Testing and Disinfection must comply with Standard Specifications & Engineering Standards of the City of Arroyo Grande, Section 77-203J. 77-3.04 PAYMENT Not Used
66 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
77-4 TESTING OF PIPELINE 77-4.01 GENERAL 77-4.01A Summary Section 77-4 includes specifications for leak testing all pipelines and related valves and fittings. Rejected work must be retested, and if still rejected it must be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. 77-4.01B Quality Assurance Flow meters must record the actual volume plus or minus 2 percent. Air and vacuum test gauges must be ANSI B40.1, Grade 3A (plus or minus 0.25 percent of full scale accuracy), with a dial range approximately twice the required test pressure. Water test gauges must be ANSI B40.1, Grade 2A (plus or minus 0.5 percent of full scale accuracy), with a dial range approximately twice the required test pressure. 77-4.01C Submittals Accuracy certification must be by an approved independent testing laboratory for flow meters and test gauges and dated no more than 90 days before actual system testing. Before testing, provide the following information: 1. All Tests: Describe precautions that will be taken to protect system equipment that might be damaged under test pressures. 2. Air Test: Describe safety devices on air test equipment, and personnel safety precautions during air tests. 3. High or Low Pressure Water Test: Describe the proposed method for disposal of water used in line testing.
77-4.02 MATERIALS Not Used 77-4.03 CONSTRUCTION Pressure testing of new water facilities must comply with AWWA Standards. Perform testing in the Engineer's presence after backfill and proper compaction of trenches. Where lines are installed under the bridge, perform tests after completion of connection to new underground portion of pipeline at each end of the bridge. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours before testing by submitting a test form which must indicates test date, pipeline to be tested, test requirements and any additional requirements requested by the Engineer. Prepare each section for testing, using adequate bracing; protect system equipment susceptible to damage by test pressures; make provision for installation of Engineer's pressure gage in parallel with Contractor's gage, if so requested; and maintain services
67 SPECIAL PROVISIONS where required. Water for flushing and testing is available from local fire hydrants and must be coordinated with the Engineer. 77-4.03A Test Procedure The testing procedure for the new water pipeline installations must comply with Section 77 of the Standard Specifications & Engineering Standards of the City of Arroyo Grande. Remove sampling station and temporary facilities when testing is complete. After completion of the installations, test all piping and pipework as specified and furnish all material, equipment, and labor for testing the piping systems. Each system may be tested as a unit or in sections as directed by the Engineer, but each complete system must successfully meet the requirements specified before acceptance by the Engineer. For water testing, the test must be made by closing valves or providing bulkheads or plugs and filling the pipelines with water, with provisions made for the release of all air in the lines. Fill lines with water 24 hours before testing for leakage to allow for absorption of water by pipe or joint material. Maintain specified pressures or heads of water for the periods of time tabulated, except where indicated to be air or vacuum, and the leakage determined. Leakage must not exceed the tabulated values in AWWA C605. Test pressures must be 1.5 times the working pressure of the adjacent facilities, at the low point of the test section unless otherwise shown. The pressure must be maintained for two (2) hours within 5 psi of test pressure. If leakage is more than allowable, repair or replace the pipeline and retest it. Do not use paints, asphalts, tars, or other type of pipe compounds to eliminate leaks. Take all necessary precautions to prevent any joints from drawing while the pipelines and their appurtenances are being tested and repair any damage to the pipes and their appurtenances, or to any other structures, resulting from or caused by these tests. Remove and replace any defective materials discovered during pressure test and repeat the test. 77-4.03B Test Records Provide records of each piping installation during the testing. These records must include: 1. Date of Test 2. Identification of pipeline, or pipeline section, tested or retested 3. Identification of pipeline material 4. Identification of pipe specification 5. Test fluid 6. Test pressure
68 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
7. Remarks: Leaks identified (type and location), types of repairs, or corrections made 8. Certification by Contractor that the leakage rate measured conformed to the specifications
77-4.03C Testing Requirements Testing must comply with AWWA Standards, and in coordination with the Owner and the Engineer. Average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per square inch (gauge) where test pressure must be 2x working pressure, or minimum of 150 psi. 77-4.04 PAYMENT Not Used
77-5 DISINFECTION OF PIPELINE 77-5.01 GENERAL 77-5.01A Summary Section 77-5 includes specifications for disinfecting all portions of the new potable water system, including any portion of the existing connecting system that might have become contaminated during construction activities. All disinfection of potable waterlines must comply with Standard Specifications & Engineering Standards of the City of Arroyo Grande. 77-5.01B Submittals Submittals must comply with Section 77-1.01C - Submittals. Submit a plan and schedule for water conveyance, cleaning, disinfection, flushing and water disposal, and pressure testing for authorization a minimum of 48 hours before testing is to start. The plan must demonstrate that personnel are experienced and prepared to resolve problems which may arise. Submit a plan for conveying water and protecting the existing potable water system used to supply disinfection water. Submit a test plan indicating fill location, bleed location(s), test locations(s) and other pertinent information. 77-5.02 MATERIALS Calcium Hypochlorite: HTH, by Olin Chemicals, Olin Corporation, 120 Long Ridge Road, Stamford, CN 06904, or similar commercial product having approximately 70 percent available chlorine. Mixture: A 5 percent solution is made by mixing 5 percent of powder with 95 percent water, by weight, first into a paste, then thinning to slurry by the addition of water.
69 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
77-5.03 CONSTRUCTION Notify Engineer, in writing, at least 48 hours before disinfection procedures and testing. After installation and pressure testing, new water services must be disinfected under AWWA C651. 77-5.03A Flushing Before starting the disinfection process, flush the potable water services to remove all dirt and debris. Fill the system at a rate not to exceed 1 foot per second. Once filled, open valves and appurtenances as necessary to achieve flushing velocities on the order of 3 feet per second. Continue flushing until the receiving water is free of visible dirt and impurities. Commence disinfection operations only after the successful completion of flushing and pressure testing operations complies with Section 77-4. 77-5.03B Dosage Place enough disinfecting material in the system to insure a chlorine dosage of 50 parts per million. This is equivalent to 10 ounces of commercial hypochlorite powder to each 1,000 gallons of water. 77-5.03C Filling System Fill entire system with the chlorine solution at a rate not to exceed 1 foot per second. Open all taps and valves and leave open until a strong odor of chlorine is noticeable in the water coming from the outlets, after which close the taps and valves. 77-5.03D Test Period Allow chlorinated water to remain in the system a minimum of 24 hours, and then thoroughly flush the system. During retention period, operate all valves, stops, and other appurtenances to assist the disinfection. 77-5.03E Disposal of Chlorinated Water Dispose of chlorinated water so that no water having a chlorine residual reaches a surface stream. 77-5.03F Bacteriological Exam Provide sample stations and blow-offs or valves needed to complete testing and disinfection. Sampling stations may be a threadless hose bib or other flow-controlling valve connected to the new water facility at either: 1. Fire hydrant 2. Blow-off 3. Backflow, or 4. Corporation stop
Hose bib or other flow-controlling valve must be a minimum of 1 foot above grade and located at the most remote point of the facility.
70 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Notify the Engineer at least two working days in advance of each sample need. Samples are taken between 8:00 A.M. and 1:00 P.M. Monday through Friday, excluding City holidays. After the system has been thoroughly flushed, the Engineer will take samples from representative points in the system, in sterile bottles, and submit to proper authorities for bacteriological examination. If the report is unsatisfactory, repeat the disinfection procedure until satisfactory results are obtained. The Department does not pay for retesting. 77-5.04 PAYMENT Not Used
78 INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION
Add to the RSS for section 78-4.04A(1): The application of a sealer to the stained surfaces is not required.
Add between the 2nd and 3rd paragraphs of the RSS for section 78-4.04A(4)(b): The test panel must closely resemble the referee sample located at the southern abutment wall face under existing bridge .
Completed stained surfaces of the architectural treatment must match color no. FS 30372 Sand of FED-STD-595.
Replace RESERVED in section 78-23 with: 78-23 TEMPORARILY RELOCATE PARK ITEMS 78-23.01 GENERAL Section 78-23 includes specifications for temporarily relocating park items, including but not limited to benches, picnic tables, BBQs and trash cans. 78-23.02 MATERIALS Not Used 78-23.03 CONSTRUCTION During construction move all park items to clear the way for your activities and to a location still available for public use. Items may have to be relocated multiple times during construction. When construction is complete, move the items back to their original location. 78-23.04 PAYMENT Not Used
71 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Replace RESERVED in section 78-24 with: 78-24 RESET CONCRETE PLANTER 78-24.01 GENERAL Section 78-24 includes specifications for removing, storing and resetting concrete planters. 78-24.02 MATERIALS Not Used 78-24.03 CONSTRUCTION During construction remove concrete planters and deliver them to 1375 Ash Street for storage. Protect the flowers and stockpile the planters so they can be water during construction. Notify the engineer 5 days before removing and delivering them. .
When construction is complete, place concrete planters back to their original location. 78-24.04 PAYMENT Not Used
Replace Section 79 with the following: 79 SANITARY SEWER 79-1 GENERAL
79-1.01 GENERAL 79-1.01A Summary Section 79-1 includes general specifications for relocating the gravity sewers, both temporarily (during bridge construction) and permanently (with new bridge in-place), including appurtenances as part of the bridge replacement project. Determine quantities required to complete work. Submit the quantities as part of the schedule of values. The schedule of values must include type, size, and installation method for: 1. Furnishing Pipe 2. Excavation/Lay/Backfill 3. Fittings 4. Connections to the Existing System
79-1.01B Quality Assurance 79-1.01B(1) Regulatory Requirements: Comply with Standard Specifications & Engineering Standards of the City of Arroyo Grande. Piping materials must bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
72 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
79-1.01C Submittals 79-1.01C(1) General Submittals covered by these requirements include manufacturers’ information, test procedures, test results, samples, requests for substitutions, trench safety plan and miscellaneous work-related submittals. Submittals must also include, but not be limited to, all mechanical equipment and systems, materials, and detailed piping layout drawings and details. Furnish all drawings, specifications, descriptive data, certificates, samples, tests, methods, schedules, and manufacturer’s installation and other instructions as described to demonstrate fully that the materials and equipment furnished and the methods of work comply with the Contract Documents. Prepare and submit to the Engineer, within two weeks after the date of the Preconstruction Conference, a complete list of material submittals intended to be delivered. No payment will be made until this list is reviewed and found acceptable to the Engineer. Allow the Engineer at least 30 days for review of all submittals, submit five (5) copies of each shop drawing, five (5) copies of all operation and maintenance manuals, and three (3) specimens of each sample requested. Two (2) copies of each submittal will be returned to the Contractor, except all sample specimens will be retained by the Engineer. Identify all submittals including schedules and operation and maintenance manuals on the transmittal form. Obtain an electronic or original copy of the transmittal form from the Engineer. Submittals must include submittal number, specification section, plan page reference number (where applicable), the supplier, etc. Indicate under “Remarks”, if the submittal is on the critical path and requires an expedited review. Submittals that are related to or affect each other must be forwarded simultaneously as a package to facilitate coordinated review. Uncoordinated submittals will be rejected. Do not combine unrelated materials in the same submittal. The Engineer reserves the right to require submittals in addition to those called for in individual sections. Schedule submittals to avoid concentration of submittals in a short time period. Scheduling of submittals must be included in the Contractor's Progress Schedule. A copy of the specification section, and all referenced and applicable sections, with any addendum updates included, must be submitted with each paragraph check-marked to indicated specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks ( ) denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and requested by the Contractor, each deviation must be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance with the Contract Documents. The submittal must be accompanied by a detailed, written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy for the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal is sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.
73 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
For each resubmittal, provide a copy of submittal comments and a separate letter, on company letterhead, identifying how each submittal comment has been addressed in the resubmittal. 79-1.01C(2) Engineer’s Approval The Engineer will indicate acceptance or disapproval of each submittal, and reasons for disapproval. 1. If no corrections are required, the copies will be returned marked "NO EXCEPTION NOTED (Confirm)" and work may begin immediately on incorporating the material and equipment covered by the submittal into the project. 2. If limited corrections are required, the copies will be returned marked "NOTE MARKINGS (Confirm)". Work may begin immediately on incorporating the material and equipment covered by the corrected submittal into the project. 3. If insufficient or incorrect data has been submitted, the copies will be returned marked "NOTE MARKINGS (Resubmit)". No work incorporating the material and equipment covered by this submittal into the project may begin until the submittal has been revised, resubmitted, and returned marked either "NO EXCEPTION NOTED (Confirm)" or "NOTE MARKINGS (Confirm)". 4. If the submittal is unacceptable, the copies will be returned marked "REJECTED (Resubmit)". No work incorporating the material and equipment covered by this submittal into the project may begin until a new submittal has been made and returned marked either "NO EXCEPTION NOTED (Confirm)" or "NOTE MARKINGS (Confirm)". 5. If the submittal was not reviewed by the Engineer, the copies will be returned marked "NOT REVIEWED".
Do not change any drawing after it has been marked "NO EXCEPTION NOTED (Confirm)" or "NOTE MARKINGS (Confirm)", or change any approved equipment or material without written permission of the Engineer. Comply with all submittals as marked by the Engineer. If more than TWO (2) submittals for a single item are required because of incorrect or insufficient data, or the submittal is unacceptable, or because the Contractor wishes to change previously approved material, then all costs incurred by the Engineer for the additional review will be deducted from monies due the Contractor. 79-1.01C(3) Certificates For those items called for in individual sections, furnish certificates from manufacturers, suppliers, or others certifying that materials or equipment being furnished under the Contract comply with the requirements of these specifications. 79-1.02 MATERIALS Material and hot dip galvanizing for pipe hangers must comply with Caltrans Standard Specifications section 75. 79-1.03 CONSTRUCTION Not Used
74 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
79-1.04 PAYMENT Not Used
79-2 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
79-2.01 GENERAL 79-2.01A Summary Section 79-2 includes specifications for trenching and backfilling during the construction and installation of pipelines. All trenching will be open cut, unless otherwise approved in writing. It includes all clearing and grubbing, trenching or tunneling, dewatering, incidental work, and providing specified backfill. Perform all earthwork and trenching operations indicated and required for construction of the work, complete and in place, in compliance with latest City of Arroyo Grande Standard Specifications & Engineering Standards. 79-2.01B Submittals Submittals must comply with Section 79-1.01C - Submittals. Submit five (5) copies of a report from a testing laboratory verifying that material conforms to the specified gradations of characteristics for granular material, imported sand, rock refill for foundation stabilization, and water. Submit method of compaction in pipe zone. 79-2.01C Project Conditions Obtain all required permits and licenses before installing utilities. Install utilities in compliance with requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. Arrange construction sequences to provide the shortest practical time that the trenches will be open, to avoid hazard to other contractors and public and to minimize the possibility of trench collapse. 79-2.01D Testing for Compaction The Engineer will test for compaction at locations determined by the Engineer. Where compaction tests indicate a failure to meet the specified compaction, the Engineer will take additional tests every 50 feet in each direction until the extent of the failing area is identified. Rework the entire failed area until the specified compaction is achieved. 79-2.01E Definitions Relative Compaction - The ratio, in percent, of the as-compacted dry density determined under ASTM D3017 or D2922 to the laboratory maximum dry density determined under ASTM D1557. Street Zone - The street zone includes the asphalt concrete and aggregate base pavement section placed over the trench backfill.
75 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Trench Zone - The trench zone includes the portion of the trench from the top of the pipe zone to the bottom of the street zone in paved areas or to the existing surface in unpaved areas. Pipe Zone – The pipe zone includes the full width of trench from the bottom of the pipe or conduit to a horizontal level above the top of the pipe, as shown on the contract plans. Pipe Bedding or Pipe Base - The pipe bedding or base is defined as a minimum 6- inches thick layer of material immediately below the bottom of the pipe or conduit and extending over the full trench width in which the pipe is bedded. 79-2.02 MATERIALS 79-2.02A Engineered Fill (Type 1) Engineered fill must consist of excavated native or imported material free of debris and organic materials and free of any rocks over 3-inches in diameter. 79-2.02B Imported Sand (Type 2) Imported washed sand used for the pipe bedding and pipe zones must be free of clay or organic material and gradation have the following gradation:
Percent Passing by Sieve Size Weight 3/8-inch 100 No. 4 95 – 100 No. 30 30-50 No. 100 2-10 No. 200 0-5
Imported sand must have a sand equivalent not less than 28 per ASTM D 2419. 79-2.02C Class 2 Aggregate Base (Type 3) Backfill material consisting of Class 2 Aggregate Base must comply with Caltrans Standard Specifications Section 26-1.02. Recycled material such as recycled concrete or recycled asphaltic concrete is not allowed, unless approved by the Engineer. 79-2.02D ¾-Inch Crushed Rock (Type 4) Crushed rock base and gravel are defined as natural or crushed rock, free from organic matter, and meeting the gradation:
Percent Passing by Sieve Size Weight 3/8-inch 90-100 No. 50 0- 100
76 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
No. 100 0-8 No. 200 0-4
Crushed rock used within the pipe base zone, or in the pipe zone must be enveloped in geotextile fabric. Durability Index must be at least 40 under California Test Method No. 229 or ASTM D3744. Filter fabric must be Mirafi 140 N, Mirafi 700X, or equal. 79-2.02E Cement Slurry (Type 5) Cement slurry backfill materials must comply with Caltrans Standard Specification Section 19-3.02E.Slurry must be placed within one hour after initial mixing. 79-2.02F Topsoil (Type 6) Stockpiled topsoil material which has been obtained at the site by removing soil to a depth not exceeding 1 foot. Removal of the topsoil must be done after the area has been stripped of vegetation and debris. 79-2.02G Backfill Material Schedule (For Placement) Backfill materials must be provided according to the following unless otherwise shown: Pipe zone and bedding for PVC pipe must be Type 2 backfill (pipe bedding) material. Trench zone and final backfill for pipelines under paved areas must be Type 3 or 5 backfill material unless otherwise described. 79-2.02H Materials Testing All soils testing of samples submitted must be from a testing laboratory of the Engineer’s choosing and at the Owner’s expense. The Engineer may request that you supply samples for testing of any material used in the work. Particle size analysis of soils and aggregates will be performed using ASTM D422. Determination of sand equivalent value will be performed using ASTM D2419. Unified Soil Classification System: References in this Section to soil classification types and standards have the meanings and definitions indicated in ASTM D2487. The Contractor is bound by all applicable provisions of ASTM D2487 in the interpretation of soil classifications. The testing for chloride, sulfate, resistivity, and pH will comply with California Test Methods 532 and 643. 79-2.02I Refill for Foundation Stabilization Remove loose materials at trench bottoms resulting from excavation disturbances until the firm soil. If soft, loose or unstable areas are encountered, these areas should be over-excavated to a firm base or a minimum depth of 2 feet. Refill consists of materials for filling the over excavation as approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. Refill must meet the material requirements specified for pipe zone. As an alternative, crushed rock, enveloped in geotextile fabric may be utilized with authorization from the Geotechnical Engineer.
77 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
79-2.02J Concrete Thrust Blocks Cement for concrete for thrust blocks must comply with Caltrans Standard Specifications Section 90-1.02B(2). 79-2.02K Water for Compaction Water for compaction must be clean and free of oil, acids, salts, and other deleterious substances. Water must be supplied by you at no additional expense to the Owner. Water must be drawn from a hydrant meter. Make arrangements with the Engineer to obtain hydrant meter. Coordinate with the Engineer for the use of the water and provide all necessary labor and equipment to extract, transport and apply the water for compaction. You are responsible for the repair of any damage to the existing facilities which can be attributed to this operation. 79-2.03 CONSTRUCTION 79-2.03A Compaction Requirements Unless otherwise described relative compaction in pipe trenches must be as follows: 1. Pipe Base: 90% relative compaction. 2. Pipe Zone: 95% relative compaction. 3. Backfill in Trench Zone: Must be compacted under the latest City Standards. 4. Backfill in Street Zone in Paved Areas or within Limits of Aggregate Base Roadways: Must be compacted under the latest City Standards 5. Refill for Foundation Stabilization: 95% relative compaction. 6. Refill for Overexcavation: 95% relative compaction.
Where compaction tests indicate a failure to meet the specified compaction, the Engineer will take additional test every 50 feet in each direction until the extent of the failing area is identified. Rework the entire failed area until the specified compaction has been achieved at no expense to the Owner. 79-2.03B Material Replacement Remove and replace any trenching and backfilling material which does not meet the specifications, at your own expense. 79-2.03C Sloping, Sheeting, Shoring and Bracing of Trenches Trenches must have sloping, sheeting, shoring, and bracing under 29 CFR 1926, Subpart P. 79-2.03D Sidewalk Pavement and Curb Removal Cut bituminous and concrete pavements regardless of the thickness of curbs and sidewalks with a pavement saw or pavement cutter before excavating trenches. Width of the pavement cut must be at least equal to the required width of the trench at ground surface plus 6-inches past each side of the trench. Haul pavement and concrete materials from the site. Do not use excavated material for trench backfill. 79-2.03E Trench Widths Trench widths in the pipe zone must be as shown. If not shown, the maximum width must be 12 inches greater than the pipe outside diameter. Comply with 29 CFR 1926 Subpart
78 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
P. Trench width at the top of the trench will not be limited except where width of excavation would undercut adjacent structures and footings. If undercutting occurs, then the width of trench must be at least two feet between the top edge of the trench and the structure or footing. 79-2.03F Trench Excavation Excavate the trench to the lines and grades shown, with allowance for pipe thickness, sheeting and shoring if used, and for pipe base or special bedding. If the trench is excavated below the required grade, refill any part of the trench excavated below the grade with foundation stabilization material, at no additional cost to the Owner. Place the refilling material over the full width of trench in compacted layers not exceeding 6-inches deep to the established grade with allowance for the pipe base or special bedding. 79-2.03G Location of Excavated Material During trench excavation, place the excavated material only within the working area. Do not obstruct any roadways or streets. Conform to the federal, state, and local codes governing the safe loading of trenches with excavated material. All trenches must be backfilled at the end of each day’s operation. Until permanent asphalt paving can be replaced, backfill the trench to grade and maintain the subgrade and surface in a condition that is suitable to support and safely carry traffic. New asphalt paving must be placed within one (1) week after backfilling and trench, unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. 79-2.03H Exploratory Excavation Excavate and expose buried points of connection to existing utilities where shown. Preform excavation before preparation of Shop Drawings for connections, and use the data obtained in preparing the Shop Drawings. Submit data, including dates, locations excavated, and sketches to the Engineer within one week of excavation. 79-2.03I Length of Open Trench Do not exceed 100 feet of open trench in advance of pipe laying or the amount of pipe installed in one working day, whichever is less, and not more than 100 feet in the rear of pipe laying, unless authorized by the permit. At the end of each working day, the entire trench must be backfilled to match existing surface. The length of open trench which may be left unattended overnight is limited to 20 feet or one pipe length, whichever is shorter. 1. Any section of trench left unattended must meet the following requirements: 2. Isolate the trench from unauthorized access with rigid barricades and/or temporary fencing and clearly mark and delineate it with warning signs, reflective cones, and warning lights. 3. If within the street right-of-way, plate the trench using trench plates and provide sheeting shoring and bracing to support the trench plates sufficient to carry H-20 traffic loads. Applicable state, county, and municipal traffic safety rules will govern installation and maintenance of trench plates.
79 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
79-2.03J Foundation Stabilization After the required excavation has been completed, the Engineer will inspect the exposed subgrade to determine the need for any additional excavation. It is the intent that additional excavation be conducted in all areas within the influence of the pipeline where unacceptable materials exist at the exposed subgrade. Overexcavation includes the removal of all unacceptable materials that exists directly beneath the pipeline to the required trench dimensions. Backfill the trench to subgrade of pipe base with refill material for foundation stabilization. Place the foundation stabilization material over the full width of the trench and compact in layers not exceeding 6-inches deep to the required grade. Foundation stabilization work is change order work. The Owner does not pay for refill placed outside these dimensions. 79-2.03K Installing Buried Piping Backfill as described. Avoid damage to the pipe. Do not drop or dump pipe into trenches. Inspect each pipe or fitting before placing into the trench. Inspect the interior and exterior protective coatings and patch damaged areas in the field with material recommended by the protective coating manufacturer. Clean ends of pipe thoroughly and remove foreign matter and dirt from inside of pipe. Keep pipe clean during and after installation. Grade the bottom of the trench to the line and grade to which the pipe is to be laid, with allowance for pipe thickness and bedding depth. Remove hard spots that would prevent a uniform thickness of bedding. Place the specified thickness pipe base material over the full width of trench. Grade the top of the pipe base ahead of the pipe laying to provide firm, continuous, uniform support along the full length of pipe, and compact to the relative compaction specified. After laying each section of the pipe, check the grade and alignment and correct any irregularities before laying next joint. Verify pipe grade at not more than 50 feet intervals, in the presence of the Engineer. After pipe has been bedded, place pipe zone material simultaneously on both sides of the pipe, in maximum 6-inch lifts, keeping the level of backfill the same on each side. Carefully place the material around the pipe so that the pipe barrel is completely supported and that no voids or compacted areas are left beneath the pipe. Use particular care in placing material on the underside of pipe to prevent lateral movement during subsequent backfilling. Compact each lift to the relative compaction specified. Push the backfill material carefully onto the backfill previously placed in the pipe zone. Do not permit free fall of the material until at least 2 feet of cover is provided over the top of the pipe. Do not drop sharp, heavy pieces of material directly onto the pipe or the tamped material around the pipeline. Do not operate heavy equipment over the pipe until at least 3 feet of backfill has been placed and compacted over the pipe. When pipe laying is not in progress, including the noon hours, close the open ends of pipe. Do not allow trench water, animals, or foreign material to enter the pipe.
80 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Remove and dispose of all water entering the trench during the process of pipe laying. Keep the trench dry until the pipe laying and jointing are completed. 79-2.03L Backfill Compaction Compact backfill as follows: 1. Compact trench backfill to the specified relative compaction. Compact by using mechanical compaction or hand tamping. Do not use high impact hammer-type or heavy equipment except where the pipe manufacturer warrants in writing that such use will not damage the pipe. Ponding or jetting is not allowed. 2. Compact material placed within 12-inches of the outer surface of the pipe by hand tamping and/or small hand held tamping equipment. 3. Do not use any axle-driven or tractor-drawn compaction equipment within 5 feet of building walls, foundations, or other structures.
79-2.04 PAYMENT Not Used
79-3 TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT SEWER PIPELINES
79-3.01 GENERAL 79-3.01A Summary Section 79-3 includes specifications for furnishing and installing ductile iron pipe (DIP) and fittings on the bridges and polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe for temporary buried installations. All pipe and fittings must meet the technical criteria related to material and installation of DIP of PVC pipe in the City Standards. 79-3.01B Quality Assurance Not Used 79-3.01C Submittals Submittals must comply with Section 79-1.01C - Submittals. 79-3.02 MATERIALS 79-3.02A General Gravity sewer pipeline must be Ductile Iron Pipe for the exposed piping suspended from the bridge. Buried sewer pipelines must be PVC. 79-3.02B Pipe 79-3.02B(1) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe (Buried) Furnish pipe in 20-foot lengths with integral wall belled ends and elastomeric joint and solid wall. Pipe and fittings must be free of imperfections and clearly marked with name of manufacturer.
81 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Minimum pipe stiffness (F/y) at 5 percent deflection is 46 psi for all sizes when calculated under ASTM Designation D 2412. Pipe must have minimum Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR) of 35 and pipe stiffness of 46 psi. Pipe color must be green. 79-3.02B(2) Ductile Iron Pipe (DIP) - (Above Ground on Temporary and Permanent Bridge) Ductile iron pipe must be: 1. Centrifugally cast. 2. Restrained Mechanical Joints 3. Pressure Class 350 above grade. 4. Coated on exterior 5. Lined with Protecto 401 for permanent installation; cement mortar lined for temporary installation, or approved equal.
79-3.02B(3) Sewer Laterals Sewer laterals that must be repaired may be PVC SDR 35 or Schedule 40, or approved equal. 79-3.02C Joints and Fittings 79-3.02C(1) PVC PVC pipe must have a rubber ring bell and spigot joints providing a watertight seal and allowing for contraction and expansion. The bell must consist of an integral wall section stiffened with two PVC retainer rings that securely lock the solid cross section rubber ring into position. All fittings and accessories must be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier, or approved equal, and have bell and/or spigot configurations identical to that of the pipe. All fittings must be of the same material as the pipe, unless described otherwise. 79-3.02C(2) DIP Use restrained mechanical joints for exposed ductile iron pipe on bridge crossings. Restrained fittings must be EBAA Iron Megalug Series 1100, or approved equal which use a factory weld as part of the restraining system. For Permanent Bridge installation, install one earthquake joint as shown. 79-3.02D Manholes 79-3.02D(1) New Manholes (Temporary) Construct manholes under City Standard Specifications & Engineering Standards. 79-3.02D(2) Existing Manholes (Permanent) Existing manholes must be adjusted to grade as shown and under City Standard Specifications & Engineering Standards. For temporary sewer realignment during bridge construction, the existing manholes must be modified to redirect flow to and from the temporary manholes. The existing
82 SPECIAL PROVISIONS outlet in the northerly manhole and the existing inlet in the southerly manhole must be plugged during bridge construction, and the temporary plug must be removed when the pipeline over the bridge has been constructed, tested, and ready to place into service. Existing manholes may have large cast in place concrete bases. No additional payment will be made for the removal of existing bases as needed to complete the work. 79-3.02D(3) Concrete Use minor concrete for manholes. Use fifteen percent approved pozzolan replacement for manhole construction. Precast concrete manhole sections must comply with the most current version of ASTM C-478-61T or AASHTO-M170. All manholes must be watertight and the floor sloped for a smooth monolithic trowel finish. The interior finish of the manholes must be smooth. 79-3.02D(4) Mortar Use one part of Type II Portland cement and two parts of clean, hard, sharp grained particles, all passing a # 4 sieve to make mortar. Mix mortar in a machine or watertight box. Accurately measure and thoroughly mix mortar to a uniform consistency. Use mortar immediacy after mixing. Do not remix mortar that begins to harden before placement. 79-3.03 CONSTRUCTION 79-3.03A Product Handling Handle and store all pipeline and pipeline related materials as follows: 1. Manufacturer’s Recommendations - Except as otherwise authorized by the Engineer, determine and comply with manufacturer’s recommendations on product handling, storage, and protection. Rotating equipment storage must include recommended manual rotation frequency with a log demonstrating specification compliance. Contact the Engineer before performing the scheduled rotation. An Inspector may accompany the Contractor’s workers during the required rotation. 2. The Engineer may reject as non-complying such material and products that do not bear identification satisfactory to the Engineer as to manufacturer, grade, quality, and other pertinent information. 3. Provide copies of all equipment delivery tags to the Engineer on a daily basis with delivery tag indicating equipment number, item description, model number, and serial number. 4. Protect materials and equipment from the effects of weather, sunlight, extreme temperatures, etc., when exposure of the materials or equipment to the elements would cause degradation of, or damage to, the material, equipment or coating system. Progress payments for materials and equipment stored on-site will only be made when the materials or equipment are suitably stored. 5. Storage of Equipment: During the interval between the delivery of equipment to the site and installation, safely store all equipment shall be safely stored in a way
83 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
authorized by the Engineer. Equipment must be stored in an enclosed space affording protection from vandalism, weather, dust and mechanical damage and providing favorable temperature, humidity and ventilation conditions to ensure against equipment deterioration. 6. In event of damage, promptly make replacements at no additional cost to the Owner and as authorized by the Engineer. Additional time required to secure replacements will not be considered as justification for an extension in the Contract Time of Completion.
79-3.03B Installation of Pipe and Fittings Install pipe to ensure the system is watertight throughout the component parts, particularly at the pipe joint. All sewer pipeline joints above grade and crossing creek must be fully restrained. Pipe and fittings must be of the sizes described. Clean pipe interior of all foreign matter before installing and replacing any section of pipe found to be defective or damaged with new acceptable pipe. Handle pipe carefully to prevent gouging or scratching. Any length of pipe having a gouge, scratch, or other permanent indentation more than 10 percent of the wall thickness in depth will be rejected. Lay the pipe in perfect conformity to the design line and grade obtained for each pipe by measuring down from a tightly stretched line running parallel with the grade. Lay all pipes continuously uphill. Install PVC pipe and fittings for underground gravity sewers under ASTM D-2321. Lay bell and spigot pipe with the bell of the pipe upgrade. 79-3.03B(1) Mechanical Joints Clean length of ends of pipe of all oil, grit, and other foreign material by brushing with a wire brush and then painted with a soap solution made by dissolving 1/2 cup of granular soap in one gallon of water. Install mechanical joint by: 1. Placing the gland on the pipe with lip extension of the gland toward the socket or bell end of the joint. 2. Painting the rubber with the NSF approved pipe joining lubricant and place on the pipe with the thick edge toward the gland. 3. Pushing the pipe into the bell to seat the spigot and gasket into place. 4. Evenly locating the gasket around the entire joint. 5. Placing the gland against the gasket. 6. Inserting the bolts and place the nuts and tightening them with torque wrench. 7. Tightening nuts one hundred eighty degrees (180 o) apart alternately, to produce an equal pressure on all parts of the gasket. 8. Torque 90 foot-pounds.
84 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
79-3.03B(2) Flexible Couplings As described, in high-risk areas subject to earthquakes, provide a ductile iron system that delivers joint deflection and longitudinal expansion or contraction. This system must be the AMERICAN Earthquake Joint System or a system equal to or exceeding each of these performance criteria: Diameter Pipe Joint Casting Combined Expansion Dead End Deflection Joint Assembly or Thrust Deflection Deflection Contraction Resistance from Mid- Point 6" 5 degrees 3 degrees 8 degrees + 2.4 inches 102,000 lbs 8" 5 degrees 3 degrees 8 degrees + 2.4 inches 136,000 lbs
The ductile iron earthquake resistant pipe must comply with AWWA C150 (design), AWWA C151 (manufacture), AWWA C104 (lining), C111 (joints), AWWA C153 (fittings), AWWA C105 (polyethylene encasement), and AWWA C600 (installation). The mass of the zinc applied must be a minimum of 200 g/m2 of pipe surface area and the coating system must comply with ISO 8179-1. The zinc must have a top coat of approved materials. Component pieces and field touch up may require the use of a zinc-rich coating 85% zinc under ISO-8179-part 2. The Earthquake System piping will be installed in the fully open, fully closed, or mid- point position in compliance with design criteria. 79-3.03C Abandonment of Sewer Pipe Sewer facilities taken out of service must be abandoned in compliance with Standard Specifications & Engineering Standards of the City of Arroyo Grande. Provide the Engineer 48-hour notice before abandoning sewer laterals. Cut off the sewer lateral at the main and plug pipes with class 3 concrete for a distance of 12 inches into the pipe, away from the sewer main pipe. Provide a minimum five foot by five-foot excavation with shoring at the sewer main, adequate for City to remove the existing wye and replace it with new Section of pipe. Provide backfill, compaction, and surface restoration. 79-3.03D Cleaning of Pipeline All pipelines must be cleaned of all soil, dirt, rocks, and other debris and objectionable material. Clean pipelines by first pulling a tightly fitting cleaning ball or swab through the pipe. After initial cleaning, flush the interior of all piping. Upon completion of flushing, completely drain system at all low points. After the final air test has been satisfactorily completed, clean the sewer using water and a sewer cleaning ball of proper size for the pipe being cleaned. The ball must be designed and constructed for pipe cleaning work. Clean the pipe between the two lowest manholes in the system and work upstream. Sewer flush trucks that remove all debris and clean with water may be used if authorized.
85 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Before placing pipeline in service, remove all material from sand traps or debris catchers in manholes then remove the sand trap or debris catcher. 79-3.03E Testing 79-3.03E(1) Air Test After the pipeline is in place and the joints made, air test the sewer in the presence of the Engineer. Air test procedure is as follows: 1. The full length of sewer pipe will be tested at one time. 2. Plug and brace securely all outlets. 3. Introduce air into test section until internal pressure is 4.0 psi. 4. Maintain an internal test pressure by adding air as need for a minimum time of 2 minutes. 5. Measure the time required for pressure to drop from 3.5 psi to 2.5 psi. Do not introduce new air into test section during measurement.
79-3.03E(2) Television Inspection Provide the Engineer a video inspection of placed pipeline. Furnish video on flash drive properly labeled with: 1. Name of the street, 2. Manhole ID numbers 3. The date that the television inspection was completed.
Installations that do not conform to the requirements must be reconstructed. 79-3.04 PAYMENT Not Used
79-4 TESTING OF PIPELINE
79-4.01 GENERAL 79-4.01A Summary Section 79-4 includes specifications for leak testing all pipelines and related valves and fittings. Rejected work must be retested, and if still rejected must be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. 79-4.01B Quality Assurance Flow meters must record the actual volume plus or minus 2 percent. Air and vacuum test gauges must be ANSI B40.1, Grade 3A (plus or minus 0.25 percent of full-scale accuracy), with a dial range approximately twice the required test pressure. Water test gauges must be ANSI B40.1, Grade 2A (plus or minus 0.5 percent of full scale accuracy), with a dial range approximately twice the required test pressure.
86 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
79-4.01C Submittals Accuracy certification must be by an approved independent testing laboratory for flow meters and test gauges and dated no more than 90 days before actual system testing. Before testing, provide the following information: 1. All Tests: Describe precautions that will be taken to protect system equipment that might be damaged under test pressures. 2. Air Test: Describe safety devices on air test equipment, and personnel safety precautions during air tests. 3. High or Low Pressure Water Test: Describe the proposed method for disposal of water used in line testing.
79-4.02 MATERIALS Not Used 79-4.03 CONSTRUCTION Perform testing in the Engineer's presence after backfill and proper compaction of trenches. Where lines are installed under roadways, perform tests after completion of final subgrade preparation and before application of surface courses. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours before testing by submitting a test form which indicates test date, pipeline to be tested, test requirements and any additional requirements requested by the Engineer. Prepare each section for testing, using adequate bracing; protect system equipment susceptible to damage by test pressures; make provision for installation of Engineer's pressure gage in parallel with Contractor's gage, if so requested; and maintain services where required. Water for flushing and testing is available from local fire hydrants and must be coordinated with the Engineer. 79-4.03A Test Procedure After completion of the installations, test all piping and pipework as specified and furnish all material, equipment, and labor for testing the piping systems. Provide reports of testing activities. Clean piping and flush each system before pressure or leak tests. Maintain specified pressures or heads of water for the periods of time tabulated, except where indicated to be air or vacuum, and the leakage determined. Leakage must not exceed the tabulated values in AWWA C605. Test pressures must be 100 psi at the low point of the test section, unless otherwise shown. The pressure must be maintained at all times during the test by restoring it whenever it falls an amount of 5 psi. If leakage is more than allowable, repair or replace the pipeline and retest it. Do not use paints, asphalts, tars, or other type of pipe compounds to eliminate leaks.
87 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Take all necessary precautions to prevent any joints from drawing while the pipelines and their appurtenances are being tested and repair any damage to the pipes and their appurtenances, or to any other structures, resulting from or caused by these tests. After a satisfactory test, remove the testing fluid, remove test bulkheads and other test facilities, and restore the pipe coatings. 79-4.03B Test Records Provide records of each piping installation during the testing. These records must include: 1. Date of Test 2. Identification of pipeline, or pipeline section, tested or retested 3. Identification of pipeline material 4. Identification of pipe specification 5. Test fluid 6. Test pressure 7. Any Remarks: Leaks identified (type and location), types of repairs, or corrections made 8. Certification by Contractor that the leakage rate measured conformed to the specifications
79-4.03C Testing Requirements Test under AWWA and City standards and as directed. Average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per square inch (gauge) where test pressure must be minimum of 100 psi. 79-4.04 PAYMENT Not Used
80 FENCES
Add to section 80-1.03: Construct temporary gates as needed.
DIVISION IX TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES
83 RAILINGS AND BARRIERS
88 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Add to section 83-2: 83-2.10 BRIDGE VEHICLE RAIL 83-2.10A General 83-2.10A(1) Summary Section 83-2.10 includes specifications for constructing bridge vehicle rail. Bridge vehicle rail consists of curb, railing and anchorage. Concrete must comply with section 51. Reinforcement must comply with section 52. Drill and resin bonded bolts under section 51. 83-2.10A(2) Definitions Not Used 83-2.10A(3) Submittals Submit shop drawings for the bridge vehicle rail. The shop drawings must include: 1. Details for venting and pickup holes in rails and sleeves 2. Railing layout 3. Complete details for the construction of the work, including construction methods, sequence of shop and field assembly, and installation procedures
Submit 7 copies of the shop drawings. Allow 25 days for review. Upon authorization, the Engineer returns 2 copies to you for use during construction. 83-2.10A(4) Quality Assurance Not Used 83-2.10B Materials Structural tubing must comply with ASTM A500, Grade B.
Formed steel sections must be uniform in appearance.
Bolts must comply with ASTM F3125 Grade A325 Type 1.
All structural shapes, plates and bars must comply with AASHTO M270, Grade 36 (ASTM A709, Grade 36).
Galvanized under section 75-1.02B. Paint railing under section 59. Color must match color no. FS 14062 Dark Green of Fed- Std-595. Provide a test panel for approval before ordering the color. 83-2.10C Construction Railings must present a smooth, uniform appearance in their final position, conforming closely to the horizontal and vertical lines shown or ordered.
Erect railings carefully and true to line and grade. Posts must be vertical . Transverse to the profile grade, railings must be plumb within a tolerance not to exceed 0.02 foot in 10 feet. Adjacent rail elements must align with each other within 1/16 inch.
Railings must conform to the curvature by means of a series of short chords, from center- to-center of rail posts, except (1) tubing for railings described as conforming to the
89 SPECIAL PROVISIONS curvature must be shop bent to fit the curvature and (2) tubing with a horizontal curve radius less than 900 feet must be shop bent or fabricated to fit the curvature. Joints must be matchmarked.
After installing the rail, paint the exposed bolt threads with 2 applications of organic zinc- rich primer. 83-2.10D Payment The payment quantity for bridge vehicle rail is the length measured from end to end along the face of the railing, including reinforced concrete curb, terminal anchorage and galvanizing and painting.
Add to section 83-2: 83-2.11 HANDRAIL CABLE 83-2.11A General Section 83-2.11 includes specifications for constructing handrail cable. 83-2.11 Materials Structural shapes, plates, bars, and bolts must comply with section 55-1.02.
Truss rods, post tops, cable clamps, eye bolts, thimbles, and other required fittings must be commercial-quality steel, malleable iron, or wrought iron. Post tops must be watertight. The eye of the eye bolts must be either drop forged or formed with a complete penetration weld. The eye must develop 100 percent of the bolt strength.
Turnbuckles must: 1. Be commercial quality 2. Have jaw or eye ends 3. Have a minimum breaking strength of 2,700 lb 4. Be steel pipe type or drop-forged steel
Crimped sleeve clamps and stop sleeve clamps must: 1. Be nonferrous metal 2. Develop the strength of the cable 3. Be the same color as the cable
Cables must: 1. Be wire strand or rope 2. Have a minimum diameter of 1/4 inch 3. Have a minimum breaking strength of 1,800 lb 4. Be galvanized under Federal Specification RR-W-410
Galvanized under section 75-1.02B. Paint railing under section 59. Color must match color no. FS 10140 Brown Special of Fed-Std-595. Provide a test panel for approval before ordering the color.
90 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
83-2.11 Construction Tension the cables to provide taut railings between posts. Install a thimble at each cable loop. 83-2.11 Payment Not Used
DIVISION XI MATERIALS
90 CONCRETE
Add to section 90-1.01C: 90-1.01C(13) Polymer Fibers Submit fiber manufacturer's product data and instructions for use.
Submit a certificate of compliance for each shipment and type of fiber.
Replace the row for bridge deck concrete in the table in the 1st paragraph of section 90-1.02A with: Bridge deck concrete 0.032
Add to section 90-1.02: 90-1.02K Polymer Fibers Fibers must comply with ASTM D7508. Microfibers must be from 1/2 to 2 inches long. Macrofibers must be from 1 to 2-1/2 inches long.
91
This page intentionally blank.
REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS DATED 10-19-18
ORGANIZATION Revised standard specifications are under headings that correspond with the main- section headings of the Standard Specifications . A main-section heading is a heading shown in the table of contents of the Standard Specifications . A date under a main-section heading is the date of the latest revision to the section. Each revision to the Standard Specifications begins with a revision clause that describes or introduces a revision to the Standard Specifications . For a revision clause that describes a revision, the date on the right above the clause is the publication date of the revision. For a revision clause that introduces a revision, the date on the right above a revised term, phrase, clause, paragraph, or section is the publication date of the revised term, phrase, clause, paragraph, or section. For a multiple-paragraph or multiple-section revision, the date on the right above a paragraph or section is the publication date of the paragraphs or sections that follow. Any paragraph added or deleted by a revision clause does not change the paragraph numbering of the Standard Specifications for any other reference to a paragraph of the Standard Specifications .
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
DIVISION I GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 GENERAL 10-19-18 Add between the 1st and 2nd paragraphs of section 1-1.01: 10-19-18 Global revisions are changes to contract documents not specific to a section of the Standard Specifications. In each contract document at each occurrence, interpret the following terms as shown: Term Interpretation Conditions Fed -Std -595 AMS Std 595 --
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
2 BIDDING 10-19-18 Replace the 5th paragraph of section 2-1.12B(1) with: 10-19-18 You are responsible to verify at bid opening the DBE firm is certified as a DBE by the California Unified Certification Program and possesses the most specific available NAICS codes or work codes applicable to the type of work the firm will perform on the Contract.
1 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Replace section 2-1.12B(2) with: 10-19-18 2-1.12B(2) DBE Commitment Submittal Submit DBE information under section 2-1.33. Submit a copy of the quote from each DBE shown on the DBE Commitment form that describes the type and dollar amount of work shown on the form no later than 4 p.m. on the 5th day after bid opening. If the last day for submitting the quote falls on a Saturday or holiday, it may be submitted on the next business day with the same effect as if it had been submitted on the 5th day. Submit a DBE Confirmation form for each DBE shown on the DBE Commitment form to establish that it will be participating in the Contract in the type and dollar amount of work shown on the form. If a DBE is participating as a joint venture partner, submit a copy of the joint venture agreement. Failure to submit a completed DBE Confirmation form and a copy of the quote from each DBE will result in disallowance of the DBE’s participation.
Add between the 4th and 5th paragraphs of section 2-1.15B: 10-19-18 Submit a copy of the quote from each DVBE listed on the Certified DVBE Summary form that describes the type and dollar amount of work shown on the form no later than 4 p.m. on the 4th business day after bid opening.
Add between the 3rd and 4th paragraphs of section 2-1.15C(1): 10-19-18 Submit a copy of the quote from each DVBE listed on the Certified DVBE Summary form that describes the type and dollar amount of work shown on the form no later than 4 p.m. on the 4th business day after bid opening.
Add between the 1st and 2nd paragraphs of section 2-1.18C: 10-19-18 Failure to submit a completed Certified Small Business Listing for the Non–Small Business Preference form by 4 p.m. on the 2nd business day after bid opening will result in a nonresponsive bid.
Replace section 2-1.33B with: 10-19-18 2-1.33B Bid Form Submittal Schedules 2-1.33B(1) General The Bid book includes forms specific to the Contract. The deadlines for the submittal of the forms vary depending on the requirements of each Contract. Determine the requirements of the Contract and submit the forms based on the applicable schedule specified in section 2-1.33B. Bid forms and information on the form that are due after the time of bid may be submitted at the time of bid.
2 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
2-1.33B(2) Federal-Aid Contracts 2-1.33B(2)(a) General Section 2-1.33B(2) applies to a federal-aid contract. 2-1.33B(2)(b) Contracts with a DBE Goal 2-1.33B(2)(b)(i) General Section 2-1.33B(2)(b) applies if a DBE goal is shown on the Notice to Bidders . 2-1.33B(2)(b)(ii) Bid Form Submittal Submit the bid forms according to the schedule shown in the following table: Bid Form Submittal Schedule for a Federal -Aid Contract with a DBE Goal Form Submittal deadline Time of bid except for the public works Bid to the Department of Transportation contractor registration number Copy of the Bid to the Department of Transportation as submitted at the time 10 days after bid opening of bid with the public works contractor registration number Time of bid except for the public works Subcontractor List contractor registration number Copy of the Subcontractor List as submitted at the time of bid with the 10 days after bid opening public works contractor registration number Small Business Status Time of bid Opt Out of Payment Adjustments for Time of bid Price Index Fluctuations a No later than 4 p.m. on the 5th day after DBE Commitment bid opening b No later than 4 p.m. on the 5th day after DBE Confirmation bid opening b No later than 4 p.m. on the 5th day after DBE Good Faith Efforts Documentation bid opening b aSubmit only if you choose the option. bIf the last day for submitting the bid form falls on a Saturday or holiday, it may be submitted on the next business day with the same effect as if it had been submitted on the day specified.
2-1.33B(2)(b)(iii) Reserved 2-1.33B(2)(c) Contracts without a DBE Goal 2-1.33B(2)(c)(i) General Section 2-1.33B(2)(c) applies if a DBE goal is not shown on the Notice to Bidders . 2-1.33B(2)(c)(ii) Bid Form Schedule Submit the bid forms according to the schedule shown in the following table:
3 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Bid Form Submittal Schedule for a Federal -Aid Contract without a DBE Goal Form Submittal deadline Time of bid except for the public works Bid to the Department of Transportation contractor registration number Copy of the Bid to the Department of Transportation as submitted at the time of 10 days after bid opening bid with the public works contractor registration number Time of bid except for the public works Subcontractor List contractor registration number Copy of the Subcontractor List as submitted at the time of bid with the 10 days after bid opening public works contractor registration numbers Small Business Status Time of bid Opt Out of Payment Adjustments for Time of bid Price Index Fluctuations a aSubmit only if you choose the option .
2-1.33B(2)(c)(iii) Reserved 2-1.33B(2)(d)–2-1.33B(2)(h) Reserved 2-1.33B(3) Non-Federal-Aid Contracts 2-1.33B(3)(a) General Section 2-1.33B(3) applies to non-federal-aid contracts. 2-1.33B(3)(b) Contracts with a DVBE Goal 2-1.33B(3)(b)(i) General Section 2-1.33B(3)(b) applies if a DVBE goal is shown on the Notice to Bidders . 2-1.33B(3)(b)(ii) Bid Form Submittal Submit the bid forms according to the schedule shown in the following table:
4 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Bid Form Submittal Schedule for a Non -Federal -Aid Contract with a DVBE Goal Form Submittal deadline Time of bid except for the public works Bid to the Department of Transportation contractor registration number for a joint -venture contract For a joint-venture contract, copy of the Bid to the Department of Transportation as submitted at the time of bid with the 10 days after bid opening public works contractor registration number Subcontractor List Time of bid Opt Out of Payment Adjustments for Time of bid Price Index Fluctuations a No later than 4 p.m. on the 4th business Certified DVBE Summary day after bid opening California Company Preference Time of bid Request for Small Business Preference Time of bid or Non –Small Business Preference a Certified Small Business Listing for the No later than 4 p.m. on the 2nd Non –Small Business Preference a business day after bid opening aSubmit only if you choose the option or preference.
2-1.33B(3)(b)(iii) Reserved 2-1.33B(3)(c) Contracts without a DVBE Goal 2-1.33B(3)(c)(i) General Section 2-1.33B(3)(c) applies if a DVBE goal is not shown on the Notice to Bidders . 2-1.33B(3)(c)(ii) Bid Form Submittal Submit the bid forms according to the schedule shown in the following table:
5 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Bid Form Submittal Schedule for a Non -Federal -Aid Contract without a DVBE Goal Form Submittal deadline Time of bid except for the public works Bid to the Department of Transportation contractor registration number for a joint- venture contract For a joint-venture contract, copy of the Bid to the Department of Transportation as submitted at the time of bid with the 10 days after bid opening public works contractor registration number Subcontractor List Time of bid Opt Out of Payment Adjustments for Time of bid Price Index Fluctuations a California Company Preference Time of bid No later than 4 p.m. on the 4th business Certified DVBE Summary b day after bid opening Request for Small Business Preference Time of bid or Non –Small Business Preference a Certified Small Business Listing for the No later than 4 p.m. on the 2nd business Non –Small Business Preference a day after bid opening aSubmit only if you choose the option or preference. bSubmit only if you obtain DVBE participation or you are the apparent low bidder, 2nd low bidder, or 3rd low bidder and you choose to receive the specified incentive.
2-1.33B(3)(c)(iii) Reserved 2-1.33B(3)(d)–2-1.33B(3)(h) Reserved 2-1.33B(4)–2-1.33B(9) Reserved
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
5 CONTROL OF WORK 10-19-18 Replace the 6th paragraph of section 5-1.13B(2) with: 10-19-18 If the Department authorizes the termination or substitution of a listed DBE, make good faith efforts to find another DBE. The substitute DBE must (1) perform at least the same dollar amount of work as the original DBE under the Contract to the extent needed to meet the DBE goal and (2) be certified as a DBE with the most specific available NAICS or work code applicable to the type of work the DBE will perform on the Contract at the time of your request for substitution. Submit your documentation of good faith efforts within 7 days of your request for authorization of the substitution. The Department may authorize a 7-day extension of this submittal period at your request. Refer to 49 CFR 26 app A for guidance regarding evaluation of good faith efforts to meet the DBE goal.
6 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Replace the 2nd sentence in the 2nd paragraph of section 5-1.13C with: 10-19-18 The substitute must be another DVBE, unless DVBEs are not available. The substitute must perform the work originally stated.
Replace the 6th paragraph of section 5-1.13C with: 10-19-18 If a DVBE substitute is not available, requests for substitutions of a listed DVBE must include: 1. Contact with the DVBE advocate from the Department and the Department of Veteran Affairs 2. Search results from the Department of General Services’ website of available DVBEs 3. Communication with a DVBE community organization nearest the job site, if applicable 4. Documented communication with DVBEs describing the work to be performed, the percentage of the total bid, the corresponding dollar amount, and the responses to the communication
Replace section 5-1.24 with: 10-19-18 5-1.24 CONSTRUCTION SURVEYS 5-1.24A General The Department places stakes and marks under chapter 12, "Construction Surveys," of the Department's Surveys Manual . Submit your request for Department-furnished stakes: 1. Once staking area is ready for stakes 2. On a Request for Construction Staking form
After your submittal, the Department starts staking within 2 business days. Preserve stakes and marks placed by the Department. If the stakes or marks are destroyed, the Department replaces them at the Department's earliest convenience and deducts the cost.
Replace section 5-1.26 with: 10-19-18 5-1.26 RESERVED
Replace item 1.2 in the list in the 1st paragraph of section 5-1.43E(2)(b) with: 10-19-18 1.2. Have completed training by the Department
Replace item 1.2 in the list in the 1st paragraph of section 5-1.43E(3)(b) with: 10-19-18 1.2. Have completed training by the Department
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
7 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
6 CONTROL OF MATERIALS 10-19-18 Replace section 6-1.03 with: 10-19-18 6-1.03 LOCAL MATERIALS Local material must be rock, sand, gravel, earth, or mineral material other than local borrow, or selected material obtained or produced from a source in the work vicinity, specifically for use on the project. Local borrow must not be a material from an established commercial source. Upon your request, the Department tests material for quality characteristics from an untested local source. If satisfactory material from that source is used in the work, the Department does not charge you for the tests; otherwise, the Department deducts the test costs.
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
7 LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY TO THE PUBLIC 10-19-18 Replace the 1st sentence in the 5th paragraph of section 7-1.02K(6)(a) with: 10-19-18 Submit copies of your Injury and Illness Prevention Program, Code of Safe Practices, and permits required by Cal/OSHA as informational submittals.
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
8 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 10-19-18
Replace the row for Safety in the table in the 2nd paragraph of section 8-1.03 with: 10-19-18 Safety Injury and Illness Prevention Program, Code of Safe Practices, and job site posters
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
9 PAYMENT 10-19-18 Replace section 9-1.07B(5) with: 10-19-18 9-1.07B(5) Hot Mix Asphalt Containing Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement The Engineer calculates the quantity of asphalt in HMA containing RAP using the following formula: Qrap = HMARTT x Xaa
8 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
where: Xaa = Xta – [( Xrap x Xra x (Xta-100)) / (100 x (Xra – 100)) ]
and: Qrap = quantity in tons of asphalt used in HMA containing RAP HMARTT = HMA containing RAP, total tons placed Xaa = asphalt content of HMA containing RAP adjusted to exclude the asphalt content in RAP, expressed as a percentage of the total weight of HMA containing RAP Xta = total theoretical asphalt content in HMA containing RAP from the job mix formula, expressed as a percentage of the total weight of HMA containing RAP Xrap = RAP percentage in HMA containing RAP from the job mix formula, expressed as a percentage of the total dry weight of aggregate in HMA containing RAP Xra = average asphalt content of RAP from the job mix formula, expressed as percentage of total weight of RAP
Replace section 9-1.16C with: 10-19-18 9-1.16C Materials On Hand A material on hand but not incorporated into the work is eligible for a progress payment if: 1. Compliant with other Contract parts 2. Material cost exceeds either of the following: 2.1. $50,000 2.2. $25,000 if the requestor is certified as one or more of the following: 2.2.1. DVBE 2.2.2. DBE 2.2.3. Small business as certified by Department of General Services, Office of Small Business and Disabled Veteran Business Enterprise Services 3. Purchased 4. Invoice is submitted 5. Stored within the State and you submit evidence that the stored material is subject to the Department’s control 6. Protected from weather and contamination 7. Water pollution control measures are established and maintained 8. Requested on the Department-furnished form
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
DIVISION II GENERAL CONSTRUCTION 12 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL 10-19-18 Replace section 12-4.01C with: 10-19-18 Not Used
Replace the 3rd paragraph of section 12-4.02C(2)(a) with: 10-19-18 Within 5 business days after completion of the training, the Department provides LCS accounts and user IDs to your assigned, trained representatives.
9 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Replace the list in the 1st paragraph of section 12-4.02C(7)(d) with: 10-19-18 1. Installation, removal, or replacement of an overhead power line or other utility cable across the highway 2. Installation or removal of traffic control devices in areas without a standard-width shoulder 3. Transportation of large equipment across the highway 4. Access to median areas for workers or equipment
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
DIVISION III EARTHWORK AND LANDSCAPE 19 EARTHWORK 10-19-18 Replace the 1st paragraph of section 19-3.03E(1) with: 10-19-18 Place structure backfill in uniform layers. Bring backfill up uniformly on all sides of structures or drainage facilities. Backfill layer thickness must not exceed 0.67 foot before compacting. If you perform compaction by ponding and jetting, the thickness of the backfill layer must not exceed 4 feet.
Replace the 1st sentence in the 3rd paragraph of section 19-3.03E(1) with: 10-19-18 Do not place structure backfill until footings or other parts of structures or drainage facilities are authorized.
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
20 LANDSCAPE 10-19-18 Replace the 2nd paragraph of section 20-2.01A(4)(d) with: 10-19-18 In the presence of the Engineer, perform a functional test for each system that demonstrates: 1. Components of the system are functioning and integrated with one another. 2. Controller programming is complete including external weather and other system data inputs that are required to operate the system in automatic mode. 3. Watering schedule is appropriate for the plants, current weather, season, and site conditions. 4. System has complete sprinkler coverage of the site.
Perform the test for each system: 1. Before planting the plants 2. After irrigation system repair work 3. Annually during plant establishment work 4. Not more than 30 days prior to contract acceptance 5. When ordered
10 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
10-19-18 Delete section 20-2.01A(4)(e).
Replace the 1st paragraph of section 20-2.01B(5) with: 10-19-18 Pull boxes must comply with section 86-1.02C and be no. 5 or larger. Pull boxes for low voltage conductors must not have side openings.
Replace the 1st paragraph of section 20-2.01C(2) with: 10-19-18 Perform trenching and backfilling under section 87-1.03E(2).
Replace the introductory clause to the list in the 1st paragraph of section 20- 2.01C(3) with: 10-19-18 Install pull boxes under section 87-1.03C at the following locations:
Replace the 1st paragraph of section 20-2.04A(4) with: 10-19-18 Perform field tests on control and neutral conductors. Field tests must comply with the specifications in section 87-1.01D(2)(a).
Replace the 1st and 2nd paragraphs of section 20-2.04B with: 10-19-18 Control and neutral conductors must comply with the provisions for conductors and cables in section 86-1.02F. Electrical conduit and fittings must comply with section 86-1.02(B).
Replace the 1st paragraph of section 20-2.04C(4) with: 10-19-18 Splice low voltage control and neutral conductors under section 87-1.03H except do not use Method B. Tape used for splice insulation must be PVC tape.
Replace the introductory clause of the 1st paragraph of section 20-2.06B(3) with: 10-19-18 The irrigation controller enclosure cabinet must comply with section 86-1.02Q and must:
Add to the beginning of section 20-2.06C: 10-19-18 Install the irrigation controller enclosure cabinet under 87-1.03Q(1).
11 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Replace the table in the 3rd paragraph of section 20-3.01B(2)(a) with: 10-19-18 Plant group Description Container designation size (cu in) A No. 1 container 152 –251 B No. 5 container 785 –1242 C Balled and burlapped -- E Bulb -- F In flats -- H Cutting -- I Pot -- K 24 -inch box 5775 –6861 M Liner a -- O Acorn -- P Plugs a, b -- S Seedling c -- U No. 15 container 2768 –3696 Z Palm Tree -- aDo not use containers made of biodegradable material. bGrown in individual container cells. cBare root.
Replace the introductory clause of the 1st paragraph of section 20-3.01B(4)(b) with: 10-19-18 Slow-release fertilizer must be a pelleted or granular form with a nutrient release over a 3 to 4 month period and be within the chemical analysis ranges shown in the following table:
Replace section 20-3.01C(3) with: 10-19-18 Water plants as needed to keep the plants in a healthy growing condition.
Replace the 1st paragraph of section 20-4.03G with: 10-19-18 Operate the electric automatic irrigation systems, including external weather and other system data inputs required to operate the system in automatic mode, unless otherwise authorized.
10-19-18 Delete the 3rd paragraph of section 20-4.03G.
12 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Add to the end of section 20-5.03B(3): 10-19-18 If you are ordered to remove existing concrete below ground within the limits of the rock blanket, saw cut the concrete before removal. This work is change order work.
Replace item 1 in the list in the 1st paragraph of section 20-10.03A(3) with: 10-19-18 1. Transplanting trees. The work plan must include methods of lifting, transporting, storing, planting, guying, watering and maintaining each tree to be transplanted. Include the root ball size, method of root ball containment, and a maintenance program for each tree.
Add to the end of section 20-10.03C(3): 10-19-18 Water transplanted trees immediately after planting and as needed to keep it in a healthy growing condition until contract acceptance.
Add to the end of section 20-10.03C(4): 10-19-18 Water existing plants as needed to keep them in a healthy growing condition until contract acceptance.
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
DIVISION V SURFACINGS AND PAVEMENTS 40 CONCRETE PAVEMENT 10-19-18 Replace the 2nd paragraph of section 40-1.01C(9) with: 10-19-18 Submit your coefficient of thermal expansion test data at: https://dime.dot.ca.gov/
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
DIVISION VI STRUCTURES 46 GROUND ANCHORS AND SOIL NAILS 10-19-18 Add to the list in the 1st paragraph of section 46-1.01C(3): 10-19-18 12. Digital photo logs of extracted test soil nails
13 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Replace the 2nd paragraph of section 46-1.01C(3) with: 10-19-18 Submit the test data in electronic and hard copy format within 1 business day after testing is complete. Upon completion of the wall, send an email of the soil nail test results as a tabulated spreadsheet to the Engineer and [email protected]. Include the contract number and Department's structure number of the wall in the subject line of the email.
Replace Not Used in section 46-1.01D(1) with: 10-19-18 Welding must comply with AWS D1.1.
Add to the end of section 46-1.03A: 10-19-18 Shotcrete must comply with section 53-2.
10-19-18 Delete the 3rd paragraph of section 46-1.03B.
Replace the 1st sentence in the 2nd paragraph of section 46-2.02B with: 10-19-18 The anchorage enclosure and the steel tube and bearing plate of the anchorage assembly must be galvanized steel and comply with sections 55-1.02D(1) and 55-1.02E(1).
Replace item 9 in the list in the 3rd paragraph of section 46-2.02D with: 10-19-18 9. Have the physical properties shown in Table 4.1 of Recommendations for Prestressed Rock and Soil Anchors published by the Post-Tensioning Institute
Replace the 4th paragraph of section 46-2.03D with: 10-19-18 Immediately after lock-off, perform a lift-off test to verify that the lock-off load has been attained. The lift-off load must be within 10 percent of the specified lock-off load. If necessary adjust the shim thickness to achieve the lock-off load. If the load is not within 10 percent of the specified lock-off load, the anchorage must be reset and another lift-off load reading must be made. Repeat the process until the specified lock-off load is obtained.
Replace the 2nd paragraph of section 46-3.01A with: 10-19-18 A soil nail consists of a solid steel bar with an anchorage assembly that is placed in a drilled hole and then grouted.
Replace section 46-3.01D(2)(b)(ii)(1) with: 10-19-18 46-3.01D(2)(b)(ii)(1) General Determine the test load using the following equation:
14 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
T = Lb x Qb
where: T = test load, pounds Lb = soil nail bonded length, feet, 10 feet minimum Qb = test load per unit length of bond, pounds/foot
Replace section 46-3.02A with: 10-19-18 46-3.02A General Each production soil nail must be either a solid steel bar encapsulated full length in a grouted corrugated plastic sheathing or an epoxy-coated prefabricated solid steel bar partially encapsulated in a grouted corrugated plastic sheathing as shown. Epoxy-coated prefabricated steel bars must comply with the specifications for epoxy- coated prefabricated reinforcement in section 52-2.03, except the average coating thickness after curing must be from 10 to 15 mils. Solid steel bar for test soil nails is not required to be epoxy coated or encapsulated in grouted plastic sheathing.
Replace the heading of section 46-3.02B with: 10-19-18 Anchorage Assemblies
Replace section 46-3.02C with: 10-19-18 46-3.02C Solid Steel Bars Solid steel bars must be either: 1. Threaded bars with spirally-deformed, ribbed threads continuous along the entire length of the bar. 2. Deformed reinforcing bars with at least a 6-inch length of thread cut into the bar on the anchorage end. Use coarse threading and the next larger reinforcing bar size.
Solid steel bars must comply with ASTM A615/A615M or A706/A706M, Grade 60 or ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 75. Splicing must be authorized. Epoxy coating at the anchorage end of epoxy-coated bars may be omitted for a maximum of 6 inches. Metal surfaces of assembled splices of epoxy-coated bars must be epoxy coated. Choose the solid steel bar size and grade for test soil nails. Test soil nail bars must not be smaller than the production soil nails they represent.
Replace the 1st paragraph of section 46-3.03A with: 10-19-18 Determine the drilled-hole diameter and installation method required to achieve the test load per unit length of bond values shown.
15 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Replace the introductory clause to the list in the 3rd paragraph of section 46- 3.03B with: 10-19-18 Install verification test soil nails by any of the following means:
Replace the 7th and 8th paragraphs of section 46-3.03B with: 10-19-18 Remove each verification and proof test soil nail to 6 inches behind the front face of the shotcrete after testing is complete. Fill the voids with grout. If ordered, extract verification and proof test soil nails selected by the Engineer. Fill the voids with grout. Photograph the extracted test nails in 5-foot section intervals.
Replace the 3rd paragraph of section 46-3.03C with: 10-19-18 Splice the solid steel bar only where shown on the authorized shop drawings or at the end of a soil nail that is ordered to be lengthened.
Replace the 1st sentence in the 7th paragraph of section 46-3.03C with: 10-19-18 Hand tighten the nut on the end of the production soil nail bar before shotcrete hardening begins. Ensure the bearing plate is fully seated on the shotcrete.
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
48 TEMPORARY STRUCTURES 10-19-18 Add to the end of section 48-1.01: 10-19-18 Falsework, temporary supports and jacking support systems must comply with any additional requirements of the railroad company involved.
Add to section 48-2.01B: 10-19-18 Falsework release: Lowering of falsework to the point that it no longer supports the loads imposed by the permanent structure, or any element, that the falsework was designed to support during construction. Falsework removal: Releasing, lowering, and disposing of the falsework.
10-19-18 Delete the 7th paragraph of section 48-2.01C(2).
Replace the 4th paragraph of section 48-2.02B(2) with: 10-19-18 The assumed horizontal load the falsework bracing system must resist must be the sum of the actual horizontal loads due to equipment, construction sequence or other causes, and a wind loading. The assumed horizontal load in any direction must be at least 2 percent of the total dead load.
16 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Replace the table in the 2nd paragraph of section 48-2.02B(3)(b) with: 10-19-18 Quality characteristic Requirement Compression perpendicular to the grain 450 (psi) 480,000/( L/d)²; Compression parallel to the grain (psi) 1,600 maximum 1,800 psi; 1,500 psi maximum for members Flexural stress with a nominal depth of 8 inches or less. Horizontal shear (psi) 140 Axial tension (psi) 1,200 Deflection due to concrete loading only 1/240 of span length Modulus of elasticity (E) (psi) 1.6 x 10 6 Timber piles (tons) 45 NOTES: L = unsupported length, inches d = least dimension of a square or rectangular column or the width of a square of equivalent cross- sectional area for round columns, inches
Replace the table in the 3rd paragraph of section 48-2.02B(3)(c) with: 10-19-18 Quality characteristic Requirement Compression, flexural (psi) 12,000,000 /[ (L x d)/( b x t)] a Deflection due to concrete loading only 1/240 of the span Modulus of elasticity (E) (psi) 30 x 10 6 NOTES: L = unsupported length, inches d = least dimension of rectangular columns or the width of a square of equivalent cross-sectional area for round columns, or the depth of beams, inches b = width of the compression flange, inches t = thickness of the compression flange, inches Fy = specified minimum yield stress in psi aNot to exceed (1) 22,000 psi for unidentified steel, (2) 22,000 psi for steel complying with ASTM A36/A36M, or (3) 0.6 Fy for other identified steel
Add to section 48-2.02: 10-19-18 48-2.02C Falsework Lighting 48-2.02C(1) General Reserved 48-2.02C(2) Pavement Illumination Pavement illumination fixture must: 1. Have commercial-type flood lamp holder with protective covers. 2. Be fully adjustable with brackets and locking screws.
17 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
3. Mount directly to a standard metal junction box. 4. Have a medium-base PAR-38 quartz-halogen flood lamp or an equivalent energy efficient alternative emitting 1,700 to 2,200 lumens with a correlated color temperature of 3,000 kelvin or less.
48-2.02C(3) Portal Illumination Portal illumination includes plywood sheet clearance guides 4 feet wide by 8 feet high and fixtures with a PAR reflector floodlamp or equivalent energy efficient alternatives emitting 1,500 to 1,700 lumens with a correlated color temperature of 3,000 kelvin or less. 48-2.02C(4) Pedestrian Walkway Illumination Pedestrian walkway illumination fixtures must be the flush mounted type equipped with a damage-resistant, clear, polycarbonate diffuser lens, an overhead protection shield, and a standard incandescent lamp or equivalent energy efficient alternatives emitting 1,500 to 2,000 lumens with a correlated color temperature of 3,000 kelvin or less.
Add to section 48-2.03A: 10-19-18 Traffic must be detoured, from the lanes over which falsework is being erected, released, or removed.
Replace the 3rd paragraph of section 48-2.03B with: 10-19-18 Falsework piles must be driven and assessed under section 49. The actual nominal pile resistance must be at least twice the falsework pile design load. For pile acceptance, the required number of hammer blows in the last foot of driving is determined using the formula in 49-2.01A(4)(c).
Add between the 2nd and 3rd paragraphs of section 48-2.03C: 10-19-18 Falsework erection includes adjustments or removal of components that contribute to the horizontal stability of the falsework system.
Replace section 48-2.03D with: 10-19-18 48-2.03D Removal Remove falsework such that portions of falsework not yet removed remain stable at all times. Falsework release includes blowing sand from sand jacks, turning screws on screw jacks, and removing wedges. Except for concrete above the deck, do not release falsework supporting any span of a: 1. Simple span bridge before 10 days after the last concrete has been placed 2. Continuous or rigid frame bridge before 10 days after the last concrete has been placed: 2.1. In that span 2.2. In adjacent portions of each adjoining span for a length equal to one-half of the span where falsework is to be released 3. Simple span, continuous, or rigid frame bridge until the supported concrete has attained a compressive strength of 2,880 psi or 80 percent of the specified strength, whichever is greater
18 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Do not release falsework for prestressed portions of structures until prestressing steel has been tensioned. Do not release falsework supporting any span of a continuous or rigid frame bridge until all required prestressing is complete (1) in that span and (2) in adjacent portions of each adjoining span for a length equal to at least one half of the span where falsework is to be released. Release falsework supporting spans of CIP girders, slab bridges, or culverts before constructing or installing railings or barriers on the spans unless authorized. Release falsework for arch bridges uniformly and gradually. Start at the crown and work toward the springing. Release falsework for adjacent arch spans concurrently. Do not release falsework that supports overhangs, deck slabs between girders, or girder stems that slope 45 degrees or more from vertical before 7 days after deck concrete has been placed. You may release falsework supporting the sides of girder stems that slope less than 45 degrees from vertical before placing deck concrete if you install lateral supports. Lateral supports must be: 1. Designed to resist rotational forces on the girder stem, including forces due to concrete deck placement 2. Installed immediately after each form panel is removed 3. Installed before releasing supports for the adjacent form panel
Do not release falsework for bent caps supporting steel or PC concrete girders before 7 days after placing bent cap concrete. Release falsework for structural members subject to bending as specified for simple span bridges. Do not release falsework for box culverts and other structures with decks lower than the roadway pavement and span lengths of 14 feet or less until the last placed concrete has attained a compressive strength of 1,600 psi. Curing of the concrete must not be interrupted. Falsework release for other box culverts must comply with the specifications for the release of bridge falsework. Do not release falsework for arch culverts sooner than 40 hours after concrete has been placed. Remove falsework piling to at least 2 feet below the original ground or streambed. Remove falsework piling driven within ditch or channel excavation limits to at least 2 feet below the bottom and side slopes of the excavated areas. Dispose of falsework materials and work debris. Falsework removal systems employing methods of holding falsework by winches, hydraulic jacks with prestressing steel, HS rods, or cranes must also be supported by an independent support system when the falsework removal system is not actively lowering the falsework at vehicular, pedestrian, or railroad traffic openings. Bridge deck openings used to facilitate falsework removal activities must be formed with a 6-inch maximum diameter opening. The opening must be located away from the wheel paths. Clean and roughen openings made in the bridge deck. Fill the deck openings with rapid setting concrete complying with section 60-3.02B(2).
19 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Bridge soffit openings used to facilitate falsework removal activities must be formed with a 5-inch maximum diameter. Anchor 10-inch-square aluminum or galvanized steel wire, 1/4-inch-mesh hardware cloth with a 0.025- inch minimum wire diameter firmly to the inside of the soffit openings. Construct a 1/2-inch drip groove to the outside of soffit openings. Falsework removal over roadways with a vertical traffic opening of less than 20 feet must start within 14 days after the falsework is eligible to be released and must be completed within 45 days after it is eligible to be released.
Replace section 48-2.03E with: 10-19-18 48-2.03E Falsework Lighting 48-2.03E(1) General Provide lighting to illuminate the pavement, portals, and pedestrian walkways at or under openings in the falsework required for traffic. Install lighting for pedestrian walkway illumination at all pedestrian openings through or under the falsework. Design falsework lighting such that required maintenance can be performed with a minimum of inconvenience to traffic. Closing of traffic lanes for routine maintenance is not allowed on roadways with posted speed limits greater than 25 mph. During the hours of darkness, illuminate: 1. Falsework portals 2. Pavement under falsework with portals less than 150 feet apart
Use photoelectric switches to control falsework lighting systems. Pavement under falsework with portals 150 feet or more apart and all pedestrian openings through falsework must be illuminated 24 hours per day. Aim the lighting fixtures to avoid glare to motorists. Fasten a Type NMC cable with no. 12 minimum conductors with ground wire to the supporting structure at sufficient intervals to adequately support the cable and within 12 inches from every box or fitting. Use 1/2-inch or larger Type 1 conduit for conductors within 8 feet of ground. Provide a maximum 20 A fuse for each branch circuit for illumination systems at each bridge location. Arrange with the service utility to complete service connections for falsework lighting. You pay for energy, line extension, service, and service hookup costs. 48-2.03E(2) Pavement Illumination Install a continuous row of fixtures beneath falsework structure with the end fixtures not further than 10 feet inside portal faces. Energize the fixtures immediately after the members supporting them have been erected. Place the fixtures along the sides of the opening not more than 4 feet behind or 2 feet in front of the roadway face of the temporary railing. Mount the fixtures from 12 to 16 feet above the roadway surface without obstructing the light pattern on the pavement. 48-2.03E(3) Portal Illumination Provide falsework portal illumination on the side facing traffic. Mount fixtures on the structure directly over each vertical support adjacent to the traveled way, as needed, to
20 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS uniformly illuminate the exterior falsework beam, the clearance guides, and the overhead clearance sign. Each fixture must be supported approximately 16 feet above the pavement and 6 feet in front of the portal face. Portal illumination clearance guides must: 1. Be fastened vertically, facing traffic, with the bottom of the panel from 3 to 4 feet above the roadway 2. Have the center of the panel located approximately 3 feet horizontally behind the roadway face of the railing 3. Be freshly painted panels for each installation with not less than 2 applications of flat white paint.
Paint testing of painted panels not required. Portal lighting and clearance guides must be installed on the day the vertical members are erected. If ordered, repaint the designated areas to improve the general appearance of the painted surfaces. Repainting is change order work. 48-2.03E(4) Pedestrian Walkway Illumination Provide pedestrian walkway illumination immediately after the overhead protection shield is erected. Flush mount the fixtures in the overhead protection shield and center them over the passageway at intervals of not more than 15 feet with the end fixtures not more than 7 feet inside the end of the pedestrian openings.
10-19-18 Delete the 4th paragraph of section 48-3.01C(2).
Add between the 9th and 10th paragraphs of section 48-3.02B: 10-19-18 For bridge removal, the temporary support system must resist the design loads and forces shown. As a minimum, the horizontal load to be resisted in any direction for temporary support shoring and temporary bracing must be (1) the sum of actual horizontal loads due to equipment, construction sequence, or other causes plus an allowance for wind and (2) not less than 5 percent of the total dead load of the structure being removed.
10-19-18 Delete the 2nd and 3rd paragraphs of section 48-4.01A.
Replace section 48-4.01C with: 10-19-18 48-4.01C Submittals Submit shop drawings for temporary decking. Include the following: 1. Description, location, and value of all loads if temporary decking is not shown 2. Details of the connection between the temporary decking and the existing or new structure if temporary decking is not shown
21 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
3. Storage location of equipment and materials that allows for 1 shift of work and placement of temporary decking within the time allowed 4. Construction sequence and schedule details 5. Cure time for concrete to be placed under a steel plate system 6. Details for removing temporary decking and restoring the existing structure
If temporary decking is not shown, shop drawings must be signed by an engineer who is registered as a civil engineer in the State.
Replace section 48-4.01D with: 10-19-18 48-4.01D Quality Assurance If temporary decking is not shown, the temporary decking design must comply with: 1. The unfactored permit loads, braking force, and HL93 loads except lane load from AASHTO LRFD Bridge Specifications with California Amendments. 2. Section 48-2.02B(3) 3. Live load deflection must not exceed 1/300 of the temporary decking span for the design load. 4. Temporary decking must have a uniform surface with a coefficient of friction of at least 0.35 when measured under California Test 342. 5. Steel plate systems must be mechanically connected to the existing structure and adjacent approaches. If a steel plate spans a joint, the mechanical connection must accommodate at least 50 percent of the movement rating shown for that joint. 6. Must not overstress, induce permanent forces into, or produce cracking in the existing structure.
Replace section 48-4.03 with: 10-19-18 48-4.03 CONSTRUCTION Temporary decking must consist of one of the following: 1. Steel plate system that spans the incomplete work. 2. Falsework with an asphalt concrete surface that spans the incomplete work. Do not use falsework with an asphalt concrete surface to cover deck concrete that has not cured or to cover partially installed joint materials.
Construct temporary decking under the specifications for falsework in section 48-2 except the first paragraph of section 48-2.03D does not apply. If there is an elevation difference of more than 1/2 inch between the temporary decking and the adjacent deck, install temporary tapers up to and away from the temporary decking. Construct tapers under section 7-1.03. If the temporary decking does not extend the entire width of the roadway, taper the sides of the temporary decking at a 12:1 (horizontal: vertical) ratio. Material for temporary tapers must comply with section 60-3.02B(2) or 60-3.04B(2). Cure temporary tapers at least 3 hours before allowing traffic on the temporary decking.
22 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
If unanticipated displacements, cracking, or other damage occurs to the existing structure or to any new components installed in or adjacent to the deck, stop work on the deck and perform corrective measures. Edges of steel plate systems must be in full contact with the existing deck and the adjacent approach slab. If used, shims must be securely attached to the plate. For falsework with an asphalt concrete cover, asphalt concrete must be at least 3 inches thick and compacted in place. Do not allow traffic on deck concrete until it has attained the design compressive strength shown. When temporary decking is no longer needed, remove temporary decking materials and connections from the existing structure as soon as possible. Remove modifications to the existing structure except where permanent alterations are shown.
10-19-18 Delete the 4th paragraph of section 48-5.01C.
Replace the 1st paragraph of section 48-5.02B with: 10-19-18 The jacking support system must resist the structure dead load and lateral design forces shown, plus any additional loads from jacking equipment and activities. As a minimum, the horizontal load to be resisted in any direction for the jacking support system and temporary bracing must be (1) the sum of actual horizontal loads due to equipment, construction sequence, or other causes plus an allowance for wind as specified in Section 48-2.02B(2) and (2) not less than 2 percent of the total dead load of the structure being jacked. You must determine soil bearing values for support footings. If the jacking support stiffness exceeds the described minimum stiffness, increase the lateral design forces to be compatible with the jacking support lateral stiffness.
Replace the 1st paragraph of section 48-5.03 with: 10-19-18 Construct the jacking support system under the specifications for falsework in section 48- 2.03.
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
49 PILING 10-19-18 Replace the 6th paragraph of section 49-1.01D(4) with: 10-19-18 Except for load test piles and anchor piles, drive the 1st production pile in the control zone. Do not install any additional production piles until dynamic monitoring has been performed, and the Engineer provides you with the bearing acceptance criteria curves for any piles represented by the dynamically monitored piles.
23 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Replace the 3rd paragraph of section 49-2.01D with: 10-19-18 The payment quantity for furnish piling is the length measured along the longest side of the pile from the specified tip elevation shown to the plane of pile cutoff, except for dynamically monitored piles. For dynamically monitored piles, the payment quantity for furnish piling includes an additional length of 2 times the largest cross-sectional dimension of the pile plus 2 feet.
Add to the end of section 49-2.02A(2): 10-19-18 longitudinal weld length: The length of a continuous longitudinal weld. circumferential weld length: The length of a continuous weld around the circumference of the pipe pile. spiral weld length: The length of one full 360-degree spiral weld revolution around the circumference of the pipe pile.
Replace the 3rd paragraph of section 49-2.02A(4)(b)(iii)(B) with: 10-19-18 For welding performed under AWS D1.1: 1. Perform NDT on 25 percent of each longitudinal, circumferential, or spiral weld length using RT or UT. 2. If repairs are required in a portion of the tested weld: 2.1. Perform additional NDT on untested areas on each end of the initial portion tested. The length of additional NDT on each end must equal 10 percent of the weld length. If it is not possible to perform 10 percent of the weld length on one end, perform the remaining percentage on the other end. 2.2. After this additional 20 percent of NDT is performed, determine and record the total cumulative repair lengths from all NDT for each weld length. If the cumulative weld repair length is equal to or more than 10 percent of the weld length, then perform NDT on the entire weld length. 2.3. Perform NDT on the repaired portion plus 2 inches on each end of the repaired weld excavation.
Replace the 2nd paragraph of section 49-2.02A(4)(b)(iii)(C) with: 10-19-18 Perform NDT on 25 percent of the weld length performed by each welder, using RT or UT at locations selected by the Engineer. The Engineer may select several locations on a given splice. The cover pass must be ground smooth at locations to be tested.
Replace the 4th paragraph of section 49-2.02A(4)(b)(iii)(C) with: 10-19-18 If repairs are required in a portion of the tested weld:
24 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
1. Perform additional NDT on untested areas on each end of the initial portion tested. The length of additional NDT on each end must equal 10 percent of the pipe's outside circumference. If it is not possible to perform 10 percent of the weld length on one end, perform the remaining percentage on the other end. 2. After this additional 20 percent of NDT is performed, determine and record the total cumulative repair lengths from all NDT for each weld length. If the cumulative weld repair length is equal to or more than 10 percent of the pipe's outside circumference, then perform NDT on the entire weld length. 3. Perform NDT on the repaired portion plus 2 inches on each end of the repaired weld excavation.
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
51 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 10-19-18 Add to section 51-1.03: 10-19-18 51-1.03J Temporary Decking If you are unable to complete bridge reconstruction activities before the bridge is to be opened to traffic, furnish and maintain temporary decking under section 48-4 until that portion of the work is complete.
Add between the 5th and 6th paragraphs of section 51-4.03B: 10-19-18 Erect steel or PC girders onto the supporting concrete, such as bent caps or abutments, after the concrete attains a compressive strength of 2,880 psi or 80 percent of the specified strength, whichever is greater.
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
53 SHOTCRETE 10-19-18 Replace the 1st sentence of section 53-2.01A with: 10-19-18 Section 53-2 includes specifications for placing structural shotcrete using the wet-mix process.
Add between the 1st and 2nd paragraphs of section 53-2.01D(4)(b): 10-19-18 For soil nail walls, do not core through waler bars.
Add to the beginning of section 53-2.02: 10-19-18 Shotcrete must comply with the specifications for concrete in section 90-1.
25 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
57 WOOD AND PLASTIC LUMBER STRUCTURES 10-19-18 Replace the table in the 4th paragraph of section 57-3.02C with: 10-19-18 Quality characteristic Test method Requirement Density of concrete core ASTM D792 1,762 (kg/m 3, min) 28-day compressive strength ASTM C579 5,000 of concrete core (psi, min) Structural strength of shell: Tensile strength, tensile ASTM D638 Less than 10 after UV modulus (percent loss) deterioration test Flexural strength, flexural modulus (percent loss) ASTM D790 specified for plastic lumber Dry film thickness of coating -- 15 (mils, min) Color change of coating ASTM D4587, No visible color Test Cycle 2 change when tested for 800 hours Initial adhesion of coating (psi, ASTM D4541, 150 min) Test Method D, E, or F and Protocol 2 Decrease in initial adhesion of ASTM D4541, No more than 10 coating, decrease (percent) Test Method following 2 exposure D, E, or F and cycles Protocol 2 ASTM D1183, Test Condition Da aUse a low temperature phase at 4 ± 5 °F and high temperature phase at 140 ± 5 °F.
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
59 STRUCTURAL STEEL COATINGS 10-19-18 Replace the 2nd paragraph in section 59-1.01D with: 10-19-18 Measure coating adhesion strength with a self-aligning adhesion tester under ASTM D4541, Test Method D, E, or F and Protocol 2.
26 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Replace the 2nd paragraph of section 59-1.02C with: 10-19-18 Coatings selected for use must comply with the volatile organic compound concentration limits specified for the air quality district where the coating is applied. The undercoats and finish or final coats selected for use must be compatible with each other.
Add after the paragraph of section 59-2.01A(3)(a): 10-19-18 If requested by the Engineer, submit documentation from the coating manufacturer verifying the compatibility of the undercoats and finish or final coats selected for use.
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
60 EXISTING STRUCTURES 10-19-18 Replace Reserved in section 60-2.02B(1) with: 10-19-18 Design criteria for temporary support shoring and temporary bracing must comply with section 48-3.02B.
10-19-18 Delete section 60-2.02B(2).
Add to section 60-3.01A: 10-19-18 If you are unable to complete bridge reconstruction activities before the bridge is to be opened to traffic, furnish and maintain temporary decking under section 48-4 until that portion of the work is complete.
Replace the 3rd and 4th paragraphs of section 60-3.02C(3) with: 10-19-18 Remove asphalt concrete surfacing and membrane seal by cold milling. Do not remove more than 1/2 inch of the existing concrete slab during cold-milling activities.
Add to section 60-3.02C(3): 10-19-18 Where a portion of the asphalt concrete surfacing is to remain, saw cut a 2-inch-deep true line along the edge to remain in place before removing asphalt concrete. Remove the asphalt concrete without damaging the surfacing to remain in place.
Replace the 9th paragraph of section 60-3.04B(3)(c) with: 10-19-18 Protect the overlay from moisture and do not allow traffic or equipment on the overlay (1) for a minimum of 4 hours cure time after final finishing and (2) until the rebound test results for the final finish show an average reading of at least 28 when tested under ASTM C805. The cure time may be extended if ordered. The rebound test may not be used to reduce the 4-hour cure time of the overlay.
27 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Replace item 2 in the list in the 1st paragraph of section 60-4.06A(4) with: 10-19-18 2. 2nd sentence of clause 3.13.2 and the 1st sentence of clause 3.13.3 of AWS D1.5 do not apply.
Replace the 10th paragraph of section 60-4.09B(2)(a) with: 10-19-18 Steel parts must comply with ASTM A36/A36M or A576, Grade 1030 and must not be rimmed or capped steel.
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
DIVISION VII DRAINAGE FACILITIES 66 CORRUGATED METAL PIPE 10-19-18 Replace the 1st paragraph in section 66-1.02D with: 10-19-18 Coupling bands for corrugated metal pipe must comply with either section 66-1.02D or section 61-2.01D(2)(b).
Replace the 6th paragraph in section 66-1.02D with: 10-19-18 Joints for siphons and joints for pipes shown as watertight must be watertight under pressure and all conditions of expansion, contraction, and settlement, and must comply with section 61-2.01D(2)(a) for watertightness.
Replace the 4th paragraph of section 66-2.03 with: 10-19-18 Place cement treated structure backfill for slotted corrugated steel pipe as shown and under section 19-3.02F(3) for soil cement beddings. Cover the completed cement treated structure backfill with a curing seal of asphaltic emulsion, Grade SS1 or CSS1.
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
DIVISION VIII MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION 80 FENCES 10-19-18 Replace the 2nd paragraph of section 80-3.02B with: 10-19-18 Posts and braces must comply with the strength requirements in ASTM F1043 for one of the following: 1. Group IA, regular grade, for round pipes 2. Group IC, 50,000 psi yield, for round pipes 3. Group II-L for roll-formed posts and braces
28 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Replace the list in section 80-4.02B(1)(b) with: 10-19-18 1. Comply with ASTM A1064 and have a Class 1 zinc coating complying with ASTM A641 2. Be welded or woven galvanized steel wire fabric 3. Be made of at least 16-gauge wire 4. Be 36 inches wide
Replace the paragraph in section 80-4.02B(2) with: 10-19-18 The materials for a temporary desert tortoise fence must comply with section 80-4.02B(1).
Replace the 2nd sentence in the 1st paragraph of section 80-4.02C(2) with: 10-19-18 Embed the posts at maximum 10-foot intervals into the ground.
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
DIVISION IX TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES 82 SIGNS AND MARKERS 10-19-18 Replace section 82-5.01A with: 10-19-18 Section 82-5 includes specifications for fabricating and installing markers, including milepost markers.
Replace the 2nd paragraph in section 82-5.02E with: 10-19-18 A target plate for milepost marker or Type L-1 (CA) or Type L-2 (CA) object marker installed on a metal post must be manufactured from an aluminum sheet or zinc-coated steel sheet.
Replace section 82-5.02H with: 10-19-18 82-5.02H Milepost Markers Letters and numerals on a milepost marker must be made with opaque black paint or film. The paint and film must have an equivalent outdoor weatherability as the retroreflective sheeting specified in ASTM D4956. Nonreflective, opaque, black film must be vinyl or acrylic material. Film for letters and numerals must be computer cut and have pressure-sensitive adhesive.
Replace the 5th paragraph of section 82-5.03 with: 10-19-18 Use stencils to paint letters and numerals on milepost markers.
29 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
84 MARKINGS 10-19-18 Replace section 84-2 with: 10-19-18 84-2 TRAFFIC STRIPES AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS 84-2.01 GENERAL 84-2.01A Summary Section 84-2 includes specifications for applying traffic stripes and pavement markings. Traffic stripes and pavement markings must comply with ASTM D6628 for daytime and nighttime color. Retroreflectivity must be measured under ASTM E1710 and the sampling protocol specified in ASTM D7585. 84-2.01B Definitions pavement marking : Transverse marking such as (1) a limit line, (2) a stop line, or (3) a word, symbol, shoulder, parking stall, or railroad-grade-crossing marking. traffic stripe : Longitudinal centerline or lane line used for separating traffic lanes in the same direction of travel or in the opposing direction of travel or a longitudinal edge line marking the edge of the traveled way or the edge of a lane at a gore area separating traffic at an exit or entrance ramp. A traffic stripe is shown as a traffic line. 84-2.01C Submittals For each lot or batch of traffic stripe material, primer, and glass beads, submit: 1. Certificate of compliance, including the material name, lot or batch number, and manufacture date 2. METS notification letter stating that the material is authorized for use, except for thermoplastic and primer 3. SDS 4. Manufacturer’s Instructions
For each lot or batch of thermoplastic, submit a manufacturer's certificate of compliance and the following test results from the California Test 423: 1. Brookfield Thermosel viscosity 2. Hardness 3. Yellowness index, white only 4. Daytime luminance factor 5. Yellow color, yellow only 6. Glass bead content 7. Binder content
The date of the test must be within 1 year of use. Submit test results for each lot of beads specifying the EPA test methods used and tracing the lot to the specific test sample. The testing for lead and arsenic content must be performed by an independent testing laboratory.
30 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Submit the thermoplastic test stripe to the Engineer. Submit the retroreflectivity test result within 5 days of testing the traffic stripes and pavement markings. The data must include the retroreflectivity, time, date, and GPS coordinates for each measurement. 84-2.01D Quality Assurance 84-2.01D(1) General Reserved 84-2.01D(2) Quality Control Before starting permanent application of methyl methacrylate and two component paint traffic stripes and pavement markings, apply a test stripe on roofing felt or other suitable material in the presence of the Engineer. The test stripe section must be at least 50 feet in length. Upon request, apply a thermoplastic test stripe on suitable material in the presence of the Engineer during the application of thermoplastic traffic stripes or markings. The test stripe must be at least 1 foot in length. Remove loose glass beads before measuring the retroreflectivity. Obtain authorization to proceed with the application of traffic stripes and pavement markings. Within 30 days of application, test the traffic stripes and pavement markings under the test methods and frequencies shown in the following table: Traffic Stripe Testing Freq uency Quality characteristic Test method Minimum sampling and testing frequency Initial retroreflectivity (min, ASTM ASTM D7585 a mcd·m -2·lx -1) E1710 White Yellow aUse the referee evaluation protocol for project length less than 10 miles. For project lengths greater th an or equal to 10 miles, add one evaluation for every additional mile.
Verify the glass bead application rate by stabbing the glass bead tank with a calibrated rod. 84-2.01D(3) Department Acceptance The Engineer will perform a nighttime, drive-through, visual inspection of the retroreflectivity of the traffic stripes and pavement markings and notify you of any locations with deficient retroreflectivity. Test the retroreflectivity of the deficient areas to confirm striping and pavement markings meets the requirements. The thermoplastic test stripe will be tested for yellow color, daytime luminance factor, and yellowness index requirements by METS. 84-2.02 MATERIALS 84-2.02A General Reserved 84-2.02B Glass Beads Each lot of glass beads must comply with EPA Test Method 3052 and 6010B or 6010C. Glass beads must contain less than 200 ppm each of arsenic and lead. Type 1 glass beads must comply with AASHTO M 247.
31 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Type 2 glass beads must comply with AASHTO M 247. At least 75 percent of the beads by count must be true spheres that are colorless and do not exhibit dark spots, air inclusions, or surface scratches when viewed under 20X magnification. High-performance glass beads must be on the Authorized Material List for high- performance glass beads. Large-gradation glass beads must be on the Authorized Material List for two component traffic paint. Glass beads for methyl methacrylate must be on the Authorized Material List for methyl methacrylate traffic striping and pavement marking. Glass beads for paint must comply with State Specification 8010-004. Glass beads must be surface treated, according to the bead and the material manufacturer’s instructions, to promote adhesion with the specified material. 84-2.02C Thermoplastic Thermoplastic must comply with State Specification PTH-02HYDRO, or PTH-02ALKYD. Sprayable thermoplastic must comply with State Specification PTH-02SPRAY. Each lot or batch of thermoplastic must be tested under California Test 423. 84-2.02D Methyl Methacrylate Methyl methacrylate traffic paint must: 1. Be on the Authorized Material List for methyl methacrylate traffic striping and pavement marking 2. Be Category 2
84-2.02E Traffic Striping and Pavement Marking Tape Traffic striping and pavement marking tape must be on the Authorized Material List for signing and delineation materials. White tape must be have an initial retroreflectivity of a minimum 700 mcd/m2. Yellow tape must be have an initial retroreflectivity of a minimum 500 mcd/m2. When contrast is required for traffic stripping and pavement marking tape, the tape must be pre-formed and retroreflective, consisting of a white film with retroreflective beads and a contrasting black film border. The contrasting black border must be a nonreflective film bonded on each side of the white film to form a continuous roll. Each black border must be a minimum of 2 inches wide. The width of the tape must be at least 4 inches wider than the stripe width. 84-2.02F Two-Component Paint Two-component traffic paint must be on the Authorized Material List for two component traffic paint. 84-2.02G Paint Paint must comply with the requirements shown in following table:
32 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Paint Specifications Paint type Color Specification Waterborne traffic line White, yellow, and State Specification PTWB- black 01R2 Waterborne traffic line Blue, red, and green Federal Specification TT-P- for the international 1952E symbol of accessibility and other curb markings
84-2.02H–84-2.02L Reserved 84-2.03 CONSTRUCTION 84-2.03A General Establish the alignment for traffic stripes and the layouts for pavement markings with a device or method that will not conflict with other traffic control devices. Protect existing retroreflective pavement markers during work activities. Remove existing pavement markers that are coated or damaged by work activities and replace with an equivalent marker on the Authorized Material List for signing and delineation materials. A completed traffic stripe or pavement marking must: 1. Have well defined edges 2. Be uniform 3. Be free from runs, bubbles, craters, drag marks, stretch marks, and debris
A completed traffic stripe must: 1. Be straight on a tangent alignment 2. Be a true arc on a curved alignment 3. Not deviate from the width shown by more than: 3.1. 1/4 inch on a tangent alignment 3.2. 1/2 inch on a curved alignment
The length of the gaps and individual stripes that form a broken traffic stripe must not deviate by more than 2 inches from the lengths shown. The gaps and stripes must be uniform throughout the entire length of the traffic stripe. Protect newly placed traffic stripes and pavement markings from traffic and work activities until the traffic stripes and pavement markings are dry or hard enough to bear traffic. Use mechanical methods to remove dirt, contaminants, and loose material from the pavement surface before applying the traffic stripe or pavement marking. Use abrasive blast cleaning to remove laitance and curing compound from the surface of new concrete pavement before applying the traffic stripe or pavement marking. Construct recesses as shown in the following table:
33 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Recess Depth Requirements Requirement Material Depth (mils) Depth (in) Thermoplastic 375 3/8 Two component traffic paint 250 1/4 Methyl methacrylate traffic paint 250 1/4
Construct recesses for double traffic stripes in a single pass. Before applying the traffic stripes and pavement markings: 1. Allow wet ground recesses to dry a minimum of 24 hours 2. Remove all powdery residue from dry recess 3. Keep the recesses dry and free from debris
Apply traffic stripes and pavement markings before the end of the same work shift. 84-2.03B Application of Traffic Stripes and Pavement Markings 84-2.03B(1) General Apply material for a pavement marking with a stencil or a preformed marking. Immediately remove drips, overspray, improper markings, or material tracked by traffic, using an authorized method. Apply a traffic stripe or a pavement marking only to a clean, dry surface during a period when the pavement surface temperature is above 50 degrees F. Apply traffic stripe or pavement marking and glass beads in a single pass. You may apply the glass beads by hand on pavement markings. Embed glass beads to a depth of 1/2 their diameters. Distribute glass beads uniformly on traffic stripe and pavement markings. Glass beads with integral color must match the color of the stripe or pavement marking. Apply glass beads with two separate applicator guns when two gradations are specified. Allow enough overlap distance between new and existing striping patterns to ensure continuity at the start and end of the transition. The retroreflectivity of applied traffic stripes and pavement markings must comply with the requirements shown in the following table: Retroreflectivity Requirements Traffic stripe material White (min, mcd·m - Yellow (min, mcd·m - 2·lx -1) 2·lx -1) Paint 250 125 Thermoplastic 250 125 Thermoplastic with wet 700 500 night enhanced visibility Two component 250 125 Methyl methacrylate 500 300 Tape 700 500
84-2.03B(2) Thermoplastic 84-2.03B(2)(a) General Apply primer or surface preparation adhesive under the manufacturer's instructions: 1. To all roadway surfaces except for asphaltic surfaces less than 6 months old
34 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
2. At a minimum rate of 1 gallon per 300 square feet 3. To allow time for the thermoplastic primer to dry and become tacky before application of the thermoplastic
Do not thin the primer. Preheat thermoplastic using preheaters with mixers having a 360-degree rotation. Apply thermoplastic in a single uniform layer by spray or extrusion methods. Completely coat and fill voids in the pavement surface with the thermoplastic. Apply recessed thermoplastic at a thickness so that the top is 0 to 1/16 inch below the pavement surface. 84-2.03B(2)(b) Extruded Thermoplastic Apply extruded thermoplastic at a temperature of 400 to 425 degrees F or as recommended by the manufacturer. Apply extruded thermoplastic for a traffic stripe at a rate of at least 0.36 lb of thermoplastic per foot of 6-inch-wide solid stripe. The applied traffic stripe must be at least 0.060 inch thick. Apply extruded thermoplastic pavement markings at a thickness from 0.100 to 0.150 inch. Apply Type 2 glass beads to the surface of the molten thermoplastic at a rate of at least 8 lb of beads per 100 sq ft. 84-2.03B(2)(c) Sprayable Thermoplastic Apply sprayable thermoplastic at a temperature of 350 to 400 degrees F. Apply sprayable thermoplastic for a traffic stripe at a rate of at least 0.24 lb of thermoplastic per foot of 6-inch-wide solid stripe. The applied stripe must be at least 0.040 inch thick. 84-2.03B(2)(d) Thermoplastic with Enhanced Wet-Night Visibility Apply a thermoplastic traffic stripe or pavement marking with enhanced wet-night visibility in a single pass and in the following order: 1. Uniform layer of extruded thermoplastic 2. Layer of high-performance glass beads 3. Layer of Type 2 glass beads
Apply thermoplastic with enhanced wet-night visibility at a maximum speed of 8 mph. Apply thermoplastic with enhanced wet-night visibility for a traffic stripe at a rate of at least 0.47 lb of thermoplastic per foot of 6-inch-wide solid stripe. The applied stripe must be at least 0.090 inch thick. Apply thermoplastic with enhanced wet-night visibility for a pavement marking at a rate of at least 1.06 lb of thermoplastic per square foot of marking. The applied pavement marking must be at least 0.100 inch thick. Apply high-performance glass beads at a rate of at least 6 lb of glass beads per 100 sq ft of stripe or marking. Apply Type 2, glass beads at a rate of at least 8 lb of glass beads per 100 sq ft of stripe or marking. 84-2.03B(3) Methyl Methacrylate Apply the methyl methacrylate when the pavement surface and atmospheric temperatures are from 40 to 104 degrees F. Apply methyl methacrylate paint at a minimum thickness of 0.090 inch. Apply recessed methyl methacrylate paint at a minimum thickness of 0.200 inch.
35 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Apply the glass beads recommended by the methyl methacrylate manufacturer. 84-2.03B(4) Traffic Striping and Pavement Marking Tape Do not use traffic stripe and pavement marking tape on existing open graded friction course or chip seal. Prepare pavement surface and use primer under the traffic tape manufacturer’s written instructions. Apply tape to clean and dry pavement surface. Roll or tamp the traffic tape in place. 84-2.03B(5) Two-Component Paint Apply a two-component painted traffic stripe or pavement marking in a single pass and in the following order: 1. Coat of two-component paint 2. Application of large gradation glass beads recommended by the two-component paint manufacturer 3. Application of Type 1 glass beads
Apply two-component paint when the pavement surface temperature is above 39 degrees F and the atmospheric temperature is above 36 degrees F. The temperature of the paint must comply with the paint manufacturer's instructions. Apply two-component paint and glass beads at a maximum speed of 10 mph. Apply large-gradation glass beads at a minimum rate of 11.7 lb of beads per gallon of paint. Apply Type 1 glass beads at a minimum rate of 8.3 lb of beads per gallon of paint. Apply two-component paint for the traffic stripes and pavement markings at the thickness and application rates shown in the following table: Type of pavement Stripe Application rate thickness (min, sq ft/gal) (min, inch) HMA open graded/chip 0.025 64 seal HMA dense graded 0.020 80 Concrete 0.020 80
Apply recessed two-component paint at a thickness between 0.020 and 0.025 inch. 84-2.03B(6) Paint Do not apply paint if: 1. Fresh paint could become damaged by rain, fog, or condensation 2. Atmospheric temperature could drop below 50 degrees F during the drying period
Do not thin paint. Use mechanical means to paint traffic stripes and pavement markings and to apply glass beads for traffic stripes. The striping machine must be capable of superimposing successive coats of paint on the 1st coat and on existing stripes at a minimum speed of 5 mph. Where the configuration or location of a traffic stripe is such that the use of a striping machine is not practicable, you may apply the traffic paint and glass beads by other methods and equipment if authorized.
36 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Apply traffic stripes and pavement markings in 1 coat on existing pavement surfaces, at an approximate rate of 107 sq ft/gal. Apply traffic stripes and pavement markings in 2 coats on a new pavement surface. The 1st coat of paint must be dry before applying the 2nd coat. Apply 2-coat paint at the approximate rate of 215 sq ft/gal for each coat. Paint a 1-coat, 3-inch-wide black stripe between the two 6-inch-wide yellow stripes of a double traffic stripe. If the two 6-inch-wide yellow stripes are applied in 2 coats, apply the black stripe concurrently with the 2nd coat of the yellow stripes. On 2-lane highways: 1. If the 1st coat of the centerline stripe is applied in the same direction as increasing post miles, use the right-hand spray gun of the 3 spray guns to apply a single yellow stripe 2. If the 1st coat of the centerline stripe is applied in the same direction as decreasing post miles, use the left-hand spray gun of the 3 spray guns to apply a single yellow stripe 3. Apply the 2nd coat of centerline striping in the opposite direction of the 1st coat
Apply glass beads at an approximate rate of 5 lb of beads per gallon of paint. Verify the application rate of paint by stabbing the paint tank with a calibrated rod. If the striping machine has paint gauges, the Engineer may measure the volume of paint using the gauges instead of stabbing the paint tank with a calibrated rod. 84-2.03B(7) Contrast Striping Contrast striping consists of black striping placed on each side or end of a white stripe. You may use permanent tape instead of paint or thermoplastic. Apply contrast stripe paint in one coat. Do not use glass beads or other reflective elements in contrast striping material. 84-2.03B(7)–84-2.03B(10) Reserved 84-2.04 PAYMENT The payment quantity for a traffic stripe is the length measured along the line of the traffic stripe without deductions for gaps in the broken traffic stripe. The payment quantity for a pavement marking is the area covered. A double traffic stripe consisting of two-6-inch-wide yellow stripes are measured as 2 traffic stripes except for painted traffic stripes and sprayable thermoplastic traffic stripes.A double sprayable thermoplastic traffic stripe consisting of two 6-inch-wide yellow stripes are measured as single traffic stripe. A double painted traffic stripe consisting of two 6-inch-wide yellow stripes separated by a 3-inch-wide black stripe is measured as a single traffic stripe. The payment quantity for contrast striping is the length measured along the line of the traffic stripe without deductions for gaps in the broken traffic stripe.
Replace section 84-9 with: 10-19-18 84-9 EXISTING MARKINGS 84-9.01 GENERAL 84-9.01A Summary Section 84-9 includes specifications for removing existing markings.
37 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Work performed on existing markings must comply with section 15. 84-9.01B Definitions Reserved 84-9.01B Submittals Submit your proposed method for removing traffic stripes and pavement markings at least 7 days before starting the removal work. Allow 2 business days for the review. 84-9.02 MATERIALS Not Used 84-9.03 CONSTRUCTION 84-9.03A General Remove existing traffic stripes before making any changes to the traffic pattern. Remove existing traffic stripes and pavement markings before applying the following materials: 1. Traffic stripe and pavement marking tape 2. Two component traffic stripes and pavement markings 3. Methyl methacrylate traffic stripes and pavement markings
Remove contrast treatment, traffic stripes and pavement markings, including any paint in the gaps, by methods that do not remove pavement to a depth of more than 1/8 inch. Remove pavement markings such that the old message cannot be identified. Make any area removed by grinding rectangular. Water must not puddle in the ground areas. Fog seal ground areas on asphalt concrete pavement. Sweep up or vacuum any residue before it can (1) be blown by traffic or wind, (2) migrate across lanes or shoulders, or (3) enter a drainage facility. 84-9.03B Remove Traffic Stripes and Pavement Markings Containing Lead Reserved 84-9.03C–84-9.03J Reserved 84-9.04 PAYMENT The payment quantity for remove traffic stripe is the measured length multiplied by: 1. 0.67 for a single 4-inch-wide traffic stripe 2 1.34 for a single 8-inch-wide traffic stripe 3. 2 for a double traffic stripe
The payment quantity for remove traffic stripe does not include the gaps in broken traffic stripes. Payment for removal of paint evident in a gap is included in the payment for remove traffic stripe of the type involved. If no bid item is shown on the Bid Item List for remove pavement marking, remove pavement marking is paid for as remove traffic stripe of the types shown in the Bid Item List and the payment quantity for 1 square foot of pavement marking is 3 linear feet.
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
38 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION X ELECTRICAL WORK 86 GENERAL 10-19-18 Replace section 86-1.01B with: 10-19-18 86-1.01B Definitions accessible pedestrian signal: Accessible pedestrian signal as defined in the California MUTCD . accessible walk indication: Activated audible and vibrotactile action during the walk interval. actuation: Actuation as defined in the California MUTCD . ambient sound level: Background sound level in dB at a given location. ambient sound sensing microphone: Microphone that measures the ambient sound level in dB and automatically adjusts the accessible pedestrian signal speaker's volume. audible speech walk message: Audible prerecorded message that communicates to pedestrians which street has the walk interval. CALiPER: Commercially Available LED Product Evaluation and Reporting. A U.S. Department of Energy program that individually tests and provides unbiased information on the performance of commercially available LED luminaires and lights. controller assembly: Assembly for controlling a system's operations, consisting of a controller unit and auxiliary equipment housed in a waterproof cabinet. controller unit: Part of the controller assembly performing the basic timing and logic functions. correlated color temperature: Absolute temperature in kelvin of a blackbody whose chromaticity most nearly resembles that of the light source. detector: Detector as defined in the California MUTCD . electrolier: Assembly of a lighting standard and luminaire. flasher: Device for opening and closing signal circuits at a repetitive rate. illuminance gradient: Ratio of the minimum illuminance on a 1-foot square of sign panel to that on an adjacent 1-foot square of sign panel. inductive loop detector: Detector capable of being actuated by an inductance change caused by a vehicle passing or standing over the loop. An inductive loop detector includes a loop or group of loops installed in the roadway and a lead-in cable installed and connected inside a controller cabinet.
39 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS junction temperature: Temperature of the electronic junction of the LED device. The junction temperature is critical in determining photometric performance, estimating operational life, and preventing catastrophic failure of the LED. L70: Extrapolated life in hours of the luminaire when the luminous output depreciates 30 percent from the initial values. lighting standard: Pole and mast arm supporting the luminaire. link: Part of a system which provides a data connection between a transmitter and receiver. LM-79: Test method from the Illumination Engineering Society of North America specifying the test conditions, measurements, and report format for testing solid state lighting devices, including LED luminaires. LM-80: Test method from the Illumination Engineering Society of North America specifying the test conditions, measurements, and report format for testing and estimating the long-term performance of LEDs for general lighting purposes. luminaire: Assembly that houses the light source and controls the light emitted from the light source. mid-span access method: Procedure in which fibers from a single buffer tube are accessed and spliced to a multi buffer tube cable without cutting the unused fibers in the buffer tube, or disturbing the remaining buffer tubes in the cable. National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program: U.S. Department of Energy program that accredits independent testing laboratories. optical time domain reflectometer: Fiber optic test equipment that is used to measure the total amount of power loss between two points and over the corresponding distance. It provides a visual and printed display of the relative location of system components such as fiber sections, splices and connectors as well as the losses that are attributed to each component and or defects in the fiber. pedestrian change interval: Pedestrian change interval as defined in the California MUTCD . powder coating: Coating applied electrostatically using exterior-grade, UV-stable, polymer powder. power factor: Ratio of the real power component to the complex power component. power meter: Portable fiber optic test equipment that, when coupled with a light source, is used to perform end-to-end attenuation testing. Its display indicates the amount of power injected by the light source at the designed wavelength of the system under testing that arrives at the receiving end of the link. pretimed controller assembly: Assembly operating traffic signals under a predetermined cycle length.
40 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS programming mechanism: Device to program the accessible pedestrian signal operation. pull box: Box with a cover that is installed in an accessible place in a conduit run to facilitate the pulling in of wires or cables. push button information message: Push button information message as defined in the California MUTCD. push button locator tone: Push button locator tone as defined in the California MUTCD . segment: Continuous cable terminated by 2 splices, 2 connectors or 1 splice and 1 connector. signal face: Signal face as defined in the California MUTCD . signal head: Signal head as defined in the California MUTCD . signal indication: Signal indication as defined in the California MUTCD . signal section: Signal section as defined in the California MUTCD . signal standard: Pole with or without mast arms carrying 1 or more signal faces. street side lumens: Lumens from a luminaire directed to light up areas between the fixture and the roadway, such as traveled ways and freeway lanes. surge protection device: Subsystem or component that protects equipment against short-duration voltage transients in power line. total harmonic distortion: Ratio of the rms value of the sum of the squared individual harmonic amplitudes to the rms value of the fundamental frequency of a complex waveform. traffic-actuated controller assembly: Assembly for operating traffic signals under the varying demands of traffic as registered by detector actuation. traffic phase: Traffic phase as defined in the California MUTCD . vehicle: Vehicle as defined in the California Vehicle Code . vibrotactile pedestrian device: Vibrotactile pedestrian device as defined in the California MUTCD .
10-19-18 Delete the 9th and 10th paragraphs of section 86-1.01C(1).
Replace section 86-1.01C(3) with: 10-19-18 86-1.01C(3) Luminaires Submit for a luminaire: 1. Maximum power in watts
41 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
2. Maximum designed junction temperature 3. Heat sink area in square inches 4. Designed junction-to-ambient thermal resistance calculation with thermal resistance components clearly defined 5. L70 in hours when extrapolated for the average nighttime operating temperature 6. Life expectancy based on the junction temperature 7. Manufacturer's data sheet for the power supply, including the rated life
Submit the manufacturer's QC test data for luminaires as an informational submittal.
Replace section 86-1.01C(4) with: 10-19-18 86-1.01C(4) Reserved
Replace the 8th paragraph of section 86-1.02B(1) with: 10-19-18 High density polyethylene for innerduct must: 1. Comply with ASTM D3485, D3035, D2239, and D2447, and NEMA TC7 and TC2 2. Have a minimum tensile yield strength of 3300 psi under ASTM D638 3. Have a density of 59.6187 lb/ft 3 ± 0.3121 lb/in 3 under ASTM D1505
Replace the 4th paragraph of section 86-1.02C(1) with: 10-19-18 The cover marking must include CALTRANS and one of the following: 1. SERVICE for service circuits between a service point and service disconnect 2. SERVICE IRRIGATION for circuits from a service equipment enclosure to an irrigation controller 3. SERVICE BOOSTER PUMP for circuits from a service equipment enclosure to the booster pump 4. TDC POWER for circuits from a service equipment enclosure to telephone demarcation cabinet 5. LIGHTING for a lighting system 6. SIGN ILLUMINATION for a sign illumination system 7. SIGNAL AND LIGHTING for a signal and lighting system 8. RAMP METER for a ramp metering system 9. TMS for a traffic monitoring station 10. FLASHING BEACON for a flashing beacon system 11. CMS for a changeable message sign system 12. INTERCONNECT for an interconnect conduit and cable system 13. FIBER OPTIC for fiber optic cable system 14. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS if more than one system is shared in the same pull box
10-19-18 Delete the 3rd paragraph of section 86-1.02C(2).
42 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Replace the 1st and 2nd paragraphs of section 86-1.02C(3) with: 10-19-18 A traffic pull box and cover must comply with AASHTO HS20-44 and load tested under AASHTO M 306. The frame must be anchored to the box with 2-1/4-inch-long concrete anchors with a 1/4 inch diameter. A no. 3-1/2(T) pull box must have 4 concrete anchors, one placed in each corner. No. 5(T) and no. 6(T) pull boxes must have 6 concrete anchors, one placed in each corner and one near the middle of each of the longer sides.
Replace section 86-1.02C(4)(b) with: 10-19-18 86-1.02C(4)(b) Tamper-Resistant Nontraffic Pull Box 86-1.02C(4)(b)(i) General A tamper resistant nontraffic pull box must include a pull box with one of the following: 1. Anchored cover 2. Lockable cover 3. Pull box insert
86-1.02C(4)(b)(ii) Anchored Cover The anchored cover must: 1. Be of 1/2-inch-thick mild steel, hot dip galvanized, post fabrication. 2. Be hot dip galvanized after manufacturing with spikes removed from the galvanized surfaces. 3. Have a center space for a top lock nut that must be torqued to 200 ft-lb. 4. Have a center opening for a stainless steel threaded cap to cover the lock nut. 5. Weigh a minimum of 85 lb. 6. Include an all-around security skirt of 1/4-inch thick steel. The skirt must be sized to encase a nontraffic pull box or sized to fit within a traffic pull box. 7. Be welded to the skirt.
86-1.02C(4)(b)(iii) Lockable Cover The lockable cover must: 1. Be manufactured from minimum 3/16-inch-thick galvanized steel or a polymer of minimum strength equal to 3/16 inch steel. 2. Be secured to the pull box with a locking mechanism of equal or greater strength than the manufactured material. 3. Have 1/2-by-2-inch slot holes for lifting. 4. Have dimensions complying with one of the following: 4.1. Department's standards for pull box covers as shown if the lockable cover is secured to the inside lip of the pull box. 4.2. Department's standards for the length and width as shown for pull box covers if the lockable cover is secured to the top of the pull box.
86-1.02C(4)(b)(iv) Pull Box Insert The pull box insert must: 1. Be made of minimum 3/16-inch-thick or 10 gauge mild hot-dipped galvanized steel
43 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
2. Have a minimum of 2 mounting brackets that rest under the side or end wall 3. Be lockable with a padlock having a minimum 3/8-inch shackle 4. Have dimensions complying with the Department's standards for the length and width as shown for pull box covers
10-19-18 Delete section 86-1.02C(4)(d).
10-19-18 Delete section 86-1.02C(4)(e).
10-19-18 Delete section 86-1.02C(4)(f).
Replace section 86-1.02D(3) with: 10-19-18 86-1.02D(3) Warning Tape Warning tape must be orange color polyolefin film, minimum elongation of 500 percent before breakage, water and corrosion resistant, and comply with requirements shown in the following table: Warning Tape Requirements Quality characteristic Requirem ent Thickness (min, mil) 4 Width (in) 4 Tensile strength of 2800 material (min, psi) Message spacing 3 intervals (ft)
The warning tape must have a printed message that reads: CAUTION: CALTRANS FACILITIES BELOW . The printed text height and color must be 1 inch, black color text over bright orange background.
Replace the 2nd paragraph of section 86-1.02E with: 10-19-18 Each sensor must: 1. Have a dissipation factor less than 0.04 nF when measured in the 20 nF range 2. Have resistance greater than 20 Megaohms 3. Be 1/4 inch wide by 6 feet long by 1/16 inch thick 4. Have a RG-58C/U coaxial screen transmission cable, jacketed with high-density polyethylene, rated for direct burial and resistant to nicks and cuts 5. Operate over a temperature range from -40 to 160 degrees F 6. Have a signal to noise ratio equal to or greater than 10 to 1
44 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
7. Have an output signal of a minimum 250 mV ± 20 percent for a wheel load of 400 lb at 55 mph and 70 degrees F 8. Have an insulation resistance greater than 500 MΩ 9. Have a life cycle of a minimum 25 million equivalent single axle loadings
Replace section 86-1.02F(1) with: 10-19-18 86-1.02F(1) General Conductors and cables must be clearly and permanently marked the entire length of their outer surface with: 1. Manufacturer's name or trademark 2. Insulation-type letter designation 3. Conductor size 4. Voltage 5. Number of conductors for a cable
The minimum insulation thickness and color code requirements must comply with NEC.
Replace the 2nd paragraph of section 86-1.02F(2)(a) with: 10-19-18 Conductors must be identified as shown in the following table: Conductor Identification Identification Copp Signal phase or Insulation color Band er Circuit function Base Stripe a symbols size
45 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
2, 6 Red, Black 2, 6 14 yellow, brown 4, 8 Red, Orange 4, 8 14 yellow, brown 1, 5 Red, None 1, 5 14 yellow, Signals brown (vehicle) a,b 3, 7 Red, Purple 3, 7 14 yellow, brown Ramp meter 1 Red, None No band 14 yellow, required brown Ramp meter 2 Red, Black No band 14 yellow, required brown 2p, 6p Red, brown Black 2p, 6p 14 Pedestrian 4p, 8p Red, brown Orange 4p, 8p 14 signals 1p, 5p Red, brown None 1p, 5p 14 3p, 7p Red, brown Purple 3p, 7p 14 Push button 2p, 6p Blue Black P-2, P -6 14 assembly or 4p, 8p Blue Orange P-4, P -8 14 accessible 1p, 5p Blue None P-1, P -5 14 pedestrian 3p, 7p Blue Purple P-3, P-7 14 signal Ungrounded Black None CON-1 6 Traffic signal circuit conductor controller Grounded circuit White None CON-2 6 cabinet conductor Ungrounded - Black None No band 14 line 1 required Highway Ungrounded - Red None No band 14 lighting pull box line 2 required to luminaire Grounded White None No band 14 required Ungrounded - Black None ML1 10 line 1 Multiple Ungrounded - Red None ML2 10 highway lighting line 2 Ungrounded - White None ML3 10 line 3 Ungrounded - Black None C1 14 Lighting control Photoelectric unit
46 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Switching leg Red None C2 14 from Photoelectric unit or SM transformer Ungrounded - Black None No band 6 line 1 (signals) required Service Ungrounded - Red None No band 8 line 2 (lighting) required Ungrounded - Black None SL-1 10 line 1 Sign lighting Ungrounded - Red None SL-2 10 line 2 Ungrounded Red or None FB- 14 Flashing between flasher yellow Location. c beacons and beacons Push button White Black No band 14 assembly or required accessible pedestrian signal Signals and White None No band 10 Grounded multiple lighting required circuit Flashing White None No band 12 conductor beacons and required sign lighting Lighting control White None C-3 14 Service White None No band 14 required Railroad Black None R 14 preemption Black None No band 14 Spares required Notes: aOn overlaps, the insulation is striped for the 1st phase in the designation, e.g., phase (2+3) conductor is striped as for phase 2. bBand for overlap and special phases as required cFlashing beacons having separate service do not require banding.
10-19-18 Delete the 4th paragraph of section 86-1.02F(2)(a).
Replace the 2nd paragraph of section 86-1.02F(2)(c)(ii) with: 10-19-18 An equipment grounding conductor must be insulated.
47 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Replace the 3rd paragraph of section 86-1.02F(3)(d)(ii) with: 10-19-18 Cable must comply with the requirements shown in the following table: Cable Conductor Cable jacket Maximum Conductor color code type quantity and thickness nominal type (mils) outside Average Minimum diameter (inch)
48 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
3CSC 3 no. 14 44 36 0.40 Blue/black stripe, blue/orange stripe, white/black stripe 5CSC 5 no. 14 44 36 0.50 Red, yellow, brown, black, white 9CSC 1 no. 12 60 48 0.65 No. 12 - white, 8 no. 14 No. 14 - red, yellow, brown, black, red/black stripe, yellow/black stripe, brown/black stripe, white/black stripe 12CSC 1 no. 12 60 48 0.80 No. 12 - white 11 no. 14 No. 14 - red, yellow, brown, black, red/black stripe, yellow/black stripe, brown/black stripe, black/red stripe, black/white stripe, red/white stripe, brown/white stripe
49 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
28CSC 1 no. 10 80 64 0.90 No. 10 - white 27 no. 14 No. 14 - red/black stripe, yellow/black stripe, brown/black stripe, red/orange stripe, yellow/orange stripe, brown/orange stripe, red/silver stripe, yellow/silver stripe, brown/silver stripe, red/purple stripe, yellow/purple stripe, brown/purple stripe, red/2 black stripes, brown/2 black stripes, red/2 orange stripes, brown/2 orange stripes, red/2 silver stripes, brown/2 silver stripes, red/2 purple stripes, brown/2 purple stripes, blue/black stripe, blue/orange stripe, blue/silver stripe, blue/purple stripe, white/black stripe, black/red stripe, black
Replace the 3rd paragraph of section 86-1.02G with: 10-19-18 The self-adhesive reflective labels must: 1. Be from 3 to 5 mils thick 2. Have all black capital characters on a white background 3. Extend beyond the character by a minimum of 1/4 inch
Replace the 4th paragraph of section 86-1.02H with: 10-19-18 PVC electrical tape must have a minimum thickness of 6 mils.
50 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Replace section 86-1.02K with: 10-19-18 86-1.02K Luminaires 86-1.02K(1) General A luminaire must: 1. Be self-contained, not requiring assembly. 2. Comply with UL 1598 for luminaires in wet locations. 3. Have a power supply with ANSI/IEC rating of at least IP65. 4. Weigh less than 35 lb. 5. Have a minimum operating life of 100,000 hours when operated for an average time of 11.5 hours at an average temperature of 70 degrees F. 6. Operate over a temperature range from -40 to 130 degrees F. 7. Be operationally compatible with photoelectric controls. 8. Have a correlated color temperature range from 2700 to 3500 K and a color rendering index of 70 or greater. 9. Have a maximum-effective projected area of 1.4 sq ft when viewed from either side or end. 10. Comply with California Test 611. 11. Have a power factor of 0.90 or greater. The total harmonic distortion, current, and voltage induced into a power line by a luminaire must not exceed 20 percent. 12. Comply with the maximum power consumption and isofootcandle curves as shown. 13. Be on the Authorized Material List for LED luminaires or must be submitted for testing and addition to the AML.
A luminaire must include a surge protection device to withstand high-repetition noise transients caused by utility line switching, nearby lightning strikes, and other interferences. The device must protect the luminaire from damage and failure due to transient voltages and currents as defined in Tables 1 and 4 of ANSI/IEEE C64.41.2 for location category C-High. The surge protection device must comply with UL 1449 and ANSI/IEEE C62.45 based on ANSI/IEEE C62.41.2 definitions for standard and optional waveforms for location category C-High. The luminaire must operate over the entire voltage range from 120 to 480 V(ac), 60 ± 3 Hz or one of the following: 1. From 95 to 277 V(ac) for luminaires rated 120 V(ac) or 240 V(ac) 2. From 347 to 480 V(ac) for luminaires rated 480 V(ac)
The fluctuations of line voltage must have no visible effect on the luminous output. The L70 of the luminaire must be the minimum operating life or greater. Illuminance measurements must be calibrated to standard photopic calibrations. The luminaire's housing must withstand a 1008 hour cyclic salt fog spray/UV test under ASTM D5894 and an evaluation under ASTM D714 with a blister size of 8 or greater and no more than medium density. The luminaire's housing must be marine-grade alloy with less than 0.2 percent copper or die cast aluminum. All exposed aluminum must be anodized. A chromate conversion undercoating must be used underneath a thermoplastic polyester powder coat. External bolts, screws, hinges, hinge pins, and door closure devices must be corrosion resistant.
51 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
The housing must be designed to prevent the buildup of water on its top surface. Exposed heat sink fins must be oriented to allow water to run off the luminaire and carry dust and other accumulated debris away from the unit. The optical assembly of the luminaire must be protected against dust and moisture intrusion to at least an UL 60529 rating of IP66. The power supply enclosure must be protected to at least an UL 60529 rating of IP43. If the components are mounted on a down-opening door, the door must be hinged and secured to the luminaire's housing separately from other components. The door must be secured to the housing to prevent accidental opening. A safety cable must mechanically connect the door to the housing. A luminaire must have a barrier-type terminal block secured to the housing to connect field wires. The terminal screws must be captive and equipped with wire grips for conductors up to no. 6. The conductors and terminals must be identified and marked. If needed, each refractor or lens must be made of UV-inhibiting high-impact plastic, such as acrylic or polycarbonate, or heat and impact-resistant glass. The refractor or lens must be resistant to scratching. Polymeric materials, except for the lenses of enclosures containing either the power supply or electronic components of the luminaire, must be made of UL94 V-0 flame-retardant materials. The luminaire must be permanently marked inside the unit and outside of its packaging box. Marking consists of: 1. Manufacturer's name or trademark 2. Month and year of manufacture 3. Model, serial, and lot numbers 4. Rated voltage, wattage, and power in VA
An LED luminaire must: 1. Comply with Class A emission limits under 47 CFR 15(B) for the emission of electronic noise. 2. Have a power supply with: 2.1. 2 leads to accept standard 0-10 V(dc). 2.2. Dimming control compatible with IEC 60929, Annex E. If the control leads are open or the analog control signal is lost, the circuit must default to 100-percent power. 2.3. Case temperature self rise of 77 degrees F or less above ambient temperature in free air with no additional heat sinks. 3. Have passive thermal management with enough capacity to ensure proper heat dissipation and functioning of the luminaire over its minimum operating life. The maximum junction temperature for the minimum operating life must not exceed 221 degrees F. 4. Have a junction-to-ambient thermal resistance of 95 degrees F per watt or less. 5. Contain circuitry that automatically reduces the power to the LEDs so the maximum junction temperature is not exceeded when the ambient temperature is 100 degrees F or greater. 6. Have a heat sink made of aluminum or other material of equal or lower thermal resistance. The use of fans or other mechanical devices is not allowed for cooling the luminaire.
52 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
The catastrophic loss or failure of 1 LED must not result in the loss of more than 20 percent of the total luminous output of the LED luminaire. 86-1.02K(2) Roadway Luminaires A roadway luminaire must: 1. Have a housing color that matches a color no. 26152 to 26440, 36231 to 36375, or 36440 of AMS-STD-595 2. Have an ANSI C136.41-compliant, locking-type, photocontrol receptacle with dimming connections and a watertight shorting cap 3. Not allow more than 2.5 percent of the rated lumens to project above 80 degrees measured up from the vertical plane in the direction of the roadway 4. Have equipment identification character labels outside the unit on the side that will face the road. Equipment identification characters consist of: 4.1. R1 for Roadway 1, R2 for Roadway 2, R3 for Roadway 3, and R4 for Roadway 4 4.2. Rated wattage
The luminaire’s housing must have a slip fitter that must: 1. Fit on mast arms with outside diameters from 1-5/8 to 2-3/8 inches 2. Be adjustable to a minimum of ±5 degrees from the axis of the tenon in a minimum of 5 steps: +5, +2.5, 0, -2.5, -5 3. Have clamping brackets that: 3.1. Are made of corrosion-resistant materials or treated to prevent galvanic reactions 3.2. Do not bottom out on the housing bosses when adjusted within the designed angular range 3.3. Do not permanently set in excess of 1/32 inch when tightened
86-1.02K(3) Overhead Sign Luminaires An overhead sign luminaire must: 1. Have a uniformity average to minimum ratio of 10:1 for the distribution of light reflected on a 16' wide by 10' high sign panel 2. Not allow more than 2.5 percent of the rated lumens to project above 65 degrees measured up from the horizontal plane in the direction of the sign panel 3. Mount at a maximum height of 12 inches above the top of the mounting rails 4. Mount directly to the sign structure as shown or with a mounting adapter that meets the material requirements of the luminaire’s housing
Replace section 86-1.02M with: 10-19-18 86-1.02M Photoelectric Controls Photoelectric control types are as shown in the following table:
53 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Photoelectric Control Types Control type Description I Pole-mounted photoelectric unit. Test switch and a 15-A circuit breaker per ungrounded conductor, housed in an enclosure. II Pole-mounted photoelectric unit. Contactor, a 15-A circuit breaker per ungrounded conductor, and test switch located in a service equipment enclosure. III Pole-mounted photoelectric unit. Contactor, a 15-A circuit breaker per ungrounded conductor, and a t est switch housed in an enclosure. IV A photoelectric unit that plugs into a NEMA twist-lock receptacle, integral with the luminaire. V A photoelectric unit, contactor, a 15-A circuit breaker per ungrounded conductor, and test switch located in a service equipment enclosure.
The pole-mounted adaptor for Type I, II, and III photoelectric controls must include a terminal block and cable supports or clamps to support the wires. Photoelectric unit must: 1. Have a screen to prevent artificial light from causing cycling. 2. Have a rating of 60 Hz, 105-130 V(ac), 210-240 V(ac), or 105-240 V(ac). 3. Operate at a temperature range from -20 to 55 degrees C. 4. Consume less than 10 W. 5. Be a 3-prong, twist-lock type with a NEMA IP 65 rating, ANSI C136.10-compliant. 6. Have a fail-on state. 7. Fit into a NEMA-type receptacle. 8. Turn on from 1 to 5 footcandles and turn off from 1.5 to 5 times the turn-on level. Measurements must be made by procedures in EEI-NEMA Standards for Physical and Electrical Interchangeability of Light-Sensitive Control Devices Used in the Control of Roadway Lighting.
Type I, II, III, and V photoelectric controls must have a test switch to allow manual operation of the lighting circuit. Switch must be: 1. Single-hole mounting, toggle type 2. 15 A, single pole and single throw 3. Labeled Auto-Test on a nameplate
Photoelectric control's contactor must be: 1. Normally open 2. Mechanical-armature type with contacts of fine silver, silver alloy, or equal or better material 3. Installed to provide a minimum space of 2-1/2 inches between the contactor terminals and the enclosure's sides
The terminal blocks must be rated at 25 A, 600 V(ac), molded from phenolic or nylon material, and be the barrier type with plated-brass screw terminals and integral marking strips.
54 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Replace section 86-1.02N with: 10-19-18 86-1.02N Fused Splice Connectors The fused splice connector for 240 and 480 V(ac) circuits must simultaneously disconnect both ungrounded conductors. The connector must not have exposed metal parts except for the head of the stainless steel assembly screw. The head of the assembly screw must be recessed a minimum of 1/32 inch below the top of the plastic boss that surrounds the head. The connector must protect the fuse from water or weather damage. Contact between the fuse and fuse holder must be spring loaded. Fuses must: 1. Be standard, midget, ferrule type 2. Have a nontime-delay feature 3. Be 13/32 by 1-1/2 inches
Fuse ratings for luminaires are shown in the following table: Fuse Current Rating Requirements Circuit Fuse voltage Soffit and voltage rating roadway luminaires 120 V(ac) 250 V(ac) 5 A 240 V(ac) 250 V(ac) 5 A 480 V(ac) 500-600 5 A V(ac)
Fuse ratings for transformers are shown in the following table: Fuse Current Rating Requirements Circuit voltage Fuse voltage Fuse current rating for rating Single phase (two wires) Transformers (primary side) 1 kVA 2 kVA 3 kVA 120 V(ac) 250 V(ac) 10 A 20 A 30 A 240 V(ac) 250 V(ac) 6 A 10 A 20 A 480 V(ac) 500 -600 V(ac) 3 A 6 A 10 A
Replace section 86-1.02P(1) with: 10-19-18 86-1.02P(1) General The enclosures must be rated NEMA 3R and include a dead front panel and a hasp with a 7/16-inch-diameter hole for a padlock. Except for a service equipment enclosure, an enclosure must: 1. Be manufactured from steel and either galvanized, cadmium plated, or powder coated 2. Mount to a standard, pole, post, or sign structural frame
55 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
3. Provide a minimum space of 2-1/2 inches between the internal components and the enclosure's sides
The enclosure's machine screws and bolts must not protrude outside the cabinet wall. The fasteners on the exterior of an enclosure must be vandal resistant and not be removable. The exterior screws, nuts, bolts, and washers must be stainless steel.
Add between 6th and 7th paragraphs of section 86-1.02P(2): 10-19-18 Service equipment enclosure must have the meter view windows located on the front side of the enclosure for Types III-AF, BF, CF and DF. Service equipment enclosure must have the meter view windows located on the back side of the enclosure for Types III-AR, BR, CR and DR.
10-19-18 Delete section 86-1.02P(3).
Replace section 86-1.02Q(4)(a) with: 10-19-18 86-1.02Q(4)(a) General The doors of a telephone demarcation cabinet must be attached using continuous aluminum steel piano hinges.
Add between the 2nd and 3rd paragraphs of section 86-1.02R(2): 10-19-18 Bracket arms must be long enough to allow proper alignment of signals and backplate installation.
Replace item 2 in the list in the 5th paragraph of section 86-1.02R(4)(a)(iii) with: 10-19-18 2. Be a black color throughout, including the door, matching color no. 17038, 27038, or 37038 of AMS-STD-595 Replace the 5th and 6th paragraphs of section 86-1.02T with: 10-19-18 The color of a metallic housing must match color no. 33538 of AMS-STD-595. The color of a plastic housing must match color no. 17038, 27038, or 37038 of AMS-STD- 595.
Replace item 1 in the list in the 7th paragraph of section 86-1.02T with: 10-19-18 1. Have controls for the volume level and programming the message
Replace the 11th paragraph of section 86-1.02T with: 10-19-18 The cable between the accessible pedestrian signal assembly and the pedestrian signal head must be rated for outdoor use and have a: 1. Minimum four no. 18 stranded or larger tinned copper conductors with a minimum insulation thickness of 15 mils
56 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
2. Cable jacket with a minimum thickness of 20 mils and rated for a minimum: 2.1. 300 V(ac) 2.2. 80 degrees C 3. Nominal outside diameter less than 350 mils 4. Conductor color code of black, white, red and green
Replace the 1st paragraph of section 86-1.02U with: 10-19-18 The housing for a push button assembly must be made of die-cast aluminum, permanent mold-cast aluminum, or UV-stabilized self-extinguishing structural plastic. The housing must have a uniform color that matches color no. 17038, 27038, or 37038 of AMS-STD-595.
Replace the 2nd paragraph of section 86-1.02W(4) with: 10-19-18 The cured hot-melt rubberized asphalt sealant must comply with the requirements shown in the following table: Cured Hot -Melt Rubberized Asphalt Sealant Requirements Quality characteristic Test method Requirement Cone penetration, 25 °C, 150 g, 5 s (max, 35 1/10 mm) ASTM D5329 Flow, 60 °C, 5 hr (max, mm) 5 Resilience, 25 °C (min, %) 25 Softening point (min, °C) ASTM D36 82 Ductility, 25 °C, 5 cm/min (min, cm) ASTM D113 30 Flash point, Cleveland Open Cup (min, °C) ASTM D92 288 Viscosity, no. 27 spindle, 20 rpm, 190 °C ASTM D4402 2.5–3.5 (Pa•s)
Replace the 2nd paragraph of section 86-1.02Y with: 10-19-18 A transformer must be a dry type designed for operation on a 60 Hz supply. The transformer must have a decal showing a connection diagram. The diagram must show either color coding or wire tagging with primary (H1, H2) or secondary (X1, X2) markers and the primary and secondary voltage and volt-ampere rating. A transformer must comply with the electrical requirements shown in the following table:
57 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Transformer Electrical Requirements Quality characteristic Requirement 120/240, 120/480, 240/120, Rating (V(ac)) 240/480, 480/120, or 480/240 Efficiency (%) > 95 Secondary voltage regulation and tolerance from half ±3 load to full load (%)
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
87 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 10-19-18 Replace Reserved in section 87-1.01C with: 10-19-18 Submit a digital file for geographic information system mapping for: 1. Conduit 2. Pull boxes 3. Cabinets 4. Service equipment enclosures 5. Standards
The digital file must consist of: 1. Longitudinal and latitude coordinates, under the WGS84 reference coordinate system. The coordinates must be in decimal format having 6 significant figures after the decimal point. Coordinates must be read at the center of pull boxes, cabinet, standards, and service equipment enclosures; and on top of conduit at 20-foot intervals before backfill. 2. Type, depth and size for conduits. 3. Type for pull boxes, standards, cabinets, and service equipment enclosures.
Replace item 4 in the list in the 1st paragraph of section 87-1.01D(2)(a) with: 10-19-18 4. Luminaires
Replace section 87-1.01D(2)(d) with: 10-19-18 87-1.01D(2)(d) Piezoelectric Axle Sensors Piezoelectric axle sensors test consists of: 1. Demonstrating for each sensor: 1.1. Capacitance is within 20 percent of the value shown on the sensor's data sheet 1.2. Dissipation factor is less than 0.04 nF when measured in the 20 nF range 1.3. Resistance is greater than 20 Megaohms
58 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
2. Collecting a minimum of 100 vehicle records for each lane and demonstrating: 2.1. Volume is within ±3 percent accuracy 2.2. Vehicle classification is within 95 percent accuracy by type
Replace the 7th paragraph of section 87-1.03A with: 10-19-18 Notify the Engineer immediately if an existing facility is damaged by your activities: 1. Damaged existing traffic signal systems must be repaired or replaced within 24 hours. If the system cannot be fixed within 24 hours or it is located on a structure, provide a temporary system until the system can be fixed. 2. Damaged existing lighting systems must be repaired or replaced by nightfall. If the system cannot be fixed by nightfall, provide a temporary system until the system can be fixed.
Add to the end of section 87-1.03A: 10-19-18 Collect the geographic information system mapping data.
Replace the 12th paragraph of section 87-1.03B(1) with: 10-19-18 For Type 1, 2, and 5 conduits, use threaded bushings and bond them using a jumper. For other types of conduit, use nonmetallic bushings or end bell.
Replace the 3rd paragraph of section 87-1.03B(3)(a) with: 10-19-18 Place a minimum of 2 inches of sand bedding in a trench before installing the conduit and 18 inches of slurry cement over the conduit before placing additional backfill material. The slurry must be pigmented to match AMS-STD-595.
Replace the 1st sentence in the 6th paragraph of section 87-1.03B(3)(c) with: 10-19-18 Backfill trench with slurry concrete under section 19-3.02E.
Replace the 9th paragraph of section 87-1.03B(3)(c) with: 10-19-18 Install innerducts as one continuous unit between vaults. Innerducts may be interrupted inside pull boxes located between vaults and cabinets.
Replace section 87-1.03D with: 10-19-18 87-1.03D Reserved
59 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Replace section 87-1.03E(3) with: 10-19-18 87-1.03E(3) Concrete Pads, Foundations, and Pedestals Construct foundations for standards, poles, metal pedestals, and posts under section 56- 3. Construct concrete pads, foundations, and pedestals for controller cabinets, telephone demarcation cabinets, and service equipment enclosures on firm ground. Install anchor bolts using a template to provide proper spacing and alignment. Moisten the forms and ground before placing the concrete. Keep the forms in place until the concrete sets for at least 24 hours to prevent damage to the surface. Use minor concrete for pads, foundations, and pedestals. Construct a pad in front of a Type III service equipment enclosure. The pad must be 24 inches in length, 4 inches in thickness, and must match the width of the foundation. In unpaved areas, place the top of the foundation 6 inches above the surrounding grade, except place the top: 1. 1 foot 6 inches above the grade for 336L cabinets 2. 1 foot 8 inches above the grade for Type C telephone demarcation cabinets 3. 2 inches above the grade for Type III service equipment enclosures
The pad must be 2 inches above the surrounding grade in unpaved areas. In and adjacent to the sidewalk and other paved areas, place the top of the foundation 4 inches above the surrounding grade, except place the top: 1. 1 foot 6 inches above the grade for 336L cabinets 2. 1 foot 8 inches above the grade for Type C telephone demarcation cabinets 3. Level with the finished grade for Type G and Type A cabinets and Type III service equipment enclosures
The pad must be level with the finished grade in paved areas. Apply an ordinary surface finish under section 51-1.03F. Allow the foundation to cure for at least 7 days before installing any equipment.
Replace the 1st paragraph of section 87-1.03F(3)(c)(ii) with: 10-19-18 Install a Type 1 or 2 inductive loop conductor except use Type 2 for Type E and F loop detectors.
10-19-18 Delete the last paragraph of section 87-1.03G.
Replace the 4th paragraph of section 87-1.03H(2) with: 10-19-18 Use Method B as follows: 1. Cover the splice area completely with an electrical insulating coating and allow it to dry. 2. Apply 3 layers of half-lapped, PVC electrical tape. 3. Apply 2 layers of butyl-rubber, stretchable tape with liner. 4. Apply 3 layers of half-lapped, PVC, pressure-sensitive, adhesive tape.
60 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
5. Cover the entire splice with an electrical insulating coating and allow it to dry.
Replace section 87-1.03N with: 10-19-18 87-1.03N Fused Splice Connectors Install a fuse splice connector with a fuse in each ungrounded conductor for luminaires, except for overhead sign luminaires. The connector must be located in the pull box adjacent to the luminaires. If the pull box for the roadway luminaire is tamper resistant, install a fuse splice connector with 10 A fuse in the pull box and an additional fuse splice connector with a 5 A fuse in the handhole. Install a fuse splice connector with a fuse on primary side of transformer. Crimp the connector terminals onto the ungrounded conductors using a tool under the manufacturer's instructions. Insulate the terminals and make them watertight.
Add to the end of section 87-1.03T: 10-19-18 When replacing an existing accessible pedestrian signal, the housing color must match the color of the existing housing.
Add to the end of section 87-1.03U: 10-19-18 When replacing an existing push button assembly, the housing color must match the color of the existing housing.
Replace the 2nd paragraph of section 87-2.03A with: 10-19-18 Tighten the cap screws of the luminaire's clamping bracket to 10 ft-lb for roadway luminaires.
Replace section 87-3 with: 10-19-18 87-3 SIGN ILLUMINATION SYSTEMS 87-3.01 GENERAL Section 87-3 includes specifications for constructing sign illumination systems. Sign illumination system includes: 1. Foundations 2. Pull boxes 3. Conduit 4. Conductors 5. Overhead sign luminaires 6. Service equipment enclosure 7. Photoelectric control
The components of a sign illumination system are shown on the project plans.
61 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
87-3.02 MATERIALS Reserved 87-3.03 CONSTRUCTION Perform the conductor test. Install overhead sign luminaires under the manufacturer's instructions. Do not modify the sign structure or mounting channels. Perform the operational tests for the system. 87-3.04 PAYMENT Not Used
Replace section 87-4.01D with: 10-19-18 87-4.01D Quality Assurance Reserved
Replace section 87-4.02B with: 10-19-18 87-4.02B Battery Backup System A battery backup system includes the cabinet, batteries, and the Department-furnished electronics assembly. The electronics assembly includes the inverter/charger unit, power transfer relay, manually-operated bypass switch, battery harness, utility interconnect wires, battery temperature probe, and relay contact wires.
Replace the 2nd sentence in the 15th paragraph of section 87-4.02C with: 10-19-18 The background must comply with color no. 14109 of AMS-STD-595.
Replace section 87-4.03B with: 10-19-18 87-4.03B Battery Backup System Cabinets Install the battery backup system cabinet to the right of the controller cabinet. If installation on the right side is not possible, obtain authorization for installation on the left side. Provide access for power conductors between the cabinets using: 1. 2-inch nylon-insulated, steel chase nipple 2. 2-inch steel sealing locknut 3. 2-inch nylon-insulated, steel bushing
Remove the jumper between the terminals labeled BBS-1 and BBS-2 in the 5 position terminal block in the controller cabinet before connecting the Department-furnished electronics assembly.
Replace section 87-7.02 with: 10-19-18 87-7.02 MATERIALS Flashing beacon control assembly includes:
62 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
1. Enclosure. 2. Barrier-type terminal blocks rated for 25 A, 600 V(ac), made of molded phenolic or nylon material and have plated-brass screw terminals and integral marking strips. 3. Solid state flasher complying with section 8 of NEMA standards publication no. TS 1 for 10 A, dual circuits. 4. 15-A, circuit breaker per ungrounded conductor. 5. Single-hole-mounting toggle type, single-pole, single-throw switches rated at 12-A, 120 V(ac). Switches must be furnished with an indicating nameplate reading Auto - Test . A 15-A circuit breaker may be used in place of the toggle switch.
Replace 87-8 with: 10-19-18 87-8 PEDESTRIAN HYBRID BEACON SYSTEMS 87-8.01 GENERAL 87-8.01A Summary Section 87-8 includes specifications for constructing pedestrian hybrid beacon system. A pedestrian hybrid beacon system includes: 1. Foundations 2. Pull boxes 3. Conduit 4. Conductors and cables 5. Standards 6. Pedestrian hybrid beacon face 7. Pedestrian signal heads 8. Service equipment enclosure 9. Department-furnished controller assembly 10. Accessible pedestrian signals 11. Push button assemblies 12. Luminaires 13. Fuse splice connectors 14. Battery backup system
The components of a pedestrian hybrid beacon system are shown on the project plans.
87-8.01B Definitions Reserved 87-8.01C Submittals Reserved 87-8.01D Quality Assurance 87-8.01D(1) General Reserved 87-8.01D(2) Quality Control Verify the sequence for the pedestrian hybrid beacon system per California Chapter 4F, Figure 3F-3 "Sequence for a Pedestrian Hybrid Beacon" during the operational test. Test the battery backup system under section 87-1.01D(2)(c).
63 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
87-8.02 MATERIALS 87-8.02A General The system must comply with California MUTCD , Chapter 4F. The battery backup system must comply with section 87-4.02B. 87-8.02B Pedestrian Hybrid Beacon Face A pedestrian hybrid beacon face consists of three 12-inch signal heads. 87-8.03 CONSTRUCTION Install pedestrian hybrid beacon system under sections 87-4.03A and 87-4.03B. 87-8.04 PAYMENT Not Used
Replace the 1st paragraph of section 87-12.03 with: 10-19-18 Install changeable message sign on sign structure under section 56-2.
Replace section 87-14.02 with: 10-19-18 87-14.02 MATERIALS 87-14.02A General Vehicle speed feedback sign consists of a housing, display window, and radar unit. Sign must: 1. Comply with the California MUTCD, Chapter 2B 2. Have an operating voltage of 120 V(ac) for permanent installations 3. Have a maximum weight of 45 lb 4. Have a wind load rating of 90 mph 5. Have an operating temperature range from -34 to 165 degrees F 6. Have a retroreflective white sheeting background
87-14.02B Housings Housing must: 1. Be weatherproof (NEMA 3R or better) and vandal resistant 2. Be made of 0.09-inch-gauge welded aluminum with the outer surfaces being UV resistant 3. Have the manufacturer's name, model number, serial number, date of manufacture, rated voltage and rated current marked inside 4. Have the internal components easily accessible for field repair without removal of the sign
87-14.02C Display Windows Display window consists of a cover, LED character display, and dimming control. Character display and cover must deflect together without damage to the internal electronics and speed detection components. Cover must be: 1. Vandal resistant and shock absorbent 2. Field replaceable with the removal of external stainless-steel, tamper proof fasteners
Cover must be made of a minimum 0.25-inch-thick, shatter-resistant polycarbonate.
64 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
LED character display must: 1. Consist of two 7-segment, solid-state, numeric characters, which must: 1.1. Be a minimum 15 inches in height 1.2. Be visible and legible from a minimum distance of 1500 feet and legible from a minimum distance of 750 feet 1.3. Consist of a minimum 16 LEDs, which must: 1.3.1. Be amber and have a wavelength from 590 to 600 nm and rated for minimum 100,000 hours 1.3.2. Must maintain a minimum 85 percent of the initial light output after 48 months of continuous use over the temperature range 2. Be capable of displaying the detected vehicle speed within 1 second 3. Remain blank when no vehicles are detected within the radar detection zone 4. Have the option to flash the pre-set speed limit when the detected vehicle speed is 5 miles higher than the pre-set speed 5. Be viewable only by the approaching traffic
Dimming control must: 1. Automatically adjust the character light intensity to provide optimum character visibility and legibility under all ambient lighting conditions 2. Have minimum 3 manual dimming modes of different intensities
87-14.02D Radar Units Radar unit must: 1. Be able to detect up to 3 lanes of approaching traffic 2. Operate with an internal, low power, 24.159 GHz (K-band) 3. Be FCC approved Part 15 certified 4. Have a speed accuracy of ±1 mph 5 Have a maximum 15 W power consumption
Replace 87-19 with: 10-19-18 87-19 FIBER OPTIC CABLE SYSTEMS 87-19.01 GENERAL 87-19.01A Summary Section 87-19 includes specifications for constructing fiber optic cable systems. A fiber optic cable system includes: 1. Conduit and accessories 2. Vaults 3. Warning tape 4. Fiber optic cables 5. Fiber optic splice enclosures 6. Fiber distribution units 7. Fiber optic markers 8. Fiber optic connectors and couplers
65 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
The components of a fiber optic system are shown on the project plans. 87-19.01B Definitions Reserved 87-19.01C Submittals At least 15 days before cable installation, submit: 1. Manufacturer’s procedures for pulling fiber optic cable 2. Test reports from a laboratory accredited to International Standards Organization/International Electrotechnical Commission 17025 by the American Association for Laboratory Accreditation (A2LA) or the ANSI-ASQ National Accreditation Board (ANAB) for: 2.1. Water penetration 2.2. Cable temperature cycling 2.3. Cable impact 2.4. Cable tensile loading and fiber strain 2.5. Cable compressive loading 2.6. Compound flow 2.7. Cyclic flexing 3. Proof of calibration for the test equipment including: 3.1. Name of calibration facility 3.2. Date of calibration 3.3. Type of equipment, model number and serial number 3.4. Calibration result
Submit optical time-domain reflectometer data files for each test in a Microsoft Excel format. After performing the optical time-domain reflectometer test and the power meter and light source test, submit within 4 business days a hard copy and electronic format: 1. Cable Verification Worksheet 2. Segment Verification Worksheet 3. Link Loss Budget Worksheet
The worksheets are available at the Division of Construction website. 87-19.01D Quality Assurance 87-19.01D(1) General Reserved 87-19.01D(2) Quality Control Notify the Engineer 4 business days before performing field tests. Include exact location of the system or components to be tested. Do not proceed with the testing until authorized. Perform each test in the presence of the Engineer. The optical time-domain reflectometer test consists of: 1. Inspecting the cable segment for physical damage. 2. Measuring the attenuation levels for wavelengths of 1310 and 1550 nm in both directions for each fiber using the optical time-domain reflectometer. 3. Comparing the test results with the data sheet provided with the shipment. If there are attenuation deviations greater than 5 percent, the test will be considered unsatisfactory and the cable segment will be rejected. The failure of any single fiber
66 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
is a cause for rejection of the entire segment. Replace any rejected cable segments and repeat the test.
The power meter and light source test consists of: 1. Testing each fiber in a link using a light source at one end of the link and a power meter at the other end 2. Measuring and recording the power loss for wavelengths of 1310 and 1550 nm in both directions
Index matching gel is not allowed. Installation and splicing of the fiber optic cable system must be performed by a certified fiber optic installer. The optical time-domain reflectometer test and the power meter and light source test must be performed by a certified fiber optic technician. The certification for the fiber optic installer and fiber optic technician must be from an organization recognized by the International Certification Accreditations Council and must be current throughout the duration of the project. 87-19.02 MATERIALS 87-19.02A General All metal components of the fiber optic cable system must be corrosion resistant. All connectors must be factory-installed and tested. Patch cords, pigtails, and connectors must comply with ANSI/TIA-568. Pigtails must have a minimum 80 N pull out strength. A splice cassette may be used in place of a pigtail and a splice tray. Each cable reel must have a weatherproof label or tag with information specified in ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 including: 1. Contractor's name 2. Contract number 3. Number of fibers 4. Cable attenuation loss per fiber at 1310 and 1550 nm
The labeled or tagged information must also be in a shipping record in a weatherproof envelope. The envelope must be removed only by the Engineer. 87-19.02B Vaults A vault must: 1. Comply with section 86-1.02C and AASHTO HS 20-44, and load tested under AASHTO M 306. 2. Be a minimum: 2.1. 4 feet wide by 4 feet high by 4 feet long nominal inside dimensions for box type. 2.2. 4 feet high by 4 feet outside diameter for round type. 3. Have a minimum access of: 3.1. 30 inches diameter for round type. 3.2. 3 feet wide by 3 feet long for box type. 4. Be precast either modular or monolithic. 5. Have cable racks installed on the interior sides. A rack must:
67 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
5.1. Be fabricated from ASTM A36 steel plate. 5.2. Support a minimum of 100 pounds per rack arm. 5.3. Support a minimum of 4 splice enclosures and a minimum of 4 cables with a minimum slack of 50 feet each. 5.4. Be hot-dip galvanized after manufacturing. 5.5. Be bonded and grounded. 6. Have a minimum: 6.1. Two 4-inch diameter knockouts on each side for box type. 6.2. Two 4-inch diameter knockouts placed every 90 degrees for round type. 7. Have a minimum 2-inch-diameter drain hole at the center of base.
Entry points for knockouts must not cause the cable to exceed its maximum bend radius. The access cover must: 1. Be a two-piece torsion-assisted sections or a minimum 30-inch-diameter cast iron. 2. Have inset lifting pull slots. 3. Have markings CALTRANS and FIBER OPTIC .
87-19.02C Fiber Optic Cable The fiber optic cable must: 1. Comply with 7 CFR parts 1755.900, 1755.901, and 1755.902, and ANSI/ICEA S-87- 640 2. Be a singlemode, zero-dispersion, and have non-gel loose type buffer tubes 3. Have no splices 4. Have a Type H or Type M outer jacket 5. Be shipped on a reel 6. Have 10 feet of length on each end of the cable accessible for testing
87-19.02D Fiber Optic Splice Enclosures A fiber optic splice enclosure must: 1. Not exceed 36 inches in length, 8 inches in width, and 8 inches in height 2. Be made of thermoplastic material, weather proof, chemical and UV resistant, and re-sealable 3. Accommodate a minimum of 8 internal splice trays 4. Have from 1/4 to 1 inch in diameter cable entry ports 5. Have brackets, clips and cable ties 6. Have means to anchor the dielectric member of the fiber optic cable 7. Include grounding hardware
87-19.02E Fiber Distribution Units The fiber distribution unit consists of a housing, a patch panel, a 12-multicolor pigtail, and a splice tray. The fiber distribution unit must be self-contained and pre-assembled. The housing must: 1. Be a 19-inch rack-mountable modular-metal enclosure 2. Be a one rack unit 3. Have cable clamps to secure buffer tube to the chassis
68 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
4. Have cable accesses with rubber grommets or similar material to prevent the cable from coming in contact with the bare metal 5. Be weatherproof 6. Have a hinged top door with a latch or thumbscrew to hold it in the closed position
A patch panel must have a minimum of 12-singlefiber type connector sleeves. A pigtail must: 1. Be a simplex single mode fiber in a 900 µm tight buffer with a 12-inch-outer-diameter PVC jacket 2. Have a fiber optic connector attached on one end and bare fiber on the other end 3. Be at least 3 feet in length 4. Have the manufacturer's part number on the jacket
Pigtails must be single-fiber or ribbon type. 87-19.02F Patch Cords Patch cords must: 1. Be a singlemode fiber in a 900 µm tight buffer with a 0.12-inch-outer-diameter PVC jacket 2. Have fiber optic connectors attached on both ends 3. Be at least 6 feet in length 4. Have manufacturer's part number on the jacket
Duplex patch cords must be of round cable structure, and not have zip-cord structure. 87-19.02G Splice Trays Splice trays must: 1. Have brackets to spool incoming fibers a minimum of 2 turns. 2. Have means to secure and protect incoming buffer tubes, pigtails, and a minimum of 12 heat shrink fusion splices. 3. Be stackable. 4. Have a snap-on or hinged cover. The cover may be transparent.
87-19.02H Fiber Optic Markers Fiber optic markers must be: 1. Type K-2 (CA) object markers for vaults or pull boxes. 2. Disk markers for paved areas and transition points from unpaved to paved areas. The disk marker must be metallic, lead free and 4 inches in diameter, and must have a mounting stem at the center of the disk. The mounting stem must be a minimum 3 inches long and a minimum 0.70 inch in diameter. 3. Non-reflective Class 1, Type F, flexible post delineators for unpaved areas.
87-19.02I Fiber Optic Connectors and Couplers Connectors must be: 1. 0.1-inch ceramic ferrule pre-radiused type 2. Capped when not used
69 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Couplers must be made of the same material as the connector's housing and have ceramic sleeves. Singlemode fiber optic connectors must have a yellow strain relief boot or a yellow base. 87-19.03 CONSTRUCTION 87-19.03A General Perform the optical time-domain reflectometer test: 1. On the fiber optic cable upon its arrival to the job site and before its installation. Complete the Cable Verification Worksheet. Do not install the fiber optic cable until the Engineer's written approval is received. 2. After the fiber optic cable segments have been pulled, but before breakout and termination. Complete the Segment Verification Worksheet. 3. Once the passive cabling system has been installed and is ready for activation. If the measured individual fusion splice losses exceed -0.30 dB, re-splice and retest. At the conclusion of the optical time-domain reflectometer test, perform the power meter and light source test. If the measured link loss exceeds the calculated link loss, replace the unsatisfactory cable segments or splices and retest. Complete the Link Loss Budget Worksheet.
87-19.03B Vaults Installation Install a vault as shown and with the side facing the roadway a minimum of 2 feet from the edge of pavement or back of dike, away from traffic. Install the top of the vault flush with surrounding grade in paved areas and 2 inches above the surrounding grade in unpaved areas. Place 6 inches of minor concrete around vaults. In unpaved areas, finish top of concrete at a 2 percent slope away from cover. In paved areas, finish top of concrete to match existing slope. Bolt the steel cover to the vault when not working in it. 87-19.03C Fiber Optic Cable Installation Install fiber optic cable by a certified installer or a representative from the fiber optic cable manufacturer during installation. When using mechanical aids to install fiber optic cable: 1. Maintain a cable bend radius at least twenty times the outside diameter of the cable 2. Use cable grips having a ball bearing swivel 3. Use a pulling force on a cable not to exceed 500 pound-foot or manufacturer's recommended pulling tension, whichever is less
When installing the cable using the air blown method, the cable must withstand a static air pressure of 110 psi. Lubricate the cable using a lubricant recommended by the cable manufacturer. Install fiber optic cable without splices except where shown. Provide a minimum of 65 feet of slack for each fiber optic cable at each vault. Divide the slack equally on each side of the splice enclosure. Install tracer wires in the fiber optic conduits and innerducts as shown. Provide a minimum 5 feet of slack tracer wire in each pull box and vault from each direction. You may splice tracer wire at intervals of not less than 500 feet and only inside vaults or pull boxes.
70 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
If a fiber optic cable and tracer wire is installed in an innerduct, pulling a separate fiber optic cable into a spare duct to replace damaged fiber will not be allowed. Apply a non-hygroscopic filling compound to fiber optic cable openings. Seal the ends of conduit and innerducts after cables are installed. Install strain relief for fiber optic cable entering a fiber optic enclosure. Identify fibers and cables by direct labeling, metal tags, or bands fastened in such a way that they will not move. Use mechanical methods for labeling. Provide identification on each fiber optic cable or each group of fiber optic cables in each vault and at the end of terminated fibers. Fiber optic cable must be identified as shown in the following table:
71 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Cable Identification a Sequenc Descriptio Code Numbers e order n of character s 1 Fiber type S: Singlemode 1 2 Fiber ###: Example 048 3 count 3 Begin T: TMC 1 or 2 point H: Hub V: Video Node D: Data Node C: Cable Node TV: Camera CM: CMS E: Traffic Signal RM: Ramp Meter TM: Traffic Monitoring/ Count Station/Vehicle Count Station (VDS, TMS) HA: Highway Advisory Radio EM: Extinguishable Message Sign RW: Roadway Weather Information System WM: Weigh In Motion WS: Weigh-Station Bypass System SV: Vault SC : Splice Cabinet 4 Begin AA or AAA: Examples: Orange (ORA), San Mateo (SM) 2 or 3 point county abbreviati on 5 Begin ###: Examples: 005, 082, 114 3 point route number 6 Begin #####: 02470 (example 024.70): Actual PM value to the 5 point post 1/100 value mile 7 End Point In the same way as for Begin Point 1 or 2 8 End point In the same way as for Begin Point County Abbreviation 2 or 3 county abbreviati on
72 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
9 End point In the same way as Begin Point Route Number 3 route number 10 End point In the same way as Begin Point Post Mile 5 post mile aCable identification example: The cable code S 048 SV SM 084 02470 SV SC 082 02510 describes a singlemode, 48 strand, cable starting at a fiber optic vault in San Mateo County on Route 84 at post mile 24.70, and ending at another fiber optic vault in Santa Clara County on Route 82 at post mile 25.10.
Place labels on the cables at the following points: 1. Fiber optic vault and pull box entrances and exits 2. Splice enclosures entrance and exit 3. Fiber distribution unit entrance
Lace fiber optic cable inside controller cabinets and secure to the cage. Support the fiber optic cable within 6 inches from a termination and every 2 feet. Secure fiber optic cables to the cable racks. Store excess cable in a figure 8 fashion. 87-19.03D Fiber Optic Cable Splices Use fusion splicing for fiber optic cables. Splice single-buffer tube cable to multi-buffer tube cable using the mid-span access method under manufacturer's instructions. Any mid-span access splice or fiber distribution unit termination must involve only those fibers being spliced as shown. Place fiber splices in the splice enclosures installed in the vaults. 87-19.03E Splice Enclosures Installation Maintain an equal amount of slack on each side of the splice enclosure. Secure the fiber optic splices in splice tray. Secure the splice trays to the inner enclosure. Label cables and buffer tubes. Do not seal fiber splice enclosure until authorized and the power meter and light source test is performed. Seal the enclosure under manufacturer's instructions. Flash test the outer enclosure under manufacturer's instructions in the presence of the Engineer. Visually inspect the enclosure. If bubbles are present, identify the locations where the bubbles are present, take corrective actions and repeat the flash test until no bubbles are present. Attach the splice enclosure to the side wall of a vault or hub with a minimum 2 feet distance between the ground and the bottom of the enclosure. Secure fiber optic cables to the chassis using cable clamps for fiber optic units. Connect a minimum of one bonding conductor to a grounding electrode after mounting the fiber optic enclosure to the wall. If there are multiple bonding conductors, organize the conductors in a neat way. 87-19.03F Fiber Optic Distribution Unit Installation Spool incoming buffer tubes 2 feet in the splice tray and expose 1 foot of individual fibers. Maintain a minimum 2-inch-bend radius during and after installation in the splice tray. Splice incoming fibers in the splice tray.
73 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Restrain each fiber in the splice tray. Do not apply stress on the fiber when located in its final position. Secure buffer tubes near the entrance of the splice tray. Secure splice trays under manufacturer's instructions. Label splice tray after splicing is completed. Install patch cords in fiber distribution units and patch panels. Permanently label each cord and each connector in the panel with the system as shown. 87-19.03G Fiber Optic Markers Installation Install fiber optic markers at 12-inch offset on the side furthest away from the edge of travel way: 1. For fiber optic cable at 500 feet apart in areas where the distance between vaults or pull boxes is greater than 500 feet 2. Adjacent to vaults and pull boxes 3. For fiber optic cable turns at: 3.1. Beginning of the turn 3.2. Middle of the arc 3.3. End of the turn
When a fiber optic cable crosses a roadway or ramp, install a disk marker over the conduit trench on: 1. Every shoulder within 6 inches from the edge of pavement 2. Delineated median 3. Each side of a barrier
Install markers under section 81 except each retroreflective face must be parallel to the road centerline and facing away from traffic. 87-19.04 PAYMENT Not Used
Replace 87-20 with: 10-19-18 87-20 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 87-20.01 GENERAL Section 87-20 includes specifications for providing temporary electrical systems. Obtain the Department's authorization for the type of temporary electrical system and its installation method. A temporary system must operate on a continuous, 24-hour basis. A temporary electrical system must have a primary power source and a back-up power source from the following power sources: 1. Commercial power from a utility company 2. Generator system 3. Photovoltaic system
87-20.02 MATERIALS 87-20.02A General Material and equipment may be new or used.
74 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Temporary wood poles must comply with section 48-6. The components of a temporary system are shown on the project plans. If you use Type UF-B cable, the minimum conductor size must be no. 12. 87-20.02B Temporary Flashing Beacon Systems A temporary flashing beacon system consists of a flashing beacon system, wood post, and a power source. The system must comply with the specifications for a flashing beacon system in section 87-7, except it may be mounted on a wood post or a trailer. 87-20.02C Temporary Lighting Systems A temporary lighting system consists of a lighting system, a power source, and wood poles. The system must comply with the specifications for a lighting system in section 87-2, except it may be mounted on a wood pole or a trailer. 87-20.02D Temporary Signal Systems A temporary signal system consists of a signal and lighting system, wood poles and posts, and a power source. System must comply with the specifications for a signal and lighting system in section 87- 4, except: 1. Signal heads may be mounted on a wood pole, mast arm, tether wire, or a trailer 2. Flashing beacons may be mounted on a wood post, or a trailer
87-20.02E Generators A generator must: 1. Be 120 V(ac) or 120/240 V(ac), 60 Hz, 2.5 kW minimum, continuous-duty type 2. Be powered by a gasoline, LPG, or diesel engine operating at approximately 1,800 rpm with an automatic oil feed 3. Be equipped to provide automatic start-stop operation with a 12 V starting system 4. Have generator output circuits that have overcurrent protection with a maximum setting of 15 A 5. Have enough fuel storage to operate when it is unattended 6. Have a spark arrester complying with Pub Cont Code § 4442
A back-up power source must: 1. Have an automatic transfer switch 2. Start automatically and transfer the system load upon reaching the operating voltage, in the event of a power source failure
87-20.02F Automatic Transfer Switches An automatic transfer switch must provide: 1. Line voltage monitoring in the event of a power outage that signals the back-up power source to start 2. Start delay, adjustable from 0 to 6 seconds, to prevent starting if the power outage is only momentary and a stop delay, adjustable from 0 to 8 minutes, to allow the back- up power source to unload.
75 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
3. Transfer delay from 0 to 120 seconds to allow the back-up power source to stabilize before connecting to the load and retransfer delay from 0 to 32 minutes to allow the line voltage to stabilize. 4. Mechanical interlock to prevent an application of power to the load from both sources and to prevent backfeeding from the back-up power source to the primary power source.
87-20.03 CONSTRUCTION 87-20.03A General Provide electrical and telecommunication services for temporary systems. Do not use existing services unless authorized. Provide power for the temporary electrical systems. Commercial power must be 120 V(ac) or 120/240 V(ac) single phase. Make arrangements with the utility company for providing service. Protect the power source in a locked enclosure. Provide keys to all locks to the Engineer. Install conductors and cables in a conduit, suspended from wood poles at least 25 feet above the roadway, or use direct burial conductors and cables. You may saw slots across paved areas for burial conductors and cables. Install conduit outside the paved area at a minimum of 12 inches below grade for Type 1 and 2 conduit and at a minimum of 18 inches below grade for Type 3 conduit. Install direct burial conductors and cables outside the paved area at a minimum depth of 24 inches below grade. Place the portions of the conductors installed on the face of wood poles in either Type 1, 2, or 3 conduit between the point 10 feet above grade at the pole and the pull box. The conduit between the pole and the pull box must be buried at a depth of at least 18 inches below grade. Place conductors across structures in a Type 1, 2, or 3 conduit. Attach the conduit to the outside face of the railing. Mount the photoelectric unit at the top of the standard or wood post. You may abandon in place conductors and cables in sawed slots or in conduit installed below the ground surface. 87-20.03B Temporary Flashing Beacon Systems Protect each flashing beacon with a fused splice connector on the line side. Wherever conductors are run overhead, install the splice connector in the line side outside of the control assembly. 87-20.03C Temporary Lighting Systems Protect each luminaire with a fused splice connector on the line side. Wherever conductors are run overhead, install the fuse splice connectors in the line side before entering the mast arm. 87-20.03D Temporary Signal Systems You may splice conductors that run to a terminal compartment or a signal head on a pole to the through conductors of the same phase in a pull box adjacent to the pole. Do not splice conductors or cables except in a pull box or in a NEMA 3R enclosure. The Department provides the timing for the temporary signal. Maintain the temporary signal except for the Department-furnished controller assembly.
76 REVISED STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
87-20.04 PAYMENT Not Used
Replace item 7 in the list in the 2nd paragraph of section 87-21.03B(2) with: 10-19-18 7. Camera system
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
DIVISION XI MATERIALS 90 CONCRETE 10-19-18 10-19-18 Delete the 2nd paragraph of section 90-3.02A.
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
96 GEOSYNTHETICS 10-19-18 Replace the 3rd table in the 3rd paragraph of section 96-1.02R with:
10-19-18 Cushion Fabric Requirement Test Quality characteristic Class Class Class Class Class Class 60 method 10 12 16 24 32 Mass per unit area (oz/sq yd) ASTM 10 12 16 24 32 60 D5261 Grab tensile break strength ASTM 230 300 370 450 500 630 (min, lb) D4632 Grab tensile break elongation ASTM 50 (min, %) D4632 Puncture strength (min, lb) ASTM 700 800 900 1100 1700 2400 D6241 Trapezoidal tear strength (min, ASTM 95 115 145 200 215 290 lb) D4533 UV resistance (min, %) ASTM 70 D7238
77
This page intentionally blank.
APPENDICES
APPENDIX A - FORM OF AGREEMENT
CONTRACT
for the Construction of: BRIDGE STREET BRIDGE REHABILITATION, PW 2020-1 FEDERAL PROJECT #BHLO-5199(027)
THIS AGREEMENT , made and entered into this day of , 2018, by and between the CITY OF ARROYO GRANDE , a municipal corporation of the State of California, hereinafter designated City, party of the first part, and
WITNESSETH : That the parties hereto do mutually agree as follows:
ARTICLE I. Scope of Work . For and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned to be made and performed by City, Contractor agrees with City to furnish all materials, equipment and labor and construct facilities for City, and to perform and complete in a good and workmanlike manner all the work pertaining thereto shown on the plans and described in the specifications hereto attached, and to furnish at his own proper cost and expense all tools, equipment, labor, and materials necessary therefore, except such materials as in the said specifications are stipulated to be furnished by City, and to do everything required by this Contract and the said specifications and plans, and the requirements of the Engineer under them, to wit:
ARTICLE II. Compensation and Payment . For furnishing all said equipment, materials and labor, performing demolition as required, and doing all the work contemplated and embraced in this Contract; and for all loss and damage arising out of the nature of the work aforesaid, or from the action of the elements or from any unforeseen difficulties which may arise or be encountered in the prosecution of the work until its acceptance by City, and for all risks of every description connected with the work; also for all expenses incurred by or in consequence of the suspension or discontinuance of work, except such as in the said specifications are expressly stipulated to be borne by City; and for well and faithfully completing the work and the whole thereof, in the manner shown and described in the said plans and specifications and in accordance with the requirements of the City Engineer under them, City will pay and Contractor shall receive as full compensation therefore the amounts for such work as installed for the unit prices bid therefore in accordance with the proposal of Contractor.
Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Agreement Sum, shall be paid by the City to the Contractor no sooner than thirty-five (35) days after a Notice of Completion has been recorded, unless otherwise stipulated in the Notice of Completion, provided the
1 APPENDICES work has then been completed, the Agreement fully performed, and a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the City.
This Agreement is subject to the provisions of Article 1.7 (commencing at Section 20104.50) of Division 2, Part 3 of the Public Contract Code regarding prompt payment of contractors by local governments. Article 1.7 mandates certain procedures for the payment of undisputed and properly submitted payment requests within 30 days after receipt, for the review of payment requests, for notice to Contractor of improper payment requests, and provides for the payment of interest on progress payment requests which are not timely made in accordance with that Article. This Agreement hereby incorporates the provisions of Article 1.7 as though fully set forth herein.
ARTICLE III. Full Performance . City hereby promises and agrees with said Contractor to employ, and does hereby employ, said Contractor to provide the materials and to do the work according to the terms and conditions herein contained and referred to, for the prices aforesaid, and hereby contracts to pay the same at the time, in the manner and upon the conditions set forth in the specifications; and the said parties for themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, do hereby agree to full performance of the covenants herein contained.
ARTICLE IV. Contract Documents . Contract Documents shall consist of The Notice to Contractors, the Statement of Prevailing Wages, the Bid Requirements, the Contract Bid, the Bond for Faithful Performance, the Bond for Materials and Laborers, the Contract Agreement, the Standard Specifications & Engineering Standards, the Special Provisions and the Project Plans mentioned therein and titled “BRIDGE STREET BRIDGE REHABILITATION, PW 2020-1, FEDERAL CONTRACT #BHLO-5199(027) ” all of which are hereto attached and are hereby incorporated in and made a part of this Contract.
ARTICLE V. Bonds . Contractor shall forthwith furnish in triplicate, a faithful performance bond in an amount equal to 100% of the contract price and a labor and materials bond in an amount equal to 100% of the contract price, both bonds to be written by a surety company acceptable to City and in the form prescribed by law.
ARTICLE VI. Time for Completion . All of Contractor’s work on the Project shall be completed within durations established for the individual activities as set forth in the Project Construction Schedule. All work shall commence ten (10) working days from the start of contract time. Contractor shall refer to the invitations for bids, and Project Plans and Specifications, all of which, as set forth below, are incorporated herein by reference, for contractual obligations regarding individual activity durations. The aggregate sum total work of all individual Prime Contractors to the City comprises the entire “Project” and shall be commenced and completed in conformance with the Project Construction Schedule. The entire Project shall be completed within 140 consecutive working days.
ARTICLE VII. Liquidated Damages . Pursuant to Government Code Section 53069.85, if work is not completed within the contract time or in strict accordance with the Project Schedule, it is understood, acknowledged and agreed that the City will suffer damage. It
2 APPENDICES is therefore agreed that the Contractor shall pay to the City the sum of Six Thousand and Eight Hundred dollars ($6,800.00) for each and every calendar day of delay beyond the Contract Time, or beyond any completion schedule, construction schedule or Project milestones established in or pursuant to the Project Schedule, or beyond the time indicated in the Project Schedule for any individual Contract activity.
Contractor expressly understands, acknowledges and agrees that such liquidated damages can and shall be imposed if the Contractor does not meet each and every aspect of any activity schedule, completion schedule, construction schedule or Project milestones established in or pursuant to the Project Schedule. If the City accepts work or makes any payment under this Agreement after a default by reason of delays, the acceptance of such work and/or payment(s) shall in no respect constitute a waiver or modification of any provisions regarding Contract Time, a completion schedule, the Project Schedule or the accrual of liquidated damages. In the event the same is not paid, the Contractor further agrees that the City may deduct the amount thereof from any money due or that may become due the Contractor under the Agreement. This paragraph does not exclude recovery of damages under provisions of the Contract Documents, and is expressly in addition to the City’s ability to seek other damages.
Contractor is to refer to the Project Construction Schedule for duration of individual activities. Liquidated damages may be assessed if any individual activity duration exceeds the time indicated for that activity on the Project Construction Schedule.
ARTICLE VIII. Indemnification . Contractor shall indemnify the City as set forth in Section 7-1.05 of the Standard Specifications and Engineering Standards.
ARTICLE IX. Insurance . Contractor shall provide insurance as set forth in Section 7- 1.06 of the Standard Specifications and Engineering Standards. Maintenance of required insurance coverage is a material element of this Contract and failure to maintain or renew coverage or to provide evidence of renewal shall be a material breach of this Contract.
ARTICLE X. Governing Documents . It is further expressly agreed by and between the parties hereto that should there be any conflict between the terms of this instrument and the bid or proposal therefore, then this instrument shall control and nothing herein shall be considered as an acceptance of the said terms of said bid or proposal conflicting herewith.
ARTICLE XI. Compliance with Statutes and Regulations . Contractor will be knowledgeable of and will comply with all applicable federal, state, county and city statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances and orders.
ARTICLE XII. Notice . All notices or other official correspondence relating to contractual matters between the parties hereto shall be made by personal service or by first class mail, postage prepaid, addressed to the parties as follows:
3 APPENDICES
City: City Clerk City of Arroyo Grande 300 East Branch Street Arroyo Grande, California 93420
Contractor: ______
ARTICLE XIII. Severability . If any part of this Contract is held invalid by a court of competent jurisdiction, the balance shall retain its full force and effect.
ARTICLE XIV. Governing Law; Jurisdiction . This Contract will be administered and interpreted under the laws of the State of California. Jurisdiction of any litigation arising from the Contract will be in San Luis Obispo County, California.
ARTICLE XV. Authorization . All officers and individuals executing this and other documents on behalf of the respective parties hereby certify and warrant that they have the capacity and have been duly authorized to execute said documents on behalf of the entities indicated.
ARTICLE XVI. Provisions Required by Law. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in this Contract, including but not limited to the following statutorily required provisions, shall be deemed to be inserted herein and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise any such provision is not inserted, or is not currently inserted, then upon application of either party the Contract shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction.
The following statutorily required provisions hereby apply to this contract:
Record Audit. In accordance with Government Code, Section 8546.7, records of both the City and the Contractor shall be subject to examination and audit by the Auditor General for a period of three (3) years after final payment.
Retention of Securities. Public Contract Code Section 22300 permits the substitution of securities for any monies withheld by a public agency to ensure performance under a contract, at the request and expense of the Contractor.
Claims. In accordance with the requirements of Public Contract Code Section 9204(e), a copy of Public Contract Code Section 9204 is attached hereto and made a part hereof.
Prevailing Wages and DIR Registration . In accordance with California Labor Code Section 1725.5, Contractors and Subcontractors (as defined by California Labor Code
4 APPENDICES
Section 1722.1) bidding on or engaging in the performance of any Public Works contracts in California shall be registered with the Department of Industrial Relation.
In accordance with California Labor Code Section 1770 and 1773, the City has determined that prevailing wage rates apply to this project. Copies of the prevailing rates of per diem wages applicable to this Contract are available from the California Division of Labor Statistics and Research at www.dir.ca.gov/dslr/PWP/index.htm or 455 Golden Gate Ave. 9th Floor, San Francisco, CA 94102. Any employee whose type of work is not covered by any of the classified wage rates shall be paid not less than the rate of wage listed for the classification which most nearly corresponds to the type of work performed.
Pursuant to California Labor Code Section 1775, the Contractor shall forfeit no more than $200 per calendar day, or portion of a day, for each worker paid less than the prevailing rates for such work or craft, and the penalty shall be imposed and distributed pursuant to Section 1775.
The following Labor Code sections are hereby referenced and made a part of this Agreement:
1. Section 1775 - Penalty for Failure to Comply with Prevailing Wage Rates. 3. Section 1777.5 - Apprenticeship Requirements. 4. Section 1813 - Penalty for Failure to Pay Overtime. 5. Sections 1810 and 1811 - Working Hour Restrictions. 6. Section 1776 - Payroll Records. 7. Section 1773.8 - Travel and Subsistence Pay.
The City will not recognize any claims for additional compensation because of the payment of the wages set forth in the Contract.
In accordance with the requirements of Labor Code Section 1771.4(a)(1), this project is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the Department of Industrial Relations
In accordance with the provisions of the California Labor Code, contractors or subcontractors may not perform work on a public works project with a subcontractor who is ineligible to perform work on a public project pursuant to Section 1777.1 or Section 1777.17 of the California Labor Code. Any contract on a public works project entered into between a contractor and a debarred subcontractor is void as a matter of law. A debarred subcontractor may not receive any public money for performing work as a subcontractor on a public works contract. Any public money that is paid or may have been paid to a debarred subcontractor by a contractor on the Project shall be returned to the Agency. The Contractor shall be responsible for the payment of wages to workers of a debarred subcontractor who has been allowed to work on the Project.
5 APPENDICES
IN WITNESS WHEREOF: The parties hereto have caused this Contract to be executed the day and year first above written.
CITY OF ARROYO GRANDE CONTRACTOR
By: By: Mayor
Title ATTEST:
Director of Legislative & Information Services / City Clerk
6 APPENDICES
Attachment 1: Public Contract Code Section 9204
9204.
(a) The Legislature finds and declares that it is in the best interests of the state and its citizens to ensure that all construction business performed on a public works project in the state that is complete and not in dispute is paid in full and in a timely manner.
(a) Notwithstanding any other law, including, but not limited to, Article 7.1 (commencing with Section 10240) of Chapter 1 of Part 2, Chapter 10 (commencing with Section 19100) of Part 2, and Article 1.5 (commencing with Section 20104) of Chapter 1 of Part 3, this section shall apply to any claim by a contractor in connection with a public works project.
(b) For purposes of this section:
(1) “Claim” means a separate demand by a contractor sent by registered mail or certified mail with return receipt requested, for one or more of the following:
(A) A time extension, including, without limitation, for relief from damages or penalties for delay assessed by a public entity under a contract for a public works project.
(B) Payment by the public entity of money or damages arising from work done by, or on behalf of, the contractor pursuant to the contract for a public works project and payment for which is not otherwise expressly provided or to which the claimant is not otherwise entitled.
(C) Payment of an amount that is disputed by the public entity.
(2) “Contractor” means any type of contractor within the meaning of Chapter 9 (commencing with Section 7000) of Division 3 of the Business and Professions Code who has entered into a direct contract with a public entity for a public works project.
(3) (A) “Public entity” means, without limitation, except as provided in subparagraph (B), a state agency, department, office, division, bureau, board, or commission, the California State University, the University of California, a city, including a charter city, county, including a charter county, city and county, including a charter city and county, district, special district, public authority, political subdivision, public corporation, or nonprofit transit corporation wholly owned by a public agency and formed to carry out the purposes of the public agency. (B) “Public entity” shall not include the following:
7 APPENDICES
(i) The Department of Water Resources as to any project under the jurisdiction of that department.
(ii) The Department of Transportation as to any project under the jurisdiction of that department.
(iii) The Department of Parks and Recreation as to any project under the jurisdiction of that department.
(iv) The Department of Corrections and Rehabilitation with respect to any project under its jurisdiction pursuant to Chapter 11 (commencing with Section 7000) of Title 7 of Part 3 of the Penal Code.
(v) The Military Department as to any project under the jurisdiction of that department.
(vi) The Department of General Services as to all other projects.
(vii) The High-Speed Rail Authority.
(4) “Public works project” means the erection, construction, alteration, repair, or improvement of any public structure, building, road, or other public improvement of any kind.
(5) “Subcontractor” means any type of contractor within the meaning of Chapter 9 (commencing with Section 7000) of Division 3 of the Business and Professions Code who either is in direct contract with a contractor or is a lower tier subcontractor.
(d) (1) (A) Upon receipt of a claim pursuant to this section, the public entity to which the claim applies shall conduct a reasonable review of the claim and, within a period not to exceed 45 days, shall provide the claimant a written statement identifying what portion of the claim is disputed and what portion is undisputed. Upon receipt of a claim, a public entity and a contractor may, by mutual agreement, extend the time period provided in this subdivision.
(B) The claimant shall furnish reasonable documentation to support the claim.
(C) If the public entity needs approval from its governing body to provide the claimant a written statement identifying the disputed portion and the undisputed portion of the claim, and the governing body does not meet within the 45 days or within the mutually agreed to extension of time following receipt of a claim sent by registered mail or certified
8 APPENDICES
mail, return receipt requested, the public entity shall have up to three days following the next duly publicly noticed meeting of the governing body after the 45-day period, or extension, expires to provide the claimant a written statement identifying the disputed portion and the undisputed portion.
(D) Any payment due on an undisputed portion of the claim shall be processed and made within 60 days after the public entity issues its written statement. If the public entity fails to issue a written statement, paragraph (3) shall apply.
(2) (A) If the claimant disputes the public entity’s written response, or if the public entity fails to respond to a claim issued pursuant to this section within the time prescribed, the claimant may demand in writing an informal conference to meet and confer for settlement of the issues in dispute. Upon receipt of a demand in writing sent by registered mail or certified mail, return receipt requested, the public entity shall schedule a meet and confer conference within 30 days for settlement of the dispute.
(B) Within 10 business days following the conclusion of the meet and confer conference, if the claim or any portion of the claim remains in dispute, the public entity shall provide the claimant a written statement identifying the portion of the claim that remains in dispute and the portion that is undisputed. Any payment due on an undisputed portion of the claim shall be processed and made within 60 days after the public entity issues its written statement. Any disputed portion of the claim, as identified by the contractor in writing, shall be submitted to nonbinding mediation, with the public entity and the claimant sharing the associated costs equally. The public entity and claimant shall mutually agree to a mediator within 10 business days after the disputed portion of the claim has been identified in writing. If the parties cannot agree upon a mediator, each party shall select a mediator and those mediators shall select a qualified neutral third party to mediate with regard to the disputed portion of the claim. Each party shall bear the fees and costs charged by its respective mediator in connection with the selection of the neutral mediator. If mediation is unsuccessful, the parts of the claim remaining in dispute shall be subject to applicable procedures outside this section.
(C) For purposes of this section, mediation includes any nonbinding process, including, but not limited to, neutral evaluation or a dispute review board, in which an independent third party or board assists the parties in dispute resolution through negotiation or by issuance of an evaluation. Any mediation utilized shall conform to the timeframes in this section.
9 APPENDICES
(D) Unless otherwise agreed to by the public entity and the contractor in writing, the mediation conducted pursuant to this section shall excuse any further obligation under Section 20104.4 to mediate after litigation has been commenced.
(E) This section does not preclude a public entity from requiring arbitration of disputes under private arbitration or the Public Works Contract Arbitration Program, if mediation under this section does not resolve the parties’ dispute.
(3) Failure by the public entity to respond to a claim from a contractor within the time periods described in this subdivision or to otherwise meet the time requirements of this section shall result in the claim being deemed rejected in its entirety. A claim that is denied by reason of the public entity’s failure to have responded to a claim, or its failure to otherwise meet the time requirements of this section, shall not constitute an adverse finding with regard to the merits of the claim or the responsibility or qualifications of the claimant.
(4) Amounts not paid in a timely manner as required by this section shall bear interest at 7 percent per annum.
(5) If a subcontractor or a lower tier subcontractor lacks legal standing to assert a claim against a public entity because privity of contract does not exist, the contractor may present to the public entity a claim on behalf of a subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor. A subcontractor may request in writing, either on his or her own behalf or on behalf of a lower tier subcontractor, that the contractor present a claim for work which was performed by the subcontractor or by a lower tier subcontractor on behalf of the subcontractor. The subcontractor requesting that the claim be presented to the public entity shall furnish reasonable documentation to support the claim. Within 45 days of receipt of this written request, the contractor shall notify the subcontractor in writing as to whether the contractor presented the claim to the public entity and, if the original contractor did not present the claim, provide the subcontractor with a statement of the reasons for not having done so.
(e) The text of this section or a summary of it shall be set forth in the plans or specifications for any public works project that may give rise to a claim under this section.
(f) A waiver of the rights granted by this section is void and contrary to public policy, provided, however, that (1) upon receipt of a claim, the parties may mutually agree to waive, in writing, mediation and proceed directly to the commencement of a civil action or binding arbitration, as applicable; and (2) a public entity may prescribe
10 APPENDICES
reasonable change order, claim, and dispute resolution procedures and requirements in addition to the provisions of this section, so long as the contractual provisions do not conflict with or otherwise impair the timeframes and procedures set forth in this section.
(g) This section applies to contracts entered into on or after January 1, 2017.
(h) Nothing in this section shall impose liability upon a public entity that makes loans or grants available through a competitive application process, for the failure of an awardee to meet its contractual obligations.
(i) This section shall remain in effect only until January 1, 2020, and as of that date is repealed, unless a later enacted statute, that is enacted before January 1, 2020, deletes or extends that date.
11 APPENDICES
Attachment 2: Caltrans LAPM Exhibit 12-G - Required Federal-Aid Contract Language
12 APPENDICES Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-G Required Federal-Aid Contract Language
EXHIBIT 12-G R EQUIRED FEDERAL -AID CONTRACT LANGUAGE (For Local Assistance Construction Projects)
The following language must be incorporated into all Local Assistance Federal-aid construction contracts. The following language, with minor edits, was taken from the Code of Federal Regulations.
MAINTAIN RECORDS AND SUBMIT REPORTS DOCUMENTING YOUR PERFORMANCE UNDER THIS SECTION
1. DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISES (DBE) ...... 2 A. DBE COMMITMENT SUBMITTAL ...... 2 B. GOOD FAITH EFFORTS SUBMITTAL ...... 3 C. EXHIBIT 15-G - CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT DBE COMMITMENT ...... 3 D. SUBCONTRACTOR AND DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE RECORDS ...... 4 E. PERFORMANCE OF DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISES ...... 4 2. BID OPENING ...... 5 3. BID RIGGING ...... 5 4. CONTRACT AWARD ...... 5 5. CONTRACTOR LICENSE ...... 5 6. CHANGED CONDITIONS ...... 5 A. DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS ...... 5 B. SUSPENSIONS OF WORK ORDERED BY THE ENGINEER ...... 6 C. SIGNIFICANT CHANGES IN THE CHARACTER OF WORK ...... 6 7. BEGINNING OF WORK, TIME OF COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ...... 6 8. BUY AMERICA...... 7 FURNISH STEEL AND IRON MATERIALS TO BE INCORPORATED INTO THE WORK WITH CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE . STEEL STEEL AND IRON MATERIALS MUST BE PRODUCED IN THE U.S. EXCEPT ...... 7 9. QUALITY ASSURANCE ...... 7 10. PROMPT PAYMENT OF FUNDS WITHHELD TO SUBCONTRACTORS ...... 7 11. FORM FHWA-1273 REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS FEDERAL-AID CONTRACTS ...... 7 12. FEMALE AND MINORITY GOALS ...... 20 13. TITLE VI ASSURANCES ...... 21 14. USE OF UNITED STATES-FLAG VESSELS (CARGO PREFERENCE ACT) ...... 22 15. FEDERAL TRAINEE PROGRAM ...... 22
LPP 18-01 13 Page 1 of 23 January 2019 APPENDICES Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-G Required Federal-Aid Contract Language
1. DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISES (DBE) Under 49CFR26.13(b): The contractor, subrecipient or subcontractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance of this contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49CFR26 in the award and administration of DOT-assisted contracts. Failure by the contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this contract, which may result in the termination of this contract or such other remedy as the recipient deems appropriate. Take necessary and reasonable steps to ensure that DBEs have opportunity to participate in the contract (49CFR26). To ensure equal participation of DBEs provided in 49CFR26.5, the Agency shows a contract goal for DBEs. Make work available to DBEs and select work parts consistent with available DBE subcontractors and suppliers. Meet the DBE goal shown elsewhere in these special provisions or demonstrate that you made adequate good faith efforts to meet this goal. It is your responsibility to verify that the DBE firm is certified as DBE at date of bid opening. For a list of DBEs certified by the California Unified Certification Program, go to: http://www.dot.ca.gov/hq/bep/find_certified.htm . All DBE participation will count toward the California Department of Transportation’s federally mandated statewide overall DBE goal. Credit for materials or supplies you purchase from DBEs counts towards the goal in the following manner: • 100 percent counts if the materials or supplies are obtained from a DBE manufacturer. • 60 percent counts if the materials or supplies are obtained from a DBE regular dealer. • Only fees, commissions, and charges for assistance in the procurement and delivery of materials or supplies count if obtained from a DBE that is neither a manufacturer nor regular dealer. 49CFR26.55 defines "manufacturer" and "regular dealer." You receive credit towards the goal if you employ a DBE trucking company that performs a commercially useful function as defined in 49CFR26.55(d)(1) as follows: • The DBE must be responsible for the management and supervision of the entire trucking operation for which it is responsible on a particular contract, and there cannot be a contrived arrangement for the purpose of meeting DBE goals. • The DBE must itself own and operate at least one fully licensed, insured, and operational truck used on the contract. • The DBE receives credit for the total value of the transportation services it provides on the Contract using trucks it owns, insures, and operates using drivers it employs. • The DBE may lease trucks from another DBE firm, including an owner-operator who is certified as a DBE. The DBE who leases trucks from another DBE receives credit for the total value of the transportation services the lessee DBE provides on the Contract. • The DBE may lease trucks without drivers from a non-DBE truck leasing company. If the DBE leases trucks from a non-DBE truck leasing company and uses its own employees as drivers, it is entitled to credit for the total value of these hauling services. • A lease must indicate that the DBE has exclusive use of and control over the truck. This does not preclude the leased truck from working for others during the term of the lease with the consent of the DBE, so long as the lease gives the DBE absolute priority for use of the leased truck. Leased trucks must display the name and identification number of the DBE. a. DBE Commitment Submittal Submit the Exhibit 15-G Construction Contract DBE Commitment , included in the Bid book. If the form is not submitted with the bid, remove the form from the Bid book before submitting your bid. If the DBE Commitment form is not submitted with the bid, all bidders must complete and submit Exhibit 15-G to the Agency. The DBE Commitment form must be received by the Agency within five (5) days of bid opening.
LPP 18-01 14 Page 2 of 23 January 2019 APPENDICES Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-G Required Federal-Aid Contract Language
Submit written confirmation from each DBE stating that it is participating in the contract. Include confirmation with the DBE Commitment form. A copy of a DBE's quote will serve as written confirmation that the DBE is participating in the contract. If you do not submit the DBE Commitment form within the specified time, the Agency will find your bid nonresponsive. b. Good Faith Efforts Submittal Exhibit 15-H: Proposer/Contractor Good Faith Efforts is due to the local agency within five (5) days of bid opening. Days means calendar days. In computing any period of time described in this part, the day from which the period begins to run is not counted, and when the last day of the period is a Saturday, Sunday, or federal holiday, the period extends to the next day that is not a Saturday, Sunday, or federal holiday. Similarly, in circumstances where the recipient’s offices are closed for all or part of the last day, the period extends to the next on which the agency is open. Only good faith efforts directed towards obtaining participation and meeting or exceeding the DBE contract goal will be considered. Submittal of good faith efforts documentation within the specified time protects your eligibility for award of the contract in the event the Agency finds that the DBE goal has not been met. Good faith efforts documentation must include the following information and supporting documents, as necessary: 1. Items of work you have made available to DBE firms. Identify those items of work you might otherwise perform with your own forces and those items that have been broken down into economically feasible units to facilitate DBE participation. For each item listed, show the dollar value and percentage of the total contract. It is your responsibility to demonstrate that sufficient work to meet the goal was made available to DBE firms. 2. Names of certified DBEs and dates on which they were solicited to bid on the project. Include the items of work offered. Describe the methods used for following up initial solicitations to determine with certainty if the DBEs were interested, and the dates of the follow-up. Attach supporting documents such as copies of letters, memos, facsimiles sent, telephone logs, telephone billing statements, and other evidence of solicitation. You are reminded to solicit certified DBEs through all reasonable and available means and provide sufficient time to allow DBEs to respond. 3. Name of selected firm and its status as a DBE for each item of work made available. Include name, address, and telephone number of each DBE that provided a quote and their price quote. If the firm selected for the item is not a DBE, provide the reasons for the selection. 4. Name and date of each publication in which you requested DBE participation for the project. Attach copies of the published advertisements. 5. Names of agencies and dates on which they were contacted to provide assistance in contacting, recruiting, and using DBE firms. If the agencies were contacted in writing, provide copies of supporting documents. 6. List of efforts made to provide interested DBEs with adequate information about the plans, specifications, and requirements of the contract to assist them in responding to a solicitation. If you have provided information, identify the name of the DBE assisted, the nature of the information provided, and date of contact. Provide copies of supporting documents, as appropriate. 7. List of efforts made to assist interested DBEs in obtaining bonding, lines of credit, insurance, necessary equipment, supplies, and materials, excluding supplies and equipment that the DBE subcontractor purchases or leases from the prime contractor or its affiliate. If such assistance is provided by you, identify the name of the DBE assisted, nature of the assistance offered, and date assistance was provided. Provide copies of supporting documents, as appropriate. 8. Any additional data to support demonstration of good faith efforts. The Agency may consider DBE commitments from other bidders when determining whether the low bidder made good faith efforts to meet or exceed the DBE goal. c. Exhibit 15-G - Construction Contract DBE Commitment Complete and sign Exhibit 15-G Construction Contract DBE Commitment included in the contract documents regardless of whether DBE participation is reported.
LPP 18-01 15 Page 3 of 23 January 2019 APPENDICES Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-G Required Federal-Aid Contract Language
Provide written confirmation from each DBE that the DBE is participating in the Contract. A copy of a DBE's quote serves as written confirmation. If a DBE is participating as a joint venture partner, please submit a copy of the joint venture agreement. d. Subcontractor and Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Records Use each DBE subcontractor as listed on Exhibit 12-B Bidder’s List of Subcontractors (DBE and Non-DBE), and Exhibit 15-G Construction Contract DBE Commitment form unless you receive authorization for a substitution. The Agency requests the Contractor to: 1. Notify the Resident Engineer or Inspector of any changes to its anticipated DBE participation 2. Provide this notification before starting the affected work 3. Maintain records including: • Name and business address of each 1 st -tier subcontractor • Name and business address of each DBE subcontractor, DBE vendor, and DBE trucking company, regardless of tier • Date of payment and total amount paid to each business (see Exhibit 9-F: Monthly Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Payment) If you are a DBE contractor, include the date of work performed by your own forces and the corresponding value of the work. Before the 15th of each month, submit a Monthly DBE Trucking Verification form. If a DBE is decertified before completing its work, the DBE must notify you in writing of the decertification date. If a business becomes a certified DBE before completing its work, the business must notify you in writing of the certification date. Submit the notifications. On work completion, complete a Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (DBE) Certification Status Change, Exhibit 17-O, form. Submit the form within 30 days of contract acceptance. Upon work completion, complete Exhibit 17-F Final Report – Utilization of Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (DBE), First- Tier Subcontractors . Submit it within 90 days of contract acceptance. The Agency will withhold $10,000 until the form is submitted. The Agency releases the withhold upon submission of the completed form. e. Performance of Disadvantaged Business Enterprises DBEs must perform work or supply materials as listed in the Exhibit 15-G Construction Contract DBE Commitment form, included in the Bid. Do not terminate or substitute a listed DBE for convenience and perform the work with your own forces or obtain materials from other sources without authorization from the Agency. The Agency authorizes a request to use other forces or sources of materials if the bidder shows any of the following justifications: 1. Listed DBE fails or refuses to execute a written contract based on plans and specifications for the project. 2. You stipulated that a bond is a condition of executing the subcontract and the listed DBE fails to meet your bond requirements. 3. Work requires a contractor's license and listed DBE does not have a valid license under Contractors License Law. 4. Listed DBE fails or refuses to perform the work or furnish the listed materials. 5. Listed DBE's work is unsatisfactory and not in compliance with the contract. 6. Listed DBE is ineligible to work on the project because of suspension or debarment. 7. Listed DBE becomes bankrupt or insolvent. 8. Listed DBE voluntarily withdraws with written notice from the Contract
LPP 18-01 16 Page 4 of 23 January 2019 APPENDICES Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-G Required Federal-Aid Contract Language
9. Listed DBE is ineligible to receive credit for the type of work required. 10. Listed DBE owner dies or becomes disabled resulting in the inability to perform the work on the Contract. 11. Agency determines other documented good cause. Notify the original DBE of your intent to use other forces or material sources and provide the reasons. Provide the DBE with 5 days to respond to your notice and advise you and the Agency of the reasons why the use of other forces or sources of materials should not occur. Your request to use other forces or material sources must include: 1. One or more of the reasons listed in the preceding paragraph. 2. Notices from you to the DBE regarding the request. 3. Notices from the DBEs to you regarding the request. If a listed DBE is terminated or substituted, you must make good faith efforts to find another DBE to substitute for the original DBE. The substitute DBE must perform at least the same amount of work as the original DBE under the contract to the extent needed to meet or exceed the DBE goal.
The contractor or consultant shall utilize the specific DBEs listed to perform the work and supply the materials for which each is listed unless the contractor or subconsultant obtains the agency’s written consent. Unless the agency’s consent is provided, the contractor shall not be entitled to any payment for work or material unless it is performed or supplied by the listed DBE on the Exhibit 15-G: Construction Contract DBE Commitment.
2. BID OPENING The Agency publicly opens and reads bids at the time and place shown on the Notice to Contractors . 3. BID RIGGING The U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) provides a toll-free hotline to report bid rigging activities. Use the hotline to report bid rigging, bidder collusion, and other fraudulent activities. The hotline number is (800) 424-9071. The service is available 24 hours 7 days a week and is confidential and anonymous.. The hotline is part of the DOT's effort to identify and investigate highway construction contract fraud and abuse and is operated under the direction of the DOT Inspector General. 4. CONTRACT AWARD If the Agency awards the contract, the award is made to the lowest responsible and responsive bidder. 5. CONTRACTOR LICENSE The Contractor must be properly licensed as a contractor from contract award through Contract acceptance (Public Contract Code § 10164). 6. CHANGED CONDITIONS a. Differing Site Conditions 1. During the progress of the work, if subsurface or latent physical conditions are encountered at the site differing materially from those indicated in the contract or if unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, differing materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in the work provided for in the contract, are encountered at the site, the party discovering such conditions shall promptly notify the other party in writing of the specific differing conditions before the site is disturbed and before the affected work is performed. 2. Upon written notification, the engineer will investigate the conditions, and if it is determined that the conditions materially differ and cause an increase or decrease in the cost or time required for the performance of any work under the contract, an adjustment, excluding anticipated profits, will be made and the contract modified in writing accordingly. The engineer will notify the contractor of the determination whether or not an adjustment of the contract is warranted. 3. No contract adjustment which results in a benefit to the contractor will be allowed unless the contractor has provided the required written notice.
LPP 18-01 17 Page 5 of 23 January 2019 APPENDICES Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-G Required Federal-Aid Contract Language
4. No contract adjustment will be allowed under this clause for any effects caused on unchanged work. (This provision may be omitted by the Local Agency, at their option.) b. Suspensions of Work Ordered by the Engineer 1. If the performance of all or any portion of the work is suspended or delayed by the engineer in writing for an unreasonable period of time (not originally anticipated, customary, or inherent to the construction industry) and the contractor believes that additional compensation and/or contract time is due as a result of such suspension or delay, the contractor shall submit to the engineer in writing a request for adjustment within 7 calendar days of receipt of the notice to resume work. The request shall set forth the reasons and support for such adjustment. 2. Upon receipt, the engineer will evaluate the contractor's request. If the engineer agrees that the cost and/or time required for the performance of the contract has increased as a result of such suspension and the suspension was caused by conditions beyond the control of and not the fault of the contractor, its suppliers, or subcontractors at any approved tier, and not caused by weather, the engineer will make an adjustment (excluding profit) and modify the contract in writing accordingly. The contractor will be notified of the engineer's determination whether or not an adjustment of the contract is warranted. 3. No contract adjustment will be allowed unless the contractor has submitted the request for adjustment within the time prescribed. 4. No contract adjustment will be allowed under this clause to the extent that performance would have been suspended or delayed by any other cause, or for which an adjustment is provided or excluded under any other term or condition of this contract. c. Significant Changes in the Character of Work 1. The engineer reserves the right to make, in writing, at any time during the work, such changes in quantities and such alterations in the work as are necessary to satisfactorily complete the project. Such changes in quantities and alterations shall not invalidate the contract nor release the surety, and the contractor agrees to perform the work as altered. 2. If the alterations or changes in quantities significantly change the character of the work under the contract, whether such alterations or changes are in themselves significant changes to the character of the work or by affecting other work cause such other work to become significantly different in character, an adjustment, excluding anticipated profit, will be made to the contract. The basis for the adjustment shall be agreed upon prior to the performance of the work. If a basis cannot be agreed upon, then an adjustment will be made either for or against the contractor in such amount as the engineer may determine to be fair and equitable. 3. If the alterations or changes in quantities do not significantly change the character of the work to be performed under the contract, the altered work will be paid for as provided elsewhere in the contract. 4. The term “significant change” shall be construed to apply only to the following circumstances: • When the character of the work as altered differs materially in kind or nature from that involved or included in the original proposed construction; or • When a major item of work, as defined elsewhere in the contract, is increased in excess of 125 percent or decreased below 75 percent of the original contract quantity. Any allowance for an increase in quantity shall apply only to that portion in excess of 125 percent of original contract item quantity, or in case of a decrease below 75 percent, to the actual amount of work performed. 7. BEGINNING OF WORK, TIME OF COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES The Contractor shall begin work within 15 calendar days after the issuance of the Notice to Proceed. This work shall be diligently prosecuted to completion before the expiration of 140 WORKING DAYS beginning on the fifteenth calendar day after the date shown on the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor shall pay to the City/County of Arroyo Grande the sum of $ 6,800 per day, for each and every calendar days’ delay in finishing the work in excess of the number of working days prescribed above.
LPP 18-01 18 Page 6 of 23 January 2019 APPENDICES Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-G Required Federal-Aid Contract Language
8. BUY AMERICA Furnish steel and iron materials to be incorporated into the work with certificates of compliance and certified mill test reports. Mill test reports must indicate where the steel and iron were melted and manufactured. Steel and iron materials must be produced in the U.S. except: 1. Foreign pig iron and processed, pelletized, and reduced iron ore may be used in the domestic production of the steel and iron materials [60 Fed Reg 15478 (03/24/1995)]; 2. If the total combined cost of the materials does not exceed the greater of 0.1 percent of the total bid or $2,500, materials produced outside the U.S. may be used. Production includes: 1. Processing steel and iron materials, including smelting or other processes that alter the physical form or shape (such as rolling, extruding, machining, bending, grinding, and drilling) or chemical composition; 2. Coating application, including epoxy coating, galvanizing, and painting, that protects or enhances the value of steel and iron materials. 9. QUALITY ASSURANCE The Agency uses a Quality Assurance Program (QAP) to ensure a material is produced to comply with the Contract. You may examine the records and reports of tests the Agency performs if they are available at the job site. Schedule work to allow time for QAP. 10. PROMPT PAYMENT OF FUNDS WITHHELD TO SUBCONTRACTORS The agency may hold retainage from the prime contractor and shall make prompt and regular incremental acceptances of portions, as determined by the agency, of the contract work, and pay retainage to the prime contractor based on these acceptances. The prime contractor, or subcontractor, shall return all monies withheld in retention from a subcontractor within seven (7) days after receiving payment for work satisfactorily completed and accepted including incremental acceptances of portions of the contract work by the agency, unless as agreed to in writing by the prime contractor and subcontractor, pursuant to Section 7108.5 of the Business and Professions Code. Any violation of this provision shall subject the violating prime contractor or subcontractor to the penalties, sanctions and other remedies specified in Section this code. These requirements shall not be construed to limit or impair any contractual, administrative, or judicial remedies otherwise available to the prime contractor or subcontractor in the event of a dispute involving late payment or nonpayment by the prime contractor, deficient subcontract performance, or noncompliance by a subcontractor. 11. FORM FHWA-1273 REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS FEDERAL-AID CONTRACTS (Excluding ATTACHMENT A - EMPLOYMENT AND MATERIALS PREFERENCE FOR APPALACHIAN DEVELOPMENT HIGHWAY SYSTEM OR APPALACHIAN LOCAL ACCESS ROAD CONTRACTS)
[The following 10 pages must be physically inserted into the contract without modification.]
LPP 18-01 19 Page 7 of 23 January 2019 APPENDICES Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-G Required Federal-Aid Contract Language
FHWA-1273 -- Revised May 1, 2012 REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
LPP 18-01 20 Page 8 of 23 January 2019 APPENDICES Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-G Required Federal-Aid Contract Language
I. General II. NONDISCRIMINATION II. Nondiscrimination III. No segregated Facilities The provisions of this section related to 23 CFR Part 230 are applicable to IV. Davis-Bacon and Related Act Provisions all Federal-aid construction contracts and to all related construction V. Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act Provisions subcontracts of $10,000 or more. The provisions of 23 CFR Part 230 are VI. Subletting or Assigning the Contract not applicable to material supply, engineering, or architectural service VII. Safety: Accident Prevention contracts. VIII. False Statements Concerning Highway Projects In addition, the contractor and all subcontractors must comply with the IX. Implementation of Clean Air Act and Federal Water Pollution following policies: Executive Order 11246, 41 CFR 60, 29 CFR 1625- Control Act 1627, Title 23 USC Section 140, the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as X. Compliance with Government wide Suspension and Debarment amended (29 USC 794), Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, as Requirements amended, and related regulations including 49 CFR Parts 21, 26 and Certification Regarding Use of Contract Funds for Lobbying 27; and 23 CFR Parts 200, 230, and 633.
ATTACHMENTS The contractor and all subcontractors must comply with: the requirements of the Equal Opportunity Clause in 41 CFR 60-1.4(b) and, for all A. Employment and Materials Preference for Appalachian Development construction contracts exceeding $10,000, the Standard Federal Equal Highway System or Appalachian Local Access Road Contracts (included Employment Opportunity Construction Contract Specifications in 41 CFR in Appalachian contracts only) 60-4.3.
I. GENERAL Note: The U.S. Department of Labor has exclusive authority to determine compliance with Executive Order 11246 and the policies of the Secretary 1. Form FHWA-1273 must be physically incorporated in each of Labor including 41 CFR 60, and 29 CFR 1625-1627. The contracting construction contract funded under Title 23 (excluding emergency agency and the FHWA have the authority and the responsibility to ensure contracts solely intended for debris removal). The contractor (or compliance with Title 23 USC Section 140, the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, subcontractor) must insert this form in each subcontract and further as amended (29 USC 794), and Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, as require its inclusion in all lower tier subcontracts (excluding purchase amended, and related regulations including 49 CFR Parts 21, 26 and 27; orders, rental agreements and other agreements for supplies or and 23 CFR Parts 200, 230, and services). 633.
The applicable requirements of Form FHWA-1273 are incorporated by The following provision is adopted from 23 CFR 230, Appendix A, with reference for work done under any purchase order, rental agreement or appropriate revisions to conform to the U.S. Department of Labor (US agreement for other services. The prime contractor shall be responsible for DOL) and FHWA requirements. compliance by any subcontractor, lower-tier subcontractor or service provider. 1. Equal Employment Opportunity: Equal employment opportunity Form FHWA-1273 must be included in all Federal-aid design-build (EEO) requirements not to discriminate and to take affirmative action to contracts, in all subcontracts and in lower tier subcontracts (excluding assure equal opportunity as set forth under laws, executive orders, rules, subcontracts for design services, purchase orders, rental agreements and regulations (28 CFR 35, 29 CFR 1630, 29 CFR 1625-1627, 41 CFR 60 other agreements for supplies or services). The design-builder shall be and 49 CFR 27) and orders of the Secretary of Labor as modified by the responsible for compliance by any subcontractor, lower-tier subcontractor provisions prescribed herein, and imposed pursuant to 23 U.S.C. 140 or service provider. shall constitute the EEO and specific affirmative action standards for the contractor's project activities under this contract. The provisions of the Contracting agencies may reference Form FHWA-1273 in bid proposal or Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq.) set request for proposal documents, however, the Form FHWA-1273 must be forth under 28 CFR 35 and 29 CFR 1630 are incorporated by reference physically incorporated (not referenced) in all contracts, subcontracts and in this contract. In the execution of this contract, the contractor agrees to lower-tier subcontracts (excluding purchase orders, rental agreements and comply with the following minimum specific requirement activities of EEO: other agreements for supplies or services related to a construction contract). a. The contractor will work with the contracting agency and the Federal Government to ensure that it has made every good faith effort to 2. Subject to the applicability criteria noted in the following sections, provide equal opportunity with respect to all of its terms and these contract provisions shall apply to all work performed on the conditions of employment and in their review of activities under the contract by the contractor's own organization and with the assistance contract. of workers under the contractor's immediate superintendence and to all work performed on the contract by piecework, station work, or by b. The contractor will accept as its operating policy the following subcontract. statement:
3. A breach of any of the stipulations contained in these Required "It is the policy of this Company to assure that applicants are employed, Contract Provisions may be sufficient grounds for withholding of and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to progress payments, withholding of final payment, termination of the their race, religion, sex, color, national origin, age or disability. Such contract, suspension / debarment or any other action determined to action shall include: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; be appropriate by the contracting agency and FHWA. recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including 4. Selection of Labor: During the performance of this contract, the apprenticeship, pre-apprenticeship, and/or on-the-job training." contractor shall not use convict labor for any purpose within the limits of a construction project on a Federal-aid highway unless it is labor performed by convicts who are on parole, supervised release, or probation. The term Federal-aid highway does not include roadways functionally classified as local roads or rural minor collectors.
FHWA-1273 -- Revised May 1, 2012
LPP 18-01 21 Page 9 of 23 January 2019 APPENDICES Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-G Required Federal-Aid Contract Language
2. EEO Officer: The contractor will designate and make known to the contracting officers and EEO Officer who will have the c. The contractor will encourage its present employees to refer responsibility for and must be capable of effectively administering minorities and women as applicants for employment. Information and promoting and active EEO program and who must be assigned and procedures with regard to referring such applicants will be adequate authority and responsibility to do so. discussed with employees.
5. Personnel Actions: Wages, working conditions, and employee 3. Dissemination of Policy: All members of the contractor's staff benefits shall be established and administered, and personnel who are authorized to hire, supervise, promote, and discharge actions of every type, including hiring, upgrading, promotion, employees, or who recommend such action, or who are transfer, demotion, layoff, and termination, shall be taken without substantially involved in such action, will be made fully cognizant of, regard to race, color, religion, sex, national origin, age or disability. and will implement, the contractor's EEO policy and contractual The following procedures shall be followed: responsibilities to provide EEO in each grade and classification of employment. To ensure that the above agreement will be met, the a. The contractor will conduct periodic inspections of project sites to following actions will be taken as a minimum: insure that working conditions and employee facilities do not indicate discriminatory treatment of project site personnel. a. Periodic meetings of supervisory and personnel office employees will be conducted before the start of work and then b. The contractor will periodically evaluate the spread of wages paid not less often than once every six months, at which time the within each classification to determine any evidence of contractor's EEO policy and its implementation will be reviewed discriminatory wage practices. and explained. The meetings will be conducted by the EEO Officer. c. The contractor will periodically review selected personnel actions in depth to determine whether there is evidence of discrimination. b. All new supervisory or personnel office employees will be given Where evidence is found, the contractor will promptly take a thorough indoctrination by the EEO Officer, covering all major corrective action. If the review indicates that the discrimination aspects of the contractor's EEO obligations within thirty days may extend beyond the actions reviewed, such corrective action following their reporting for duty with the contractor. shall include all affected persons. c. All personnel who are engaged in direct recruitment for the project will be instructed by the EEO Officer in the contractor's d. The contractor will promptly investigate all complaints of alleged procedures for locating and hiring minorities and women. discrimination made to the contractor in connection with its obligations under this contract, will attempt to resolve such d. Notices and posters setting forth the contractor's EEO policy will complaints, and will take appropriate corrective action within a be placed in areas readily accessible to employees, applicants reasonable time. If the investigation indicates that the for employment and potential employees. discrimination may affect persons other than the complainant, such e. The contractor's EEO policy and the procedures to implement corrective action shall include such other persons. Upon such policy will be brought to the attention of employees by completion of each investigation, the contractor will inform every means of meetings, employee handbooks, or other appropriate complainant of all of their avenues of appeal. means. 6. Training and Promotion:
4. Recruitment: When advertising for employees, the contractor a. The contractor will assist in locating, qualifying, and increasing will include in all advertisements for employees the notation: "An the skills of minorities and women who are applicants for Equal Opportunity Employer." All such advertisements will be employment or current employees. Such efforts should be aimed placed in publications having a large circulation among minorities at developing full journey level status employees in the type of and women in the area from which the project work force would trade or job classification involved. normally be derived. b. Consistent with the contractor's work force requirements and as a. The contractor will, unless precluded by a valid bargaining permissible under Federal and State regulations, the contractor agreement, conduct systematic and direct recruitment through shall make full use of training programs, i.e., apprenticeship, and public and private employee referral sources likely to yield on-the-job training programs for the geographical area of contract qualified minorities and women. To meet this requirement, the performance. In the event a special provision for training is contractor will identify sources of potential minority group provided under this contract, this subparagraph will be employees, and establish with such identified sources superseded as indicated in the special provision. The contracting procedures whereby minority and women applicants may be agency may reserve training positions for persons who receive referred to the contractor for employment consideration. welfare assistance in accordance with 23 U.S.C. 140(a).
b. In the event the contractor has a valid bargaining agreement c. The contractor will advise employees and applicants for providing for exclusive hiring hall referrals, the contractor is employment of available training programs and entrance expected to observe the provisions of that agreement to the requirements for each. extent that the system meets the contractor's compliance with EEO contract provisions. Where implementation of such an d. The contractor will periodically review the training and promotion agreement has the effect of discriminating against minorities or potential of employees who are minorities and women and will women, or obligates the contractor to do the same, such encourage eligible employees to apply for such training and implementation violates Federal nondiscrimination provisions. promotion.
LPP 18-01 22 Page 10 of 23 January 2019 APPENDICES Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-G Required Federal-Aid Contract Language
FHWA-1273 -- Revised May 1, 2012
7. Unions: If the contractor relies in whole or in part upon unions as 10. Assurance Required by 49 CFR 26.13(b): a source of employees, the contractor will use good faith efforts to obtain the cooperation of such unions to increase opportunities for a. The requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 and the State DOT’s U.S. minorities and women. Actions by the contractor, either directly or DOT-approved DBE program are incorporated by reference. through a contractor's association acting as agent, will include the procedures set forth below: b. The contractor or subcontractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance of a. The contractor will use good faith efforts to develop, in this contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable cooperation with the unions, joint training programs aimed requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in the award and administration toward qualifying more minorities and women for membership of DOT-assisted contracts. Failure by the contractor to carry out in the unions and increasing the skills of minorities and women these requirements is a material breach of this contract, which so that they may qualify for higher paying employment. may result in the termination of this contract or such other remedy as the contracting agency deems appropriate. b. The contractor will use good faith efforts to incorporate an EEO clause into each union agreement to the end that such union 11. Records and Reports: The contractor shall keep such records as will be contractually bound to refer applicants without regard to necessary to document compliance with the EEO requirements. Such their race, color, religion, sex, national origin, age or disability. records shall be retained for a period of three years following the date of the final payment to the contractor for all contract work and shall be c. The contractor is to obtain information as to the referral available at reasonable times and places for inspection by authorized practices and policies of the labor union except that to the representatives of the contracting agency and the FHWA. extent such information is within the exclusive possession of the labor union and such labor union refuses to furnish such a. The records kept by the contractor shall document the following: information to the contractor, the contractor shall so certify to the contracting agency and shall set forth what efforts have (1) The number and work hours of minority and non-minority group been made to obtain such information. members and women employed in each work classification on the project; d. In the event the union is unable to provide the contractor with a reasonable flow of referrals within the time limit set forth in the (2) The progress and efforts being made in cooperation with collective bargaining agreement, the contractor will, through unions, when applicable, to increase employment opportunities independent recruitment efforts, fill the employment vacancies for minorities and women; and without regard to race, color, religion, sex, national origin, age or disability; making full efforts to obtain qualified and/or (3) The progress and efforts being made in locating, hiring, training, qualifiable minorities and women. The failure of a union to qualifying, and upgrading minorities and women. provide sufficient referrals (even though it is obligated to provide exclusive referrals under the terms of a collective b. The contractors and subcontractors will submit an annual report to bargaining agreement) does not relieve the contractor from the the contracting agency each July for the duration of the project, requirements of this paragraph. In the event the union referral indicating the number of minority, women, and non- minority group practice prevents the contractor from meeting the obligations employees currently engaged in each work classification required by pursuant to Executive Order 11246, as amended, and these the contract work. This information is to be reported on Form FHWA- special provisions, such contractor shall immediately notify the 1391 . The staffing data should represent the project work force on contracting agency. board in all or any part of the last payroll period preceding the end of July. If on-the-job training is being required by special provision, the 8. Reasonable Accommodation for Applicants / Employees contractor will be required to collect and report training data. The with Disabilities: The contractor must be familiar with the employment data should reflect the work force on board during all or requirements for and comply with the Americans with Disabilities any part of the last payroll period preceding the end of July. Act and all rules and regulations established there under. Employers must provide reasonable accommodation in all III. NONSEGREGATED FACILITIES employment activities unless to do so would cause an undue hardship. This provision is applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts and to all related construction subcontracts of $10,000 or more. 9. Selection of Subcontractors, Procurement of Materials and Leasing of Equipment: The contractor shall not discriminate on The contractor must ensure that facilities provided for employees are the grounds of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, age or provided in such a manner that segregation on the basis of race, disability in the selection and retention of subcontractors, including color, religion, sex, or national origin cannot result. The contractor procurement of materials and leases of equipment. The contractor may neither require such segregated use by written or oral policies shall take all necessary and reasonable steps to ensure nor tolerate such use by employee custom. The contractor's nondiscrimination in the administration of this contract. obligation extends further to ensure that its employees are not assigned to perform their services at any location, under the a. The contractor shall notify all potential subcontractors and contractor's control, where the facilities are segregated. The term suppliers and lessors of their EEO obligations under this contract. "facilities" includes waiting rooms, work areas, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, restrooms, washrooms, locker rooms, and b. The contractor will use good faith efforts to ensure subcontractor other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, compliance with their EEO obligations. recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing provided for employees. The contractor shall provide separate or single-user restrooms and necessary dressing or sleeping areas to assure privacy between sexes.
LPP 18-01 23 Page 11 of 23 January 2019 APPENDICES Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-G Required Federal-Aid Contract Language
FHWA-1273 -- Revised May 1, 2012
IV. DAVIS-BACON AND RELATED ACT PROVISIONS (i) The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and This section is applicable to all Federal-aid construction projects exceeding $2,000 and to all related subcontracts and lower-tier (ii) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction subcontracts (regardless of subcontract size). The requirements apply industry; and to all projects located within the right-of-way of a roadway that is functionally classified as Federal-aid highway. This excludes roadways functionally classified as local roads or rural minor (iii) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, collectors, which are exempt. Contracting agencies may elect to apply bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in these requirements to other projects. the wage determination.
The following provisions are from the U.S. Department of Labor (2) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be regulations in 29 CFR 5.5 “Contract provisions and related matters” employed in the classification (if known), or their with minor revisions to conform to the FHWA -1273 format and FHWA representatives, and the contracting officer agree on the program requirements. classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by the contracting officer to the Administrator 1. Minimum wages of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC a. All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will of the work, will be paid unconditionally and not less often than approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any action within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland period that additional time is necessary. Act (29 CFR part 3)), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment (3) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage employed in the classification or their representatives, and the determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto contracting officer do not agree on the proposed classification and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe which may be alleged to exist between the contractor and such benefits, where appropriate), the contracting officer shall refer laborers and mechanics. the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the contracting officer, to the Wage and Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide Hour Administrator for determination. The Wage and Hour fringe benefits under section 1(b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise the or mechanics, subject to the provisions of paragraph 1.d. of this contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the section; also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more 30-day period that additional time is necessary. than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs which cover the particular weekly period, are (4) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly determined pursuant to paragraphs 1.b.(2) or 1.b.(3) of this period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate section, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification under this contract from the first day on which work classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, is performed in the classification. except as provided in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each c. Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for classification for the time actually worked therein: Provided, That the a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either classification in which work is performed. The wage determination pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay (including any additional classification and wage rates conformed another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent under paragraph 1.b. of this section) and the Davis-Bacon poster thereof. (WH–1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible d. If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other place where it can be easily seen by the workers. third person, the contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably b. (1) The contracting officer shall require that any class of anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or laborers or mechanics, including helpers, which is not listed in the program, Provided, That the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract written request of the contractor, that the applicable standards of shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may contracting officer shall approve an additional classification and require the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following the meeting of obligations under the plan or program. criteria have been met:
LPP 18-01 24 Page 12 of 23 January 2019 APPENDICES Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-G Required Federal-Aid Contract Language
FHWA-1273 -- Revised May 1, 2012 2. Withholding current address of each covered worker, and shall provide them upon request to the contracting agency for transmission to the State The contracting agency shall upon its own action or upon written DOT, the FHWA or the Wage and Hour Division of the Department request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor, of Labor for purposes of an investigation or audit of compliance with withhold or cause to be withheld from the contractor under this prevailing wage requirements. It is not a violation of this section for a contract, or any other Federal contract with the same prime prime contractor to require a subcontractor to provide addresses contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to Davis- and social security numbers to the prime contractor for its own Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same records, without weekly submission to the contracting agency. prime contractor, so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the (2) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a “Statement contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by of Compliance,” signed by the contractor or subcontractor or his the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the including any apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working on persons employed under the contract and shall certify the the site of the work, all or part of the wages required by the contract, following: the contracting agency may, after written notice to the contractor, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of (i) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such required to be provided under §5.5 (a)(3)(ii) of Regulations, 29 violations have ceased. CFR part 5, the appropriate information is being maintained under §5.5 (a)(3)(i) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5, and that such 3. Payrolls and basic records information is correct and complete;
a. Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained (ii) That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, by the contractor during the course of the work and preserved for a apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, working at the site of the work. Such records shall contain the without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no name, address, and social security number of each such worker, deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide forth in Regulations, 29 CFR part 3; fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly (iii) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR for the classification of work performed, as specified in the 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract. amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain records which show (3) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH–347 shall the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or satisfy the requirement for submission of the “Statement of program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or Compliance” required by paragraph 3.b.(2) of this section. mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors (4) The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship under section 1001 of title 18 and section 231 of title 31 of the programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of United States Code. the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. c. The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph 3.a. of this section available for inspection, copying, b. (1) The contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which or transcription by authorized representatives of the contracting any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to the agency, the State DOT, the FHWA, or the Department of Labor, and contracting agency. The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately shall permit such representatives to interview employees during and completely all of the information required to be maintained working hours on the job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(3)(i), except that full social security numbers submit the required records or to make them available, the FHWA and home addresses shall not be included on weekly transmittals. may, after written notice to the contractor, the contracting agency or Instead the payrolls shall only need to include an individually the State DOT, take such action as may be necessary to cause the identifying number for each employee ( e.g. , the last four digits of suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. the employee's social security number). The required weekly payroll Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form to make such records available may be grounds for debarment WH–347 is available for this purpose from the Wage and Hour action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12. Division Web site at http://www.dol.gov/esa/whd/forms/wh347instr.htm or its successor site. The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. Contractors and subcontractors shall maintain the full social security number and
LPP 18-01 25 Page 13 of 23 January 2019 APPENDICES Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-G Required Federal-Aid Contract Language
FHWA-1273 -- Revised May 1, 2012
4. Apprentices and trainees The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. a. Apprentices (programs of the USDOL).
Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fring e benefits in registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee Training Administration, Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the and Labor Services, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless recognized by the Office, or if a person is employed in his or her first the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an there is an apprenticeship program associated with the apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination program, but who has been certified by the Office of Apprenticeship which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any Training, Employer and Labor Services or a State Apprenticeship employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and employment as an apprentice. Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program the contractor as to the entire work force under the registered shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, determination for the work actually performed. who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws determination for the classification of work actually performed. In approval of a training program, the contractor will no longer be addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its c. Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in conformity percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive contractor's or subcontractor's registered program shall be observed. Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR part 30.
Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in d. Apprentices and Trainees (programs of the U.S. DOT). the registered program for the apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in Apprentices and trainees working under apprenticeship and skill the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe training programs which have been certified by the Secretary of benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship Transportation as promoting EEO in connection with Federal-aid program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe highway construction programs are not subject to the requirements of benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits paragraph 4 of this Section IV. The straight time hourly wage rates for listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If apprentices and trainees under such programs will be established by the Administrator determines that a different practice prevails for the the particular programs. The ratio of apprentices and trainees to applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in journeym en shall not be greater than permitted by the terms of the accordance with that determination. particular program.
In the event the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and 5. Compliance with Copeland Act requirements. The contractor Labor Services, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR part 3, which are Office, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the incorporated by reference in this contract. contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. 6. Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert Form FHWA-1273 in any subcontracts and also require the subcontractors to include Form FHWA-1273 in any lower tier b. Trainees (programs of the USDOL). subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5. work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a 7. Contract termination: debarment. A breach of the contract program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and contract, and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as Training Administration. provided in 29 CFR 5.12.
LPP 18-01 26 Page 14 of 23 January 2019 APPENDICES Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-G Required Federal-Aid Contract Language
FHWA-1273 -- Revised May 1, 2012
8. Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act requirements. 3. Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages. The All rulings and interpretations of the Davis-Bacon and Related Acts FHWA or the contacting agency shall upon its own action or upon contained in 29 CFR parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by written request of an authorized representative of the Department of reference in this contract. Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any other Federal contract with the 9. Disputes concerning labor standards. Disputes arising out of same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract the labor standards provisions of this contract shall not be subject to subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be which is held by the same prime contractor, such sums as may be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such Labor set forth in 29 CFR parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor (or damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph (2.) of this any of its subcontractors) and the contracting agency, the U.S. section. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives.
4. Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in 10. Certification of eligibility. any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraph (1.) through (4.) of this section and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to a. By entering into this contract, the contractor certifies that neither it include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor contractor's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in paragraphs Government contracts by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis- (1.) through (4.) of this section. Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1).
b. No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person or VI. SUBLETTING OR ASSIGNING THE CONTRACT firm ineligible for award of a Government contract by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). This provision is applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts on the National Highway System.
c. The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U.S. 1. The contractor shall perform with its own organization contract Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001. work amounting to not less than 30 percent (or a greater percentage if specified elsewhere in the contract) of the total original contract V. CONTRACT WORK HOURS AND SAFETY STANDARDS ACT price, excluding any specialty items designated by the contracting agency. Specialty items may be performed by subcontract and the amount of any such specialty items performed may be deducted from The following clauses apply to any Federal-aid construction contract in the total original contract price before computing the amount of work an amount in excess of $100,000 and subject to the overtime required to be performed by the contractor's own organization (23 provisions of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. CFR 635.116). These clauses shall be inserted in addition to the clauses required by 29 CFR 5.5(a) or 29 CFR 4.6. As used in this paragraph, the terms a. The term “perform work with its own organization” refers to laborers and mechanics include watchmen and guards. workers employed or leased by the prime contractor, and equipment owned or rented by the prime contractor, with or without operators. 1. Overtime requirements. No contractor or subcontractor Such term does not include employees or equipment of a contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor, agents of the prime involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or contractor, or any other assignees. The term may include payments permit any such laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which he for the costs of hiring leased employees from an employee leasing or she is employed on such work to work in excess of forty hours in firm meeting all relevant Federal and State regulatory requirements. such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives Leased employees may only be included in this term if the prime compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the contractor meets all of the following conditions: basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek. (1) the prime contractor maintains control over the supervision of the day-to-day activities of the leased employees; (2) the prime contractor remains responsible for the quality of the 2. Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated damages . In work of the leased employees; the event of any violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (1.) of (3) the prime contractor retains all power to accept or exclude this section, the contractor and any subcontractor responsible individual employees from work on the project; and therefor shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such (4) the prime contractor remains ultimately responsible for the contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in payment of predetermined minimum wages, the submission of the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or payrolls, statements of compliance and all other Federal a territory, to such District or to such territory), for liquidated regulatory requirements. damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and b. "Specialty Items" shall be construed to be limited to work that guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph(1.) requires highly specialized knowledge, abilities, or equipment not of this section, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which ordinarily available in the type of contracting organizations qualified such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the and expected to bid or propose on the contract as a whole and in standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime general are to be limited to minor components of the overall wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (1.) of this contract. section.
LPP 18-01 27 Page 15 of 23 January 2019 APPENDICES Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-G Required Federal-Aid Contract Language
2. The contract amount upon which the requirements set forth in VIII. FALSE STATEMENTS CONCERNING HIGHWAY paragraph (1) of Section VI is computed includes the cost of PROJECTS material and manufactured products which are to be purchased or produced by the contractor under the contract provisions. This provision is applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts and to all related subcontracts. 3. The contractor shall furnish (a) a competent superintendent or supervisor who is employed by the firm, has full authority to direct In order to assure high quality and durable construction in conformity performance of the work in accordance with the contract with approved plans and specifications and a high degree of reliability requirements, and is in charge of all construction operations on statements and representations made by engineers, contractors, (regardless of who performs the work) and (b) such other of its suppliers, and workers on Federal-aid highway projects, it is essential own organizational resources (supervision, management, and that all persons concerned with the project perform their functions as engineering services) as the contracting officer determines is carefully, thoroughly, and honestly as possible. necessary to assure the performance of the contract. Willful falsification, distortion, or misrepresentation with respect to any facts related to the project is a violation of Federal law. To 4. No portion of the contract shall be sublet, assigned or otherwise prevent any misunderstanding regarding the seriousness of these disposed of except with the written consent of the contracting and similar acts, Form FHWA-1022 shall be posted on each officer, or authorized representative, and such consent when Federal-aid highway project (23 CFR 635) in one or more places given shall not be construed to relieve the contractor of any where it is readily available to all persons concerned with the project: responsibility for the fulfillment of the contract. Written consent will be given only after the contracting agency has assured that each subcontract is evidenced in writing and that it contains all 18 U.S.C. 1020 reads as follows: pertinent provisions and requirements of the prime contract. "Whoever, being an officer, agent, or employee of the United States, or of any State or Territory, or whoever, whether a person, 5. The 30% self-performance requirement of paragraph (1) is not association, firm, or corporation, knowingly makes any false applicable to design-build contracts; however, contracting statement, false representation, or false report as to the character, agencies may establish their own self-performance requirements. quality, quantity, or cost of the material used or to be used, or the quantity or quality of the work performed or to be performed, or the VII. SAFETY: ACCIDENT PREVENTION cost thereof in connection with the submission of plans, maps, specifications, contracts, or costs of construction on any highway or This provision is applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts related project submitted for approval to the Secretary of and to all related subcontracts. Transportation; or
1. In the performance of this contract the contractor shall comply Whoever knowingly makes any false statement, false with all applicable Federal, State, and local laws governing safety, representation, false report or false claim with respect to the health, and sanitation (23 CFR 635). The contractor shall provide character, quality, quantity, or cost of any work performed or to be all safeguards, safety devices and protective equipment and take performed, or materials furnished or to be furnished, in connection any other needed actions as it determines, or as the contracting with the construction of any highway or related project approved by officer may determine, to be reasonably necessary to protect the the Secretary of Transportation; or life and health of employees on the job and the safety of the public and to protect property in connection with the performance of the Whoever knowingly makes any false statement or false representation work covered by the contract. as to material fact in any statement, certificate, or report submitted pursuant to provisions of the Federal-aid Roads Act approved July 1, 2. It is a condition of this contract, and shall be made a condition of 1916, (39 Stat. 355), as amended and supplemented; each subcontract, which the contractor enters into pursuant to this contract, that the contractor and any subcontractor shall not permit Shall be fined under this title or imprisoned not more than 5 years or any employee, in performance of the contract, to work in both." surroundings or under conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous or dangerous to his/her health or safety, as determined under IX. IMPLEMENTATION OF CLEAN AIR ACT AND FEDERAL construction safety and health standards (29 CFR 1926) WATER POLLUTION CONTROL ACT promulgated by the Secretary of Labor, in accordance with This provision is applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act and to all related subcontracts. (40 U.S.C. 3704). By submission of this bid/proposal or the execution of this contract, 3. Pursuant to 29 CFR 1926.3, it is a condition of this contract that or subcontract, as appropriate, the bidder, proposer, Federal-aid the Secretary of Labor or authorized representative thereof, shall construction contractor, or subcontractor, as appropriate, will be have right of entry to any site of contract performance to inspect or deemed to have stipulated as follows: investigate the matter of compliance with the construction safety and health standards and to carry out the duties of the Secretary 1. That any person who is or will be utilized in the under Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety performance of this contract is not prohibited from receiving an Standards Act (40 U.S.C.3704). award due to a violation of Section 508 of the Clean Water Act or Section 306 of the Clean Air Act. 2. That the contractor agrees to include or cause to be included the requirements of paragraph (1) of this Section X in every subcontract, and further agrees to take such action as the contracting agency may direct as a means of enforcing such requirements.
LPP 18-01 28 Page 16 of 23 January 2019 APPENDICES Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-G Required Federal-Aid Contract Language
FHWA-1273 -- Revised May 1, 2012 transaction, without modification, in all lower tier covered X. CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT, SUSPENSION, transactions and in all solicitations for lower tier covered INELIGIBILITY AND VOLUNTARY EXCLUSION transactions exceeding the $25,000 threshold.
This provision is applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts, h. A participant in a covered transaction may rely upon a certification design-build contracts, subcontracts, lower-tier subcontracts, purchase of a prospective participant in a lower tier covered transaction that orders, lease agreements, consultant contracts or any other covered is not debarred, suspended, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from transaction requiring FHWA approval or that is estimated to cost the covered transaction, unless it knows that the certification is $25,000 or more – as defined in 2 CFR Parts 180 and 1200. erroneous. A participant is responsible for ensuring that its principals are not suspended, debarred, or otherwise ineligible to 1. Instructions for Certification – First Tier Participants: participate in covered transactions. To verify the eligibility of its principals, as well as the eligibility of any lower tier prospective a. By signing and submitting this proposal, the prospective first tier participants, each participant may, but is not required to, check the participant is providing the certification set out below. Excluded Parties List System website (https://www.epls.gov/), which is compiled by the General Services Administration. b. The inability of a person to provide the certification set out below will not necessarily result in denial of participation in this covered i. Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require transaction. The prospective first tier participant shall submit an the establishment of a system of records in order to render in good explanation of why it cannot provide the certification set out below. faith the certification required by this clause. The knowledge and The certification or explanation will be considered in connection information of the prospective participant is not required to exceed with the department or agency's determination whether to enter that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the into this transaction. However, failure of the prospective first tier ordinary course of business dealings. participant to furnish a certification or an explanation shall disqualify such a person from participation in this transaction. j. Except for transactions authorized under paragraph (f) of these instructions, if a participant in a covered transaction knowingly c. The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact enters into a lower tier covered transaction with a person who is upon which reliance was placed when the contracting agency suspended, debarred, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from determined to enter into this transaction. If it is later determined participation in this transaction, in addition to other remedies that the prospective participant knowingly rendered an erroneous available to the Federal Government, the department or agency certification, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal may terminate this transaction for cause or default. Government, the contracting agency may terminate this * * * transaction for cause of default. 2. Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility d. The prospective first tier participant shall provide immediate written and Voluntary Exclusion – First Tier Participants: notice to the contracting agency to whom this proposal is submitted if any time the prospective first tier participant learns that a. The prospective first tier participant certifies to the best of its its certification was erroneous when submitted or has become knowledge and belief, that it and its principals: erroneous by reason of changed circumstances. (1) Are not presently debarred, suspended, proposed for e. The terms "covered transaction," "debarred," "suspended," debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from "ineligible," "participant," "person," "principal," and "voluntarily participating in covered transactions by any Federal department excluded," as used in this clause, are defined in 2 CFR Parts 180 or agency; and 1200. “First Tier Covered Transactions” refers to any covered transaction between a grantee or subgrantee of Federal funds and (2) Have not within a three-year period preceding this proposal a participant (such as the prime or general contract). “Lower Tier been convicted of or had a civil judgment rendered against them Covered Transactions” refers to any covered transaction under a for commission of fraud or a criminal offense in connection with First Tier Covered Transaction (such as subcontracts). “First Tier obtaining, attempting to obtain, or performing a public (Federal, Participant” refers to the participant who has entered into a State or local) transaction or contract under a public transaction; covered transaction with a grantee or subgrantee of Federal funds violation of Federal or State antitrust statutes or commission of (such as the prime or general contractor). “Lower Tier Participant” embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery, falsification or destruction refers any participant who has entered into a covered transaction of records, making false statements, or receiving stolen with a First Tier Participant or other Lower Tier Participants (such property; as subcontractors and suppliers). (3) Are not presently indicted for or otherwise criminally or civilly f. The prospective first tier participant agrees by submitting this charged by a governmental entity (Federal, State or local) with proposal that, should the proposed covered transaction be entered commission of any of the offenses enumerated in paragraph into, it shall not knowingly enter into any lower tier covered (a)(2) of this certification; and transaction with a person who is debarred, suspended, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this covered (4) Have not within a three-year period preceding this transaction, unless authorized by the department or agency application/proposal had one or more public transactions entering into this transaction. (Federal, State or local) terminated for cause or default.
b. Where the prospective participant is unable to certify to any of g. The prospective first tier participant further agrees by submitting this proposal that it will include the clause titled "Certification the statements in this certification, such prospective participant Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary shall attach an explanation to this proposal. Exclusion-Lower Tier Covered Transactions," provided by the department or contracting agency, entering into this covered
LPP 18-01 29 Page 17 of 23 January 2019 APPENDICES Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-G Required Federal-Aid Contract Language
FHWA-1273 -- Revised May 1, 2012
h. Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require 2. Instructions for Certification - Lower Tier Participants: establishment of a system of records in order to render in good faith the certification required by this clause. The knowledge and (Applicable to all subcontracts, purchase orders and other lower tier normally possessed by a prudent person in the ordinary course of transactions requiring prior FHWA approval or estimated to cost business dealings. $25,000 or more - 2 CFR Parts 180 and 1200) i. Except for transactions authorized under paragraph e of these a. By signing and submitting this proposal, the prospective lower tier instructions, if a participant in a covered transaction knowingly is providing the certification set out below. enters into a lower tier covered transaction with a person who is suspended, debarred, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from b. The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact participation in this transaction, in addition to other remedies upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was available to the Federal Government, the department or agency entered into. If it is later determined that the prospective lower tier with which this transaction originated may pursue available participant knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, in remedies, including suspension and/or debarment. addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the department, or agency with which this transaction originated * * * * * may pursue available remedies, including suspension and/or Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility debarment. and Voluntary Exclusion--Lower Tier Participants: 1. The prospective lower tier participant certifies, by submission of c. The prospective lower tier participant shall provide immediate this proposal, that neither it nor its principals is presently written notice to the person to which this proposal is submitted if debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared at any time the prospective lower tier participant learns that its ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participating in covered certification was erroneous by reason of changed circumstances. transactions by any Federal department or agency.
d. The terms "covered transaction," "debarred," "suspended," 2. Where the prospective lower tier participant is unable to certify to "ineligible," "participant," "person," "principal," and "voluntarily any of the statements in this certification, such prospective excluded," as used in this clause, are defined in 2 CFR Parts 180 participant shall attach an explanation to this proposal. and 1200. You may contact the person to which this proposal is submitted for assistance in obtaining a copy of those regulations. “First Tier Covered Transactions” refers to any covered * * * * * transaction between a grantee or subgrantee of Federal funds XI. CERTIFICATION REGARDING USE OF CONTRACT FUNDS and a participant (such as the prime or general contract). “Lower FOR LOBBYING Tier Covered Transactions” refers to any covered transaction This provision is applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts under a First Tier Covered Transaction (such as subcontracts). and to all related subcontracts which exceed $100,000 (49 CFR 20). “First Tier Participant” refers to the participant who has entered into a covered transaction with a grantee or subgrantee of 1. The prospective participant certifies, by signing and submitting Federal funds (such as the prime or general contractor). “Lower this bid or proposal, to the best of his or her knowledge and Tier Participant” refers any participant who has entered into a belief, that: covered transaction with a First Tier Participant or other Lower Tier Participants (such as subcontractors and suppliers). a. No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid, by or on behalf of the undersigned, to any person for influencing e. The prospective lower tier participant agrees by submitting this or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any Federal proposal that, should the proposed covered transaction be agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of entered into, it shall not knowingly enter into any lower tier Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in covered transaction with a person who is debarred, suspended, connection with the awarding of any Federal contract, the declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in making of any Federal grant, the making of any Federal loan, this covered transaction, unless authorized by the department or the entering into of any cooperative agreement, and the agency with which this transaction originated. extension, continuation, renewal, amendment, or modification of any Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement. f. The prospective lower tier participant further agrees by submitting b. If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds have been this proposal that it will include this clause titled "Certification paid or will be paid to any person for influencing or attempting to Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary influence an officer or employee of any Federal agency, a Exclusion-Lower Tier Covered Transaction," without modification, Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an in all lower tier covered transactions and in all solicitations for employee of a Member of Congress in connection with this lower tier covered transactions exceeding the $25,000 threshold. Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement, the undersigned shall complete and submit Standard Form-LLL, g. A participant in a covered transaction may rely upon a "Disclosure Form to Report Lobbying," in accordance with its certification of a prospective participant in a lower tier covered instructions. transaction that is not debarred, suspended, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from the covered transaction, unless it knows that the certification is erroneous. A participant is responsible for ensuring that its principals are not suspended, debarred, or otherwise ineligible to participate in covered transactions. To verify the eligibility of its principals, as well as the eligibility of any lower tier prospective participants, each participant may, but is not required to, check the Excluded Parties List System website (https://www.epls.gov/), which is compiled by the General Services Administration.
LPP 18-01 30 Page 18 of 23 January 2019 APPENDICES Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-G Required Federal-Aid Contract Language
2. This certification is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was made or entered into. Submission of this certification is a prerequisite for making or entering into this transaction imposed by 31 U.S.C. 1352. Any person who fails to file the required certification shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000 and not more than $100,000 for each such failure.
3. The prospective participant also agrees by submitting its bid or proposal that the participant shall require that the language of this certification be included in all lower tier subcontracts, which exceed information of participant is not required to exceed that which is $100,000 and that all such recipients shall certify and disclose accordingly.
LPP 18-01 31 Page 19 of 23 January 2019 APPENDICES Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-G Required Federal-Aid Contract Language
12. FEMALE AND MINORITY GOALS To comply with Section II, "Nondiscrimination," of "Required Contract Provisions Federal-Aid Construction Contracts," the following are for female and minority utilization goals for Federal-aid construction contracts and subcontracts that exceed $10,000: The nationwide goal for female utilization is 6.9 percent. The goals for minority utilization [45 Fed Reg 65984 (10/3/1980)] are as follows: MINORITY UTILIZATION GOALS
Goal Economic Area (Percent) Redding CA: 174 Non -SMSA (Standard Metropolitan Statistical Area) Counties: 6.8 CA Lassen; CA Modoc; CA Plumas; CA Shasta; CA Siskiyou; CA Tehama Eureka, CA 175 Non -SMSA Counties: 6.6 CA Del Norte; CA Humboldt; CA Trinity San Francisco-Oakland-San Jose, CA: SMSA Counties: 7120 Salinas -Seaside -Monterey, CA 28.9 CA Monterey 7360 San Francisco -Oakland 25.6 CA Alameda; CA Contra Costa; CA Marin; CA San Francisco; CA San Mateo 7400 San Jose, CA CA Santa Clara, CA 19.6 176 7485 Santa Cruz, CA CA Santa Cruz 14.9 7500 Santa Rosa CA Sonoma 9.1 8720 Vallejo -Fairfield -Napa, CA CA Napa; CA Solano 17.1 Non -SMSA Counties: CA Lake; CA Mendocino; CA San Benito 23.2 Sacramento, CA: SMSA Counties: 6920 Sacramento, CA 16.1 177 CA Placer; CA Sacramento; CA Yolo Non -SMSA Counties 14.3 CA Butte; CA Colusa; CA El Dorado; CA Glenn; CA Nevada; CA Sierra; CA Sutter; CA Yuba Stockton -Modesto, CA: SMSA Counties: 5170 Modesto, CA 12.3 CA Stanislaus 178 8120 Stockton, CA 24.3 CA San Joaquin Non -SMSA Counties 19.8 CA Alpine; CA Amador; CA Calaveras; CA Mariposa; CA Merced; CA Tuolumne Fresno -Bakersfield, CA SMSA Counties: 179 0680 Bakersfield, CA 19.1 CA Kern 2840 Fresno, CA 26.1
LPP 18-01 32 Page 20 of 23 January 2019 APPENDICES Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-G Required Federal-Aid Contract Language
CA Fresno Non -SMSA Counties: 23.6 CA Kings; CA Madera; CA Tulare
Los Angeles, CA: SMSA Counties: 0360 Anaheim -Santa Ana -Garden Grove, CA 11.9 CA Orange 4480 Los Angeles -Long Beach, CA 28.3 CA Los Angeles 6000 Oxnard -Simi Valley -Ventura, CA 21.5 180 CA Ventura 6780 Riverside -San Bernardino -Ontario, CA 19.0 CA Riverside; CA San Bernardino 7480 Santa Barbara -Santa Maria -Lompoc, CA 19.7 CA Santa Barbara Non -SMSA Counties 24.6 CA Inyo; CA Mono; CA San Luis Obispo San Diego, CA: SMSA Counties 7320 San Diego, CA 16.9 181 CA San Diego Non -SMSA Counties 18.2 CA Imperial
For the last full week July during which work is performed under the contract, you and each non material-supplier subcontractor with a subcontract of $10,000 or more must complete Form FHWA PR-1391 (Appendix C to 23 CFR 230). Submit the forms by August 15.
13. TITLE VI ASSURANCES
During the performance of this Agreement, the contractor, for itself, its assignees and successors in interest (hereinafter collectively referred to as CONTRACTOR) agrees as follows: (1) Compliance with Regulations: CONTRACTOR shall comply with the regulations relative to nondiscrimination in federally assisted programs of the Department of Transportation, Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 21, as they may be amended from time to time, (hereinafter referred to as the REGULATIONS), which are herein incorporated by reference and made a part of this agreement. (2) Nondiscrimination: CONTRACTOR, with regard to the work performed by it during the AGREEMENT, shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, sex, national origin, religion, age, or disability in the selection and retention of sub-applicants, including procurements of materials and leases of equipment. CONTRACTOR shall not participate either directly or indirectly in the discrimination prohibited by Section 21.5 of the Regulations, including employment practices when the agreement covers a program set forth in Appendix B of the Regulations. (3) Solicitations for Sub-agreements, Including Procurements of Materials and Equipment: In all solicitations either by competitive bidding or negotiation made by CONTRACTOR for work to be performed under a Sub- agreement, including procurements of materials or leases of equipment, each potential sub-applicant or supplier shall be notified by CONTRACTOR of the CONTRACTOR’S obligations under this Agreement and the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination on the grounds of race, color, or national origin. (4) Information and Reports: CONTRACTOR shall provide all information and reports required by the Regulations, or directives issued pursuant thereto, and shall permit access to its books, records, accounts, other sources of information, and its facilities as may be determined by the California Department of Transportation or FHWA to be pertinent to ascertain compliance with such Regulations or directives. Where any information
LPP 18-01 33 Page 21 of 23 January 2019 APPENDICES Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-G Required Federal-Aid Contract Language
required of CONTRACTOR is in the exclusive possession of another who fails or refuses to furnish this information, CONTRACTOR shall so certify to the California Department of Transportation or the FHWA as appropriate, and shall set forth what efforts CONTRACTOR has made to obtain the information. (5) Sanctions for Noncompliance: In the event of CONTRACTOR’s noncompliance with the nondiscrimination provisions of this agreement, the California Department of Transportation shall impose such agreement sanctions as it or the FHWA may determine to be appropriate, including, but not limited to: (a) withholding of payments to CONTRACTOR under the Agreement within a reasonable period of time, not to exceed 90 days; and/or (b) cancellation, termination or suspension of the Agreement, in whole or in part. (6) Incorporation of Provisions: CONTRACTOR shall include the provisions of paragraphs (1) through (6) in every sub-agreement, including procurements of materials and leases of equipment, unless exempt by the Regulations, or directives issued pursuant thereto. CONTRACTOR shall take such action with respect to any sub-agreement or procurement as the California Department of Transportation or FHWA may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for noncompliance, provided, however, that, in the event CONTRACTOR becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a sub-applicant or supplier as a result of such direction, CONTRACTOR may request the California Department of Transportation enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the State, and, in addition, CONTRACTOR may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States. 14. USE OF UNITED STATES-FLAG VESSELS (CARGO PREFERENCE ACT) The CONTRACTOR agrees- 1. To utilize privately owned United States-flag commercial vessels to ship at least 50 percent of the gross tonnage (computed separately for dry bulk carries, dry cargo liners, and tankers) involved, whenever shipping any equipment, material, or commodities pursuant to this contract, to the extent such vessels are available at fair and reasonable rates for United States-flag commercial vessels. 2. To Furnish within 20 days following the date of loading for shipments originating within the United State or within 30 working days following the date of loading for shipments originating outside the United States, a legible copy of a rated “on-board” commercial ocean bill-of-lading in English for each shipment of cargo described in paragraph (1) of this section to both the Contracting Officer (through the prime contractor in the case of subcontractor bills-of-lading) and to the Division of National Cargo, Office of Market Development, Maritime Administration, Washington, DC 20590. 3. To insert the substance of the provisions of this clause in all subcontracts issued pursuant to this contract.
LPP 18-01 34 Page 22 of 23 January 2019 APPENDICES Local Assistance Procedures Manual Exhibit 12-G Required Federal-Aid Contract Language
Federal Trainee Program Special Provisions (to be used when applicable) 15. FEDERAL TRAINEE PROGRAM For the Federal training program, the number of trainees or apprentices is 1 . This section applies if a number of trainees or apprentices is specified in the special provisions. As part of your equal opportunity affirmative action program, provide on-the-job training to develop full journeymen in the types of trades or job classifications involved. You have primary responsibility for meeting this training requirement. If you subcontract a contract part, determine how many trainees or apprentices are to be trained by the subcontractor. Include these training requirements in your subcontract. Where feasible, 25 percent of apprentices or trainees in each occupation must be in their 1st year of apprenticeship or training. Distribute the number of apprentices or trainees among the work classifications on the basis of your needs and the availability of journeymen in the various classifications within a reasonable recruitment area. Before starting work, submit to the City of Arroyo Grande : 1. Number of apprentices or trainees to be trained for each classification 2. Training program to be used 3. Training starting date for each classification Obtain the City of Arroyo Grande’s approval for this submitted information before you start work. The City of Arroyo Grande credits you for each apprentice or trainee you employ on the work who is currently enrolled or becomes enrolled in an approved program. The primary objective of this section is to train and upgrade minorities and women toward journeymen status. Make every effort to enroll minority and women apprentices or trainees, such as conducting systematic and direct recruitment through public and private sources likely to yield minority and women apprentices or trainees, to the extent they are available within a reasonable recruitment area. Show that you have made the efforts. In making these efforts, do not discriminate against any applicant for training. Do not employ as an apprentice or trainee an employee: 1. In any classification in which the employee has successfully completed a training course leading to journeyman status or in which the employee has been employed as a journeyman 2. Who is not registered in a program approved by the US Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training Ask the employee if the employee has successfully completed a training course leading to journeyman status or has been employed as a journeyman. Your records must show the employee's answers to the questions. In your training program, establish the minimum length and training type for each classification. The City of Arroyo Grande and FHWA approves a program if one of the following is met: 1. It is calculated to: . Meet the your equal employment opportunity responsibilities . Qualify the average apprentice or trainee for journeyman status in the classification involved by the end of the training period 2. It is registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, and it is administered in a way consistent with the equal employment responsibilities of Federal-aid highway construction contracts Obtain the State's approval for your training program before you start work involving the classification covered by the program.
LPP 18-01 35 Page 22 of 23 January 2019 Local Assistance Procedures Manual APPENDICES Exhibit 12-G Required Federal-Aid Contract Language
Provide training in the construction crafts, not in clerk-typist or secretarial-type positions. Training is allowed in lower level management positions such as office engineers, estimators, and timekeepers if the training is oriented toward construction applications. Training is allowed in the laborer classification if significant and meaningful training is provided and approved by the division office. Off-site training is allowed if the training is an integral part of an approved training program and does not make up a significant part of the overall training. The City of Arroyo Grande reimburses you 80 cents per hour of training given an employee on this contract under an approved training program: 1. For on-site training 2. For off-site training if the apprentice or trainee is currently employed on a Federal-aid project and you do at least one of the following: . Contribute to the cost of the training . Provide the instruction to the apprentice or trainee . Pay the apprentice's or trainee's wages during the off-site training period 3. If you comply this section. Each apprentice or trainee must: 1. Begin training on the project as soon as feasible after the start of work involving the apprentice's or trainee's skill 2. Remain on the project as long as training opportunities exist in the apprentice's or trainee's work classification or until the apprentice or trainee has completed the training program Furnish the apprentice or trainee: 1. Copy of the program you will comply with in providing the training
Page 23 of 23 LPP 18-01 36 January 2019 APPE NDICES
Attachment 3: Federal Wage Rates
Federal Wage Rates are not physically incorporated into this contract advertising package but the applicable federal wage rates can be found on the State of California Department of Industrial Relations website at:
https://www.dir.ca.gov/OPRL/DPreWageDetermination.htm
The final contract documents signed by the City and the contractor will physically include the current federal wage rates.
--END OF CONTRACT --
37 APPE NDICES
PAYMENT BOND (FOR LABOR AND MATERIAL)
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That we, , as Principal, and
as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Arroyo Grande, in the sum of Dollars ($ ) lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
The condition of the above obligation is such that whereas said Principal has been awarded and is about to enter into a written contract with the City of Arroyo Grande for the work described in CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF, “BRIDGE STREET BRIDGE REHABILITATION, PW 2020-1, FEDERAL CONTRACT #BHLO-5199(027)”, which is attached hereto, made a part hereof, and to which reference is hereby made for all particulars, and is required by said City to give this bond in connection with the execution of said contract;
NOW THEREFORE, if said Principal, as Contractor in said contract, or Principal's Subcontractor, fail to pay any of the persons referred to in Section 3181 of the Civil Code of the State of California for labor performed, skills or other necessary services bestowed, site improvement made, equipment leased, or appliances, equipment implements, machinery, materials, power, provender, provisions, teams, or trucks furnished or used in, upon, for, or about the performance of the work contracted to be done, or for amounts due under the employment Insurance Act with respect to work or labor performed by any such claimant, said Surety shall pay for the same. In an amount not exceeding the sum specified above; and if suit is brought upon this bond, a reasonable attorney's fee to be fixed by the court. This bond is pursuant to the provisions of Ch 7 Div 3, Pt 4, Tit 15, of the Civil Code of the State of California, and shall insure to the benefit of any of the persons referred to in said Civil Code Section 3181, as it now exists or may hereafter be amended, so as to give a fight of action to such persons or their assigns in any suit brought upon this bond. No premature payment by said City to said Principal shall exonerate any Surety unless the City Council of said City shall have actual notice that such payment is premature at the time and it is ordered by said Council, and then only to the extent that such payment shall result in loss to such Surety, but in no event more than the amount of such premature payment.
It is agreed, that any alterations in the work to be done, or increase or decrease of the material to be furnished, which may be made pursuant to the terms of said contract shall not in any way release either the Principal or Surety hereunder, nor shall any extension of time granted under the provisions of said contract release either the Principal or Surety, and notice of such alterations or extensions of the contract is hereby waived by the surety.
WITNESS our hands this day of , 2020.
38 APPE NDICES
Surety Principal
ALL SIGNATURES MUST BE WITNESSED BY NOTARY (Attach appropriate jurats)
-- END OF PAYMENT BOND --
39 APPE NDICES
FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That we, , as Principal, and
as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Arroyo Grande, in the sum of Dollars ($ ) lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, has been awarded and is about to enter into a written contract with the City of Arroyo Grande for the work described in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE “BRIDGE STREET BRIDGE REHABILITATION, PW 2020-1, FEDERAL CONTRACT #BHLO-5199(027)” which is attached hereto, made a part hereof, and to which reference is hereby made for all particulars, and is required by said City to give this bond in connection with the execution of said contract;
NOW, THEREFORE, if said Principal shall well and truly do and perform all of the covenants and obligations of said contract on Principal's part to be done and performed at the times and in the manner specified therein, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect. No premature payment by said City to said Principal shall exonerate any Surety unless the City Council of said City shall have actual notice that such payment is premature at the time it is ordered by said Council, and then only to the extent that such payment shall result in loss to such Surety, but in no event more than the amount of such premature payment.
It is agreed, that any alterations in the work to be done, or increase or decrease of the material to be furnished, which may be made pursuant to the terms of said contract shall not in any way release either the Principal or Surety hereunder, nor shall any extensions of time granted under the provisions of said contract release either the principal or surety, and notice of such alterations or extensions of the contract is hereby waived by the Surety.
WITNESS our hands this day of , 2020.
Surety Principal
ALL SIGNATURES MUST BE WITNESSED BY NOTARY (Attach appropriate jurats)
-- END OF FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND --
40